advertisement
CDM-570L
L-band Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module
Installation and Operation Manual
Part Number MN/CDM570L.IOM Revision 1
Errata A
Comtech EFData Documentation Update
Subject:
Date:
Part Number:
Related Document:
Change Fuse callout
November 3, 2004
MN/CDM570L.EA1
CDM-570L Rev. 1, dated July 12, 2004 MN/CDM570L.IOM
L-Band Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module
Collating Instructions: Attach this page to page xv
Comments:
This information will be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
Fuses
The CDM-570L is fitted with two fuses - one each for line and neutral connections. These are contained within the body of the IEC power inlet connector, behind a small plastic flap.
• Use T3.15A, 20mm fuses for 115 and 230 volt AC operation
FOR CONTINUED OPERATOR SAFETY, ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES WITH THE
CORRECT TYPE AND RATING.
Filename: T_ERRATA
1
CDM-570L
L-band Satellite Modem with optional IP Module
Installation and Operation Manual
Comtech EF Data is an ISO 9001
Registered Company.
Part Number MN/CDM570L.IOM
Revision 1
July 12, 2004
Copyright © Comtech EF Data, 2004. All rights reserved. Printed in the USA.
Comtech EF Data, 2114 West 7th Street, Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA, 480.333.2200, FAX: 480.333.2161
Errata B
Comtech EFData Documentation Update
Subject:
Date:
Part Number:
Related Document:
Change Fuse callout
November 3, 2004
MN/CDM570L.EB1
CDM-570L Rev. 1, dated July 12, 2004 MN/CDM570L.IOM
L-Band Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module
Collating Instructions: Attach this page to page 24
Comments:
This information will be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
5.10 AC Power Connector
A standard, detachable, non-locking, 3-prong power cord (IEC plug) supplies the
Alternating Current (AC) power to the modem. Note the following:
Input Power
Input Voltage
Connector Type
Fuse Protection
AC Power Specifications
40W maximum, 20W typical
100 - 240 volts AC, +6%/-10% - autosensing
(total absolute max. range is 90 - 254 volts AC)
IEC
T3.15A, 20mm fuses for 115 and 230 volt AC operation
Line and neutral fusing
20 mm type fuses
Filename: T_ERRATA
1
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
This page is intentionally blank
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM ii
Errata C
Comtech EFData Documentation Update
Subject:
Date:
Part Number:
Related Document:
Change Operating Modes for: Proprietary EDMAC framed mode
November 8, 2004
MN/CDM570L.EC1
CDM-570L Rev. 1, dated July 12, 2004 MN/CDM570L.IOM
L-Band Satellite Modem with Optional IP Module
Collating Instructions: Attach this page to page 119
Comments:
This information will be incorporated into the next revision.
Change Specifics:
Operating modes
Transparent, Closed Network, IESS-315 (VSAT Turbo)
Proprietary EDMAC framed mode:
* 5% overhead – all modes except BPSK Turbo, Rate 1/2 OQPSK Turbo, and data rates, <2.048 Mbps
* 1.5% overhead - Rate 21/44, 5/16 Turbo, Rate 1/2 OQPSK Turbo, and all other rates >2.048 Mbps
* 1.6% overhead – EDMAC-2 – all data rates
R-S Outer Codec (optional)
* 220,200 outer code (transparent mode)
* 200,180 outer code (EDMAC modes)
Turbo Product Codec (optional):
* Rate 21/44 BPSK
* Rate 5/16 BPSK
* Rate 21/44 QPSK/OQPSK
* Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/16-QAM
* Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/16-QAM
* Rate 0.95 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK (exact Code Rate is actually 0.944)
LDPC (planned future upgrade – consult Factory for latest information)
Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) mode
Filename: T_ERRATA
1
Table of Contents
TELECOMMUNICATIONS TERMINAL EQUIPMENT DIRECTIVE ..........................................XVI
iii
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
5.9 ETHERNET INTERFACE CONNECTORS (TRAFFIC AND M&C)...................................... 24
iv
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
CHAPTER 7. FORWARD ERROR CORRECTION OPTIONS................................................. 85
7.3 REED-SOLOMON OUTER CODEC (HARDWARE OPTION) ............................................. 86
7.4 TRELLIS CODING (REQUIRES 8-PSK/8-QAM FAST OPTION) ........................................ 88
v
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
CHAPTER 11. AUTOMATIC UPLINK POWER CONTROL................................................... 115
vi
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
CHAPTER 14. IP MODULE ETHERNET INTERFACE OVERVIEW....................................... 157
CHAPTER 15. TYPICAL IP MODULE OPERATIONAL SETUPS .......................................... 171
CHAPTER 16. IP MODULE CLI AND TELNET OPERATION ................................................ 179
vii
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
CDM-570L MANAGEMENT INFORMATION BASE (MIB) FILES ............................. 259
viii
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
EASYCONNECT POINT-TO-POINT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION...................................... 292
ROUTER MODE POINT-TO-POINT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ......................................... 294
ix
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
x
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Figures
Figure 14. Comtech EF Data Turbo Product Codec Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK, 8-PSK AND 16-QAM......97
Figure 15. Comtech EF Data Turbo Product Codec Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK, 8-PSK AND 16-QAM......98
Figure 16. Comtech EF Data Turbo Product Codec Rate 21/44 QPSK, Rate 0.95 QPSK and Rate 0.95
xi
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Tables
xii
Preface
Customer Service
Contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department for:
• Product support or training
• Information on upgrading or returning a product
• Reporting comments or suggestions concerning manuals
A Customer Support representative may be reached at:
Comtech EF Data
Attention: Customer Support Department
2114 West 7th Street
Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA
480.333.2200 (Main Comtech EF Data Number)
480.333.4357 (Customer Support Desk)
480.333.2161 FAX or, E-Mail can be sent to the Customer Support Department at: [email protected]
Contact us via the web at www.comtechefdata.com
.
To return a Comtech EF Data product (in-warranty and out-of-warranty) for repair or replacement:
• Request a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number from the Comtech EF Data
Customer Support Department.
• Be prepared to supply the Customer Support representative with the model number, serial number, and a description of the problem.
• To ensure that the product is not damaged during shipping, pack the product in its original shipping carton/packaging.
• Ship the product back to Comtech EF Data. (Shipping charges should be prepaid.)
For more information regarding the warranty policies, see p. xiv. xiii
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
About this Manual
This manual provides installation and operation information for the Comtech EF Data
CDM-570L satellite modem with IP Module. This is a technical document intended for earth station engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the operation and maintenance of the CDM-570L with IP Module.
Conventions and References
Metric Conversion
Metric conversion information is located on the inside back cover of this manual. This information is provided to assist the operator in cross-referencing non-metric to metric conversions.
Cautions and Warnings
IMPORTANT
Indicates information critical for proper equipment function.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Recommended Standard Designations
Recommended Standard (RS) Designations have been superseded by the new designation of the Electronic Industries Association (EIA). References to the old designations are shown only when depicting actual text displayed on the screen of the unit (RS-232, RS-
485, etc.). All other references in the manual will be shown with the EIA designations. xiv
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Reporting Comments or Suggestions Concerning this Manual
Comments and suggestions regarding the content and design of this manual will be appreciated. To submit comments, please contact the Comtech EF Data Technical
Publications Department: [email protected].
Electrical Safety
The CDM-570L Modem has been shown to comply with the following safety standard:
• EN 60950: Safety of Information Technology Equipment, including electrical business machines
The equipment is rated for operation over the range 100 - 240 volts AC. It has a maximum power consumption of 250 Watts (when equipped with a 150W BUC power supply), and draws a maximum of 2.5 Amps.
The user should observe the following instructions:
IMPORTANT
Fuses
The CDM-570L is fitted with two fuses - one each for line and neutral connections.
These are contained within the body of the IEC power inlet connector, behind a small plastic flap.
• For 230 volt AC operation, use T2.5A, 20mm fuses.
• For 115 volt AC operation, use T5.0A fuses, 20mm fuses.
FOR CONTINUED OPERATOR SAFETY, ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSES
WITH THE CORRECT TYPE AND RATING.
Environmental
The CDM-570L must not be operated in an environment where the unit is exposed to extremes of temperature outside the ambient range 0 to 50°C, precipitation, condensation, or humid atmospheres above 95% RH, altitudes (non-pressurized) greater than 2000 meters, excessive dust or vibration, flammable gases, corrosive or explosive atmospheres.
Operation in vehicles or other transportable installations that are equipped to provide a stable environment is permitted. If such vehicles do not provide a stable environment, safety of the equipment to EN60950 may not be guaranteed. xv
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Installation
The installation and connection to the line supply must be made in compliance to local or national wiring codes and regulations.
The CDM-570L is designed for connection to a power system that has separate ground, line and neutral conductors. The equipment is not designed for connection to a power system that has no direct connection to ground.
The CDM-570L is shipped with a line inlet cable suitable for use in the country of operation. If it is necessary to replace this cable, ensure the replacement has an equivalent specification. Examples of acceptable ratings for the cable include HAR, BASEC and
HOXXX-X. Examples of acceptable connector ratings include VDE, NF-USE, UL, CSA,
OVE, CEBEC, NEMKO, DEMKO, BS1636A, BSI, SETI, IMQ, KEMA-KEUR and
SEV.
International Symbols:
~
Alternating Current
Fuse
Protective Earth
Chassis Ground
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive
In accordance with the Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive 91/263/EEC, this equipment should not be directly connected to the Public Telecommunications
Network. xvi
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
In accordance with European Directive 89/336/EEC, the CDM-570L Modem has been shown, by independent testing, to comply with the following standards:
Emissions: EN 55022 Class B - Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.
Immunity:
Additionally, the CDM-570L has been shown to comply with the following standards:
(Also tested to FCC Part 15 Class B)
EN 50082 Part 1 - Generic immunity standard, Part 1: Domestic, commercial and light industrial environment.
EN 61000-3-2
EN 61000-3-3
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-8
EN 61000-4-9
EN 61000-4-11
EN 61000-4-13
Harmonic Currents Emission
Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker
ESD Immunity
EFT Burst Immunity
Surge Immunity
RF Conducted Immunity
Power frequency Magnetic Field Immunity
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity
Voltage Dips, Interruptions, and Variations Immunity
Immunity to Harmonics
In order that the Modem continues to comply with these standards, observe the following instructions:
IMPORTANT
• Connections to the transmit and receive IF ports (‘N’ type female connectors) should be made using a good quality coaxial cable - for example, RG213/U.
• All 'D' type connectors attached to the rear panel must have back-shells that provide continuous metallic shielding. Cable with a continuous outer shield
(either foil or braid, or both) must be used, and the shield must be bonded to the back-shell.
• The equipment must be operated with its cover on at all times. If it becomes necessary to remove the cover, the user should ensure that the cover is correctly re-fitted before normal operation commences. xvii
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Warranty Policy
This Comtech EF Data product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of 2 years from the date of shipment. During the warranty period, Comtech
EF Data will, at its option, repair or replace products that prove to be defective.
For equipment under warranty, the customer is responsible for freight to Comtech EF
Data and all related custom, taxes, tariffs, insurance, etc. Comtech EF Data is responsible for the freight charges only for return of the equipment from the factory to the customer.
Comtech EF Data will return the equipment by the same method (i.e., Air, Express,
Surface) as the equipment was sent to Comtech EF Data.
Limitations of Warranty
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper installation or maintenance, abuse, unauthorized modification, or operation outside of environmental specifications for the product, or, for damages that occur due to improper repackaging of equipment for return to Comtech EF Data.
No other warranty is expressed or implied. Comtech EF Data specifically disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for particular purpose.
Exclusive Remedies
The remedies provided herein are the buyer's sole and exclusive remedies. Comtech EF
Data shall not be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages, whether based on contract, tort, or any other legal theory.
Disclaimer
Comtech EF Data has reviewed this manual thoroughly in order to provide an easy-to-use guide to your equipment. All statements, technical information, and recommendations in this manual and in any guides or related documents are believed reliable, but the accuracy and completeness thereof are not guaranteed or warranted, and they are not intended to be, nor should they be understood to be, representations or warranties concerning the products described. Further, Comtech EF Data reserves the right to make changes in the specifications of the products described in this manual at any time without notice and without obligation to notify any person of such changes.
If you have any questions regarding your equipment or the information in this manual, please contact the Comtech EF Data Customer Support Department. xviii
Chapter 1. INTRODUCTION
Figure 1. CDM-570L
1.1 Introduction
The CDM-570L (Figure 1-1, shown above) is an L-band Satellite Modem, intended for closed network applications.
• It offers variable data rates from 2.4 kbps to 5 Mbps, in BPSK, QPSK, Offset
QPSK, 8-PSK, and 16-QAM modes.
• Viterbi, concatenated Reed-Solomon (RS), Trellis Coded Modulation (TCM), and Turbo Product Coding (TPC, IESS-315 compliant) are provided as Forward
Error Correction (FEC) options.
• A full range of interface types is built in (no plug in cards required) including
T1 and E1 G.703 types.
• The IF frequency range covers 950 to 1950 MHz.
• Full support for external Block Up-Converters (BUCs) and low-noise block downconverters (LNBs) is provided. An optional BUC power supply, up to 150
Watts may be installed internally. 10 MHz reference signals are available to drive both BUC and LNB. LNB power and FSK for ‘smart’ BUCs is standard.
• The modem is compact, 1U high and 16 inches deep, and consumes only 22
Watts (typical, not including BUC power supply).
• It has a front panel VFD display and keypad for local configuration and control, although it can be fully remote-controlled.
• An optional integrated 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface offers a wide range of network-based management options, such as SNMP, http (web server), and
Telnet.
1
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
1.1.1 EDMAC
To facilitate network management for small networks, the CDM-570L incorporates
EDMAC , ( E mbedded D istant-end M onitor A nd C ontrol). In this mode, an additional 5% overhead is combined with the traffic data, (1.6% in Turbo BPSK modes, Turbo Rate 1/2
QPSK/OQPSK, and all data rates greater than 2 Mbps). M&C information is added
(transparent to the user), allowing access to the distant-end modem. In addition,
EDMAC-2 uses 1.6% overhead in all modes for those applications where the 5% overhead is excessive. The EDMAC and EDMAC-2 modes do not require any additional cabling at either the local or distant-end Modems. Access to EDMAC is via the standard
M&C control port. Full monitor and control is possible, and the on/off status at the distant-end carrier can be controlled.
1.1.2 AUPC
An important feature in the CDM-570L is the addition of Automatic Uplink Power
Control (AUPC). This feature enables the modem to automatically adjust its output power to maintain the Eb/No of the remote end of the satellite link constant. This provides protection against rain fading, a particularly severe problem with Ku-band links.
To accomplish this, the framed (EDMAC) mode of operation must be used, and the distant end modem constantly sends back information about the demodulator Eb/No using reserved bytes in the overhead structure. Using the Eb/No, the local modem then adjusts its output power, and a closed-loop feedback system is created over the satellite link.
A benefit of this feature is that whenever EDMAC/AUPC operation is selected, the remote demodulator’s Eb/No can be viewed from the front panel display of the local modem. Note that both EDMAC and AUPC can be used simultaneously.
1.1.3 Software – Flash Upgrading
IMPORTANT
The internal software is both powerful and flexible, permitting storage and retrieval of up to 10 different modem configurations. The modem uses ‘flash memory’ technology internally, and new firmware can be uploaded to the unit from an external PC. This simplifies software upgrading, and updates can be sent via the Internet (from Comtech EF
Data’s Web server), e-mail, or on CD. The upgrade can be performed without opening the unit, by simply connecting the modem to a 10/100BaseT Ethernet port, or the USB port of a computer.
USB re-flash not available in first firmware release – please consult factory for release schedule.
2
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
1.1.4 Verification
The unit includes many test modes and loopbacks for rapid verification of the correct function of the unit. In particular, the IF loopback permits the user to perform a quick diagnostic test without disturbing external cabling. During the loopback, all the receive configuration parameters are temporarily changed to match the transmit side, and an internal RF switch connects the modulator output to the demodulator input. When normal operation is again selected, all of the previous values are restored.
1.1.5 Data Interfaces
The CDM-570L includes, as standard, a universal data interface that eliminates the need to exchange interface cards for different applications. The interfaces offered include:
• EIA-422 (EIA530) DCE (at rates up to 5 Mbps)
• X.21 DTE and DCE (at rates up to 5 Mbps)
• V.35 DCE (at rates up to 5 Mbps)
• Synchronous EIA-232 DCE (at rates up to 300 kbps)
• G.703 E1 (2048 kbps), balanced and unbalanced
• G.703 T1 (1544 kbps), balanced
• Optional – integrated 10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface
1.2 Major Assemblies
Assembly Description
AS/10554 Turbo Codec
PL/10047-1 Chassis
PL/10235 IP Module 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Interface (optional)
1.3 FAST Options and Hardware Options
The CDM-570L is extremely flexible and powerful, and incorporates a large number of optional features. In order to permit a lower initial cost, the modem may be purchased with only the desired features enabled. If, at a later date, a user wishes to upgrade the functionality of a modem, Comtech EF Data provides FAST ( F ully A ccessible S ystem
T opology) which permits the purchase and installation of options through special authorization codes, entered remotely, or through the front panel.
3
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Option
The base unit is configured with a Viterbi codec. It offers BPSK, QPSK, and OQPSK modulation types, and data rates up to 512 kbps, with all interface types except G.703.
EDMAC and AUPC operation are included.
The following table shows what other options are available:
Low Rate Variable
Mid-Rate Variable
Full Rate Variable
8-PSK/8QAM*
Description and Comments
Data rate 2.4 kbps to 512 kbps
Data rate 2.4 kbps to 2.048 Mbps
Data rate 2.4 kbps to 5.0 Mbps
Modulation Type
Option
Installation
Method
BASE UNIT
FAST
FAST
FAST
FAST
Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
RS Codec
TPC Codec
TPC/LDPC Codec *
100W BPSU
150W BPSU
Closed-network Reed-Solomon Codec
5 Mbps Turbo Product Codec (IESS-315 compliant)
Combo TPC and LDPC (Low-density parity check)
Codec
100 Watt, 24 volt BUC PSU
150 Watt, 48 volt BUC PSU
IP MODULE Ethernet interface
IP MODULE Ethernet Interface and IP Options
10/100 BaseT Ethernet interface
3xDES Data Encryption Uses NIST certified 3x core
Software Version 1.4.0 and later
IP Header Compression Software Version 1.4.0 and later
Payload Compression Software Version 1.4.0 and later
Quality of Service (QoS) Software Version 1.4.0 and later
Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
FAST
FAST
FAST
FAST
* consult factory for availability
1.3.1 FAST Accessible Options
Comtech EF Data’s FAST system allows immediate implementation of different options through the user interface keypad, or via the remote control interface. All FAST options are available through the basic platform unit.
1.3.2 FAST System Theory
FAST is an enhancement feature available in Comtech EF Data products, enabling onlocation upgrade of the operating feature set without removing a modem from the setup.
When service requirements change, the operator can upgrade the topology of the modem to meet those requirements within minutes after confirmation by Comtech EF Data. This accelerated upgrade can be accomplished because of FAST’s extensive use of programmable logic devices incorporated into Comtech EF Data’s products. A unique
4
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM access code enables configuration of the available hardware. The access code can be purchased at any time from Comtech EF Data. Once obtained, the access code is loaded into the unit through the front panel keyboard or the rear remote port.
With FAST technology, operators have maximum flexibility for enabling functions as they are required. FAST allows an operator to order a modem precisely tailored for the initial application.
1.3.3 Implementation
FAST is factory-implemented in the modem at the time of order. Hardware options for basic modems can be ordered and installed either at the factory or in the field. The operator can select options that can be activated easily in the field, depending on the current hardware configuration of the modem. The Activation Procedure is described in
Appendix C.
1.3.4 Hardware Options
There are three hardware options available: Reed-Solomon Codec, Turbo Product Codec, and the IP Module Ethernet Interface. These cards fit into expansion slots on the main circuit board.
1.3.5 Supporting Hardware and Software
For 1:1 applications the CDM-570L is supported by the CRS-170, a low-cost external switch. For Hub applications, the CDM-570L is supported by a low-cost 1:N switch, the
CRS-300, with the CRS-280L.
The CDM-570L is supported by Comtech EF Data’s CMCS software, a Windows TM based application that provides a ‘point and click’ interface for complete systems of
Comtech EF Data equipment, comprising Modems, Transceivers, and Redundancy
Switches. For more information, or to order a free demo disk, please contact the factory.
1.4 Compatibility
The CDM-570L is fully backward-compatible with the Comtech EF Data CDM-500,
CDM-550, and CDM-550T modems, in addition to the CDM-600, CDM-600L, SDM-
300 and SDM-300L in selected modes.
Note: For CDM-570L with IP Module Ethernet Interface Option – The CDM-570L is fully backward-compatible with the Comtech EF Data CDM-IP 550 and CDM-IP 300L in selected modes.
5
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
This page is intentionally blank
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6
Chapter 2. INSTALLATION
2.1 Unpacking
Inspect shipping containers for damage. If shipping containers are damaged, keep them until the contents of the shipment have been carefully inspected and checked for normal operation.
The modem and manual are packaged in pre-formed, reusable, cardboard cartons containing foam spacing for maximum shipping protection.
Do not use any cutting tool that will extend more than 1 inch into the container. This can cause damage to the modem.
CAUTION
Unpack the modem as follows:
1. Cut the tape at the top of the carton indicated by OPEN THIS END.
2. Remove the cardboard/foam space covering the modem.
3. Remove the modem, manual, and power cord from the carton.
4. Save the packing material for storage or reshipment purposes.
5. Inspect the equipment for any possible damage incurred during shipment.
6. Check the equipment against the packing list to ensure the shipment is correct.
7. Refer to the following sections for further installation instructions.
7
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
2.2 Mounting
If the CDM-570L is to be mounted in a rack, ensure that there is adequate clearance for ventilation, particularly at the sides. In rack systems where there is high heat dissipation, forced air cooling must be provided by top or bottom mounted fans or blowers. Under no circumstance should the highest internal rack temperature be allowed to exceed 50°C
(122°F).
IMPORTANT
The CDM-570L CANNOT have rack slides mounted to the side of the chassis. Two cooling fans are mounted on the right-hand side of the unit.
However, Comtech EF Data recommends that an alternate method of support within the rack be employed, such as rack shelves. If there is any doubt, please consult the Comtech EF Data Customer Support department.
Optional rear-mounting installation bracket
Install optional installation bracket (Figure 2-1) using mounting kit, KT/6228-2.
Optional: Mounting Kit , KT/6228-2
Quantity Part Number
2 FP/6138-1
4
2
HW/10-32x1/2RK
HW/10-32HEXNUT
Description
Bracket, Rear Support
Bolt, #10 Rack
Nut, #10 Hex
2 HW/10-32FLT Flat
2 HW/10-32X1/4 SHC Screw, Socket 10-32 x 1/4inch
The tools required for this installation are a medium Phillips screwdriver , and a
5/32-inch SAE Allen Wrench.
Refer to the following Figure, then install the Modem rear support brackets as follows: a) Install the rear support brackets onto the mounting rail of the rack. Fasten with the bracket bolts. b) Mount the modem into the equipment rack ensuring that the socket heads engage into the modem slots of the rear support brackets. c) Fasten the provided #10 socket head screws to the rear-side mounting slots on either side of the chassis modem and secure with #10 flat washers and #10 hex nuts.
8
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Equipment
Rack
Mounting
Rail
* #10 Socket head screw
* BRACKET
BOLTS
*
Support
Bracket
#10 Flat Washer
#10 Hex Nut
* Note: Components of mounting kit KT/6228-1
Back of Modem
Figure 2. Installation of the Optional Mounting Bracket, KT/6228-2
9
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
2.3 Configuration
There are no internal jumpers to configure, no interface cards to install, and no other options to install. All configurations are carried out entirely in software. The unit should first be configured locally, using the front panel keypad and display. The unit will ship with a default 64 kbps, QPSK, Rate 1/2 configuration. Please refer to the ‘FRONT
PANEL OPERATION’ section for details on how to fully configure the unit for the desired operating parameters.
Note: The auto-sensing AC power supply does not require any adjustments. Simply plug in the supplied line cord, and turn on the switch on the rear panel.
2.4 Select Internal IF Loop
Correct operation of the unit may be verified rapidly, without the need for externally connected equipment. From the top level menu, select TEST, then IF LOOP (refer to the
‘FRONT PANEL OPERATION’ section). The demod should synchronize, and the green
RECEIVE TRAFFIC LED should illuminate. If the unit does not pass this test, call
Comtech EF Data Customer Support department for assistance.
2.5 Connect External Cables
Having verified correct operation in IF loop, enter the desired configuration, and proceed to connect all external cables. If difficulties occur, please call the factory for assistance.
10
Chapter 3. FUNCTIONAL
DESCRIPTION
The CDM-570L has two fundamentally different types of interface - IF and data.
• The data interface is a bi-directional path which connects with the customer’s equipment (assumed to be the DTE) and the modem (assumed to be the DCE).
• The IF interface provides a bi-directional link with the satellite via the uplink and downlink equipment.
Transmit data is received by the terrestrial interface where line receivers convert the clock and data signals to CMOS levels for further processing. A small FIFO follows the terrestrial interface to facilitate the various clocking and framing options. If framing is enabled, the transmit clock and data output from the FIFO pass through the framer, where the EDMAC overhead data is added to the main data. Otherwise, the clock and data are passed directly to the Forward Error Correction encoder. In the FEC encoder, the data is differentially encoded, scrambled, and then convolutionally encoded. Following the encoder, the data is fed to the transmit digital filters, which perform spectral shaping on the data signals. The resultant I and Q signals are then fed to the BPSK, QPSK/OQPSK,
8-PSK, or 16-QAM modulator. The carrier is generated by a frequency synthesizer, and the I and Q signals directly modulate this carrier to produce an IF output signal.
The Rx IF signal is translated to an intermediate frequency at around 465MHz, and from there further translated to baseband, using the carrier recovery VCO. This is a complex mix, resulting in the signal once more being split into an in-phase (I) and a quadrature
(Q) component. An AGC circuit maintains the desired signal level constant over a broad range. Following this, the I and Q signals are sampled by high-speed (flash) A/D converters. All processing beyond this conversion is purely digital, performing the functions of Nyquist filtering, carrier recovery, and symbol timing recovery. The resultant demodulated signal is fed, in soft decision form, to the selected FEC decoder
(which can be Viterbi, TCM, Reed-Solomon, or Turbo if installed). After decoding, the recovered clock and data pass to the de-framer (EDMAC framing is enabled) where the overhead information is removed. Following this, the data passes to the
Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer, which has a programmable size, or may be bypassed.
From here, the receive clock and data signals are routed to the terrestrial interface, and are passed to the externally connected DTE equipment.
11
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The CDM-570L signal processing functions are performed in a single, large Field-
Programmable Gate Array (FPGA) , which permits rapid implementation of changes, additions and enhancements in the field. These signal processing functions are controlled and monitored by a 32-bit RISC microprocessor, which also controls all front panel, serial and Ethernet interfaces.
Physically the CDM-570L modem is comprised of a single printed circuit card assembly, with two expansion slots for FEC codecs and other option cards.
12
Chapter 4. PHYSICAL
DESCRIPTION
4.1 Introduction
The CDM-570L is constructed as a 1U high rack-mounting chassis, which can be freestanding, if desired. Rack handles at the front facilitate removal from and placement into a rack. Figure 3 shows the front panel of the modem.
Figure 3. Front Panel
4.2 Front Panel
On the front panel of the unit is the Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD), keypad, and eight LED indicators. The user enters data via the keypad, and messages are displayed on the VFD. The LEDs indicate, in a summary fashion, the status of the unit.
The Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) is an active display showing 2 lines, each of 24 characters. It produces a blue light, the brightness of which can be controlled by the user.
It has greatly superior viewing characteristics compared to a Liquid Crystal Display
(LCD), and does not suffer problems of viewing angle or contrast.
13
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The keypad comprises six individual keyswitches, mounted directly behind a fully sealed membrane overlay. They have a positive ‘click’ action which provides the user with tactile feedback. These six switches are identified as ◄ ► (left, right), ▲▼ (up, down) arrows, ENTER and CLEAR . The functions of these keys are described in the ‘Front
Panel Operation’ section.
There are 8 LEDs on the front panel. The behavior of these LEDs is described in the
‘Front Panel Operation’ section.
There are 8 LEDs on the rear panel, also. Six of these (all orange) indicate the interface type currently selected. For systems in a redundant configuration a green LED indicates the Online/Offline status of the unit. When the unit is connected to a 1:N switch, a red
LED indicates that caution is required, as there may be DC voltages and other control signals present on certain pins on the 25 pin Data Interface connector. Associated with this mode is a slide switch that selects the 1:N mode.
At the far left of the front panel is a USB Type B connector, used for re-flashing the modem firmware, using a PC.
4.3 Rear Panel
Figure 4. Rear Panel
(Shown with optional IP Module Ethernet Interface installed)
External cables are attached to connectors on the rear panel of the CDM-570L. These comprise:
• IEC line input connector
• Rx and Tx IF connectors
• Data interface connector
• External reference connector
• Form C alarm connector
• T1/E1 Balanced G.703 connector
• Unbalanced G.703 Tx/Rx connectors
• Remote Control connector
• 1:1 Control connector
• 10/100 BaseT Ethernet management port connector (M&C)
• 10/100 BaseT Ethernet traffic port connector (Traffic, with optional IP Module)
• RJ11 6-pin Async Serial Console port (Console, with optional IP Module)
14
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
IEC line input connector
The IEC line input connector contains the ON/OFF switch for the unit. It is also fitted with two fuses, one each for line and neutral connections (or L1, L2, where appropriate).
These are contained within the body of the connector, behind a small plastic flap.
• For 230 volt AC operation, use T2.5A, (slow-blow) 20mm fuses.
• For 115 volt AC operation, use T5.0A, (slow-blow) 20mm fuses.
For continued operator safety, always replace the fuses with the correct type and rating.
IMPORTANT
Rx and Tx IF connectors
The IF port connectors are both a 50 Ω ‘N’ female type. The return loss on these ports is greater than 19 dB (typically better than 21 dB), and if the user wishes to connect to a
75 Ω system, an inexpensive ‘N’ to ‘F’ type adapter can be used. While there will be a reduction in return loss when doing this, the effect in most systems will be imperceptible.
Data interface connector
The Data connector is a 25-pin ‘D’ type female (DB25-F). This connector conforms to the EIA-530 pinout, which allows for connection of different electrical standards, including EIA-422, V.35, and EIA-232. A shielded 25-pin ‘D’ type provides a very solid solution to EMC problems, unlike the sometimes used V.35 Winchester connector.
It is the responsibility of the user to provide the appropriate cables to connect to this EIA-530 connector.
IMPORTANT
External reference connector
This is BNC female connector. The signal supplied here by the user is used for phaselocking the internal 10MHz reference oscillator, and can be 1, 2, 5, 10 or 20 MHz. The impedance is matched for 50/75 Ω , and requires a level in the range –6 to + 10 dBm.
Form C Traffic alarm connector
The Alarms connector is a 15-pin 'D' type male (DB15-M). This provides the user with access to the Form-C relay contacts which indicate the fault status of the unit. These are typically connected to an external fault monitoring system, often found in satellite earth stations. In addition, the receive I and Q demodulator samples are provided on this connector. Connecting these signals to an oscilloscope in X,Y mode will provide the receive signal constellation diagram, which is a useful diagnostic aid. A pin is also
15
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM provided which can mute the transmit carrier. This requires that the pin be shorted to ground, or a TTL ‘low’, or an RS232 ‘high’ signal be applied.
As an aid to antenna pointing, or for driving step-track equipment, an analog AGC signal is provided on Pin 2 of this connector.
Balanced G.703 connector Tx/Rx connector
A 15-pin 'D' type female (DB15-F) for balanced operation at the G.703 data rates of T1
(1.544 Mbps) or E1 (2.048 Mbps).
Unbalanced G.703 Tx/Rx
Two female BNC 75 Ω connectors for unbalanced operation at the G.703 data rates of E1 (2.048 Mbps).
Remote Control connector
The Remote Control connector is a 9-pin ‘D’ type male (DB-9-M). Access is provided to remote control ports of the modem, both EIA-232 and EIA-485.
1:1 Control connector
This connector is used to connect the modem to a CRS-170 switch in 1:1 redundancy configurations.
10/100 BaseT Ethernet management port connector (M&C)
This is a standard RJ45 receptacle for connecting UTP cable to an Ethernet hub, router, switch, PC, etc. Used for upgrading CDM-570L base modem firmware.
10/100 BaseT Ethernet traffic port connector (Traffic, with optional IP
Module)
This is a standard RJ45 receptacle for connecting UTP cable to an Ethernet hub, router, switch, PC, etc. Used for Ethernet traffic, management of CDM-570L and IP Module functions via Telnet/HTTP/SNMP, upgrading of CDM-570L IP Module software.
Serial Console port (Console, with optional IP Module)
This is an RJ11 6-pin ASYNC RS-232 serial console port used for management of CDM-
570L and IP Module functions using a terminal emulator connected to the Console port with supplied adaptor cable.
16
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
4.4 Dimensional Envelope
z MH 1950 950 -
N!
AUTIO
mA max 50
- C 1:N atts, 40 w 0 Hz
vo
0 vo
115
23 or or s ~ 50 ses f olt ses f
fu
50 v
fu
0 - 2
T1
10
T0
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16 inches
(406.4 mm)
1.72 inches
(44 mm)
USB 1.1
UNIT STATUS
TRANSMIT TRAFFIC
RECEIVE TRAFFIC
ON LINE
STORED EVENT
REMOTE
EDMAC MODE
TEST MODE
19.0 inches
(480 mm)
Comtech CDM-570L Modem
Firmware Version 1.0.1
Figure 5. Dimensional Envelope
17
CDM-570L
L-BAND SATELLITE
MODEM
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
This page is intentionally blank
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
18
Chapter 5. CONNECTOR
PINOUTS
5.1 Connector Overview
The rear panel connectors (Figure 6) provide all necessary external connections between
the modem and other equipment.
Table 1. External Connections
Name
Rx IF
Tx IF
1:1 Control
Data Interface
External Reference
Connector Type
‘N’ type (female)
‘N’ type (female)
9-pin D (female)
25-pin D (female)
BNC (female)
Function
RF Input
RF Output
Connects to CRS-170 switch
Data Input/Output
Input
Remote Control 9-pin D (male) Serial Remote Interface
Console RJ-11 Serial Console Interface
10/100 Ethernet Traffic RJ-45 Ethernet Traffic and M&C
10/100 Ethernet M&C
Alarms
Balanced G.703
Rx Unbalanced
Tx Unbalanced
RJ-45
15-pin D (male)
15-pin D (female)
BNC (female)
Upgrade of base modem M&C
Form C Alarms
Balanced G.703 Data
Receive G.703 Data
Figure 6. Rear Panel (Shown with optional IP Module Ethernet Interface installed)
19
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
5.2 Data Interface Connector
The Data Interface connector, a 25-pin D type female, conducts data input and output signals to and from the modem, and connects to customer’s terrestrial equipment,
breakout panel, or protection switch. Refer to Table 2 for pin assignments.
THE MODEM IS ALWAYS ASSUMED TO BE DCE
Table 2. Data Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Pin #
Generic Signal description
Direction
EIA-422
EIA-530
V.35 EIA-232 Circuit #
2 Transmit Data A
14 Transmit Data B
24 Transmit Clock A
11 Transmit Clock B
DTE to Modem
DTE to Modem
DTE to Modem
DTE to Modem
Modem to DTE
Clock A
Modem to DTE
3
Clock B
Receive Data A
16 Receive Data B
17 Receive Clock A
Modem to DTE
Modem to DTE
Modem to DTE
9
8
Receive Clock B
Receiver Ready A
Modem to DTE
Modem to DTE
10 Receiver Ready B Modem to DTE
5 Clear to Send A *
13 Clear to Send B *
4
Modem to DTE
Modem to DTE
Request to Send A * DTE to Modem
SD A
SD B
TT A
TT B
ST A
ST B
RD A
RD B
RT A
RT B
RR A
RR B
CS A
CS B
RS A
SD A
SD B
SCTE A
SCTE B
SCT A
SCT B
RD A
RD B
SCR A
SCR B
RLSD
-
CTS
-
RTS
BA
-
DA
-
DB
-
BB
-
DD
-
CF
-
CB
-
CA
103
103
113
113
114
114
19 Request to Send B * DTE to Modem
7 Signal Ground -
RS B
SG
-
SG
-
AB
105
102
1 Shield - Shield FG AN 101
Notes:
• When the rear-panel switch marked “1:N Switch” is in the OFF position, all of the signals shown above are available and functional. In addition, pins not shown are not connected, and therefore no damage will occur if other signals are connected to the additional pins.
• When the rear-panel switch marked “1:N Switch” is in the ON position, the higlighted signals are no longer available. Furthermore, pins 6, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23 and 25 are reserved for use by the 1:N system. DO NOT connect signals to any of these pins in this mode. Certain pins have DC voltages present that may damage equipment other than a Comtech EF Data redundancy switch.
• For X.21 operation, use the EIA-422 pins, but ignore Receive Clock if the Modem is DTE, and ignore Transmit clocks if the Modem is DCE.
104
104
115
115
109
109
106
106
105
20
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
5.3 Balanced G.703 Interface Connector
The Balanced G.703 connection is a 15-pin female connector located on the rear panel of
the modem. Refer to Table 3 for pin assignments.
Table 3. Balanced G.703 Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Pin #
1
Signal Function
Tx G.703 -
9 Tx G.703 +
2 Ground
3
11
Rx G.703 -
Rx G.703 +
Name
Tx G.703 In
Tx G.703 In
GND
Rx G.703 Out
Rx G.703 Out
4 Ground GND
Pins 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13, 14 and 15 are not used.
In
Direction
In
Out
Out
5.4 Remote Control Interface Connector
The remote control interface connection is a 9-pin male connector located on the rear
panel of the modem. Refer to Table 4 for pin assignments.
The remote control port is intended for connection to an M&C computer, or terminal device.
This interface is user selectable for either EIA-232 or EIA-485.
Table 4. Remote Control Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Pin # Description
1 Ground
2 EIA-232 Transmit Data
3
4
EIA-232 Receive Data
Reserved - do not connect to this pin
5 Ground
6 EIA-485 Receive Data B *
7
8
EIA-485 Receive Data A *
EIA-485 Transmit Data B
9 EIA-485 Transmit Data A
* Use for 2-wire EIA-485 operation
Direction
Out
In
In
In
Out
Out
21
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
5.5 BNC Connectors
There are three BNC connectors located on the rear panel of the modem. Refer to Table 5
for pin assignments.
Table 5. BNC Connectors
BNC
Connector
EXT REF
G.703 Out
G.703 In
Description
External Reference Input
Rx G.703 (Unbalanced)
Tx G.703 (Unbalanced)
In
Out
In
Direction
5.6 Unit Alarms
Unit alarms are provided on a 15-pin male connector located on the rear panel of the
modem. Refer to Table 6 for pin assignments.
Table 6. Alarm Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Pin #
8
15
7
14
6
13
5
12
4
11
3
Rx Traffic
Tx Traffic
Unit Fault
Signal Function
Rx Traffic (De-energized, Faulted)
Rx Traffic (Energized, No Fault)
Tx Traffic (De-energized, Faulted)
Tx Traffic (Energized, No Fault)
Unit Fault (De-energized, Faulted)
Unit Fault (Energized, No Fault)
Rx I Channel (Constellation monitor)
Rx Q Channel (Constellation monitor)
Name
RX-NC
RX-NO
RX-COM
TX-NC
TX-NO
TX-COM
UNIT-NC
UNIT-NO
UNIT-COM
RX-I
RX-Q
2
N/C
AGC Voltage (Rx signal level, 0 to 10 volts) AGC
1 Ground
EXT-OFF
GND
22
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
5.7 1:1 Control Connector
The 1:1 Control connection is a 9-pin female connector located on the rear panel of the
modem. Refer to Table 7 for pin assignments.
The 1:1 Control connector is intended
only
for connection to a CRS-170 Redundancy
Switch.
Table 7. 1:1 Control Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Pin # Description
1 Ground
2 Receive Serial Data – auxiliary channel
3 Redundancy In 1
4 Redundancy In 2
5 Ground
6 Transmit Serial Data – auxiliary channel
9 Fused +12 volt
Direction
In
In
In
Out
Out
Out
Out
5.8 Async-Serial Console
The Console Connector is a RJ11-6 modulator jack located on the rear panel. The Async-
Serial Console interfaces the IP Module Command Line Interface (CLI). this interface is a RS-232 DCE interface.
Table 8. ASYNC-Serial Console Connector
Pin # Function
1 Ground
2 Rx
3 Tx
4 Ground
23
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
5.9 Ethernet Interface Connectors (Traffic and M&C)
The 10/100 BaseT Ethernet connector is a RJ45-8 modular jack located on the rear panel.
This interface is used for data traffic and M&C. This interface is a Network Interface
Card (NIC) pinout.
Table 9. Ethernet Interface Connector
Pin # Function
1 Tx+
2 Tx-
3 Rx+
4 N/C
5 N/C
6 Rx-
7 N/C
8 N/C
5.10 AC Power Connector
A standard, detachable, non-locking, 3-prong power cord (IEC plug) supplies the
Alternating Current (AC) power to the modem. Note the following:
Input Power
Input Voltage
AC Power Specifications
40W maximum, 20W typical
100 - 240 volts AC, +6%/-10% - autosensing
(total absolute max. range is 90 - 254 volts AC)
Connector Type IEC
Fuse Protection 5.0A Slow-blow (115 volt AC operation)
2.5A Slow-blow (230 volt AC operation)
Line and neutral fusing
20 mm type fuses
5.11 Ground Connector
A #10-32 stud on the rear panel of the modem is used for connecting a common chassis ground among equipment.
Note: The AC power connector provides the safety ground.
24
6.1 Introduction
Chapter 6. FRONT PANEL
OPERATION
Figure 7. Front Panel View
The user can fully control and monitor the operation of the CDM-570L from the front panel, using the keypad and display. Nested menus are used, which display all available options, and prompt the user to carry out a required action.
The display has two lines each of 24 characters. On most menu screens, the user will observe a flashing solid block cursor, which blinks at a once-per-second rate. This indicates the currently selected item, digit, or field. Where this solid block cursor would obscure the item being edited (for example, a numeric field) the cursor will automatically change to an underline cursor.
If the user were to display the same screen for weeks at a time, the display could become
‘burnt’ with this image. To prevent this, the unit has a ‘screen saver’ feature which will activate after 1 hour. The top line of the display will show the Circuit ID (which can be entered by the user) and the bottom line will show the circuit Eb/No value (if the demod is locked) followed by ‘Press any key....’. The message moves from right to left across the screen, then wraps around. Pressing any key will restore the previous screen.
The behavior of the front panel LEDs is described below in Table 10.
25
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Table 10. Front Panel LED Indicators
LED
Unit
Status
Color
Red
Orange
Green
Transmit Green
Traffic Off
Condition
A Unit Fault exists (Example: PSU fault)
No Unit Faults, but a Traffic Fault, or ODU (BUC or LNB) fault exists
No Unit Faults, or Traffic Faults
No Tx Traffic Faults
A Tx Traffic fault exists OR the Tx Carrier is in OFF state
Receive
Traffic
Green
Off
Green
No Rx Traffic Faults (demod and Viterbi decoder are locked, everything is
OK)
An Rx Traffic fault exists (the demod may still be OK – check the fault status of the unit from the Monitor menu).
The Unit is On Line, and carrying traffic
On line
Off
Stored
Event
Orange
Off
The Unit is Off Line (standby) - forced by externally connected 1:1 or 1:N redundancy system
There is a Stored Event in the log, which can be viewed from the front panel, or retrieved via the remote control interface
There are no Stored Events
Remote
EDMAC
Mode
Orange
Off
The Unit is in Remote Mode - local monitoring is possible, but no local control
The Unit is in Local Mode - remote monitoring is possible, but no remote control
Flashing ODU FSK control has been enabled, and there is a communications fault.
Orange
Framing on, EDMAC on, and unit defined as Slave - local monitoring is possible, but no local control
Test Mode
Off
Either the unit is in Transparent mode (no framing), or the framing has been selected, but in AUPC-only mode, or EDMAC Master configuration.
Orange A Test Mode is selected (Example: IF Loopback)
Off There is no Test Mode currently selected
IMPORTANT
In general, the Alarm relay state will reflect the state of the Front Panel LEDs. For instance, if the Unit Status LED is red, the Unit Alarm relay will be active, etc. The one exception is the Transmit Traffic relay. This will only be activated if a Transmit Traffic Fault exists – it does not reflect the state of the TX carrier.
26
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
The keypad is shown in Figure 8:
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Figure 8. Keypad
The function of these keys is as follows:
ENT
( Enter )
This key is used to select a displayed function or to execute a modem configuration change.
IMPORTANT
CLR
( Clear )
◄ ►
( Left, Right )
This key is used to back out of a selection or to cancel a configuration change which has not been executed using
ENTER . Pressing CLEAR generally returns the display to the previous selection.
These arrows are used to move to the next selection or to move the cursor position. Most of the menus (space permitting) include arrow key hints to guide the user.
▲ ▼
(Up, Down)
These arrows are used primarily to change configuration data
(numbers), at the current cursor position. Occasionally they may be used to scroll through a number of choices at the current cursor position. Most of the menus (space permitting) include arrow key hints to guide the user.
The keypad has an auto-repeat feature. If a key is held down for more than 1 second, the key action will repeat, automatically, at the rate of 15 keystrokes per second.
This is particularly useful when editing numeric fields, with many digits, such as frequency or data rate.
27
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
SELECT
CONFIGURE
MONITOR
TEST
INFORMATION
SAVE/LOAD
UTILITY
CONFIGURE
REMOTE
ALL
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
FRAME
INTERFACE
REFERENCE
ALARM MASKS
ODU
LIVE ALARMS
UNIT, RX, TX, ODU
RX PARAMETERS
EbNo=12.6dB BER=1.2E-4 dF=+11.7k
EVENT LOG
BUF=50 RSL=-64
STATISTICS
VIEW, CLEAR ALL
AUPC PARAMETERS
REMOTE Eb/No
TX POWER INCREASE
ODU
TEST
NORMAL
IF LOOPBACK
DIGITAL LOOPBACK
I/O LOOPBACK
RF LOOPBACK
TRANSMIT CW
TRANSMIT ALT 1,0
INFORMATION
ALL
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
BUFFER
FRAMING
INTERFACE
REMOTE CONTROL
ALARM MASK
REFERENCE
CIRCUIT ID
1:1
SAVE/LOAD
SAVE
LOAD
UTILITY
BUFFER RE-CENTER
REAL-TIME CLOCK
REFERENCE
EDIT CIRCUIT ID
MANUAL 1:1 SWITCH
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS
FIRMWARE
ADJUST
WARM-UP DELAY
INFO SELECT
FAST CONFIG
VIEW OPTIONS
EDIT CODE
DEMO MODE
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
REMOTE CONTROL
LOCAL
REMOTE SERIAL
ETHERNET
INTERFACE
BAUD RATE
ADDR
CONFIGURE ALL
(COMPLETE CONFIGURATION)
IP ADDRESS/RANGE
TRANSMIT
FEC ENCODER
MODULATION
CODE RATE
DATA RATE
FREQUENCY
ON/OFF
POWER LEVEL
SCRAMBLER
CLOCKING
MANUAL
AUPC
INVERSION FUNCTIONS
AUPC OPTIONS
SPECTRUM INVERT
DATA SENSE INVERT
RECEIVE
FEC DECODER
DEMODULATION
CODE RATE
DATA RATE
FREQUENCY
ACQUISTION RANGE
DESCRAMBLER
BUFFER
INVERSION FUNCTIONS
Eb/No ALARM THRESHOLD
SPECTRUM INVERT
DATA SENSE INVERT
UNFRAMED
FRAMED AUPC ONLY
AUPC + EDMAC MASTER
SLAVE
INTERFACE
RS422
IP
V.35
RS232
G.703
RTS/CTS OPERATION
T1
E1-BAL
E1-UNBAL
REFERENCE
INTERNAL 10 MHz
EXTERNAL
LINE LENGTH
LINE CODE
LINE CODE ON/OFF
ALARM MASK
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
REFERENCE
BUC
LNB
AGC
Eb/No
BUFFER
RX AIS
TX FIFO
G.703 BPV
TX AIS
ODU
BUC
LNB
M&C (FSK)
DC POWER
10MHz
CURRENT ALARM
LO FREQUENCY
MIX SENSE
LINK
ADDRESS
TX ON/OFF
DC-VOLTAGE
10MHz
CURRENT ALARM
LO FREQUENCY
MIX SENSE
Figure 9. Menu Trees
28
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.2 OPENING SCREEN
This screen is displayed whenever power is first applied to the unit. If the Internal
Reference warm-up delay feature has been disabled (see under UTIL, REF, Warm-up
Delay ) the following screen is displayed:
Comtech CDM-570L Modem
Firmware Version: 1.0.1
If, however, the Internal Reference warm-up delay feature has been enabled, the following screen will be displayed:
Comtech CDM-570L Modem
Ref Warming-up: 045 secs
The bottom right of the display counts down, in seconds, until the warm-up period is complete. During this period, the Tx Carrier is deliberately muted . At the end of the warm-up period, the bottom line will revert to the ‘normal’ display of Firmware version, and the unit will enter its normal operational state. At this stage, pressing any key will take the user to the top level selection screen.
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the user wishes to bypass this feature, the warm-up period may be over-ridden at any time by pressing the CLEAR key.
IMPORTANT
6.3 MAIN SELECT MENU
Move the cursor to the desired choice using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
SELECT: Config Monitor
Test Info Save/Load Util
Config
Monitor
Test
Info
Save/Load
Util
(Configuration) This menu branch permits the user to fully configure the unit.
This menu branch permits the user to monitor the alarm status of the unit, to view the log of stored events, and to display the Receive
Parameters screen.
This menu branch permits the user to invoke one of several test modes (loopbacks, for example).
(Information) This menu branch permits the user to view information on the unit, without having to go into configuration screens.
This menu branch permits the user to save and to retrieve up to 10 different modem configurations.
(Utility) This menu branch permits the user to perform miscellaneous functions, such as setting the Real-time clock, adjusting the display brightness, etc.
29
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.4 CONFIG
IMPORTANT
Move the cursor to the desired choice using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
CONFIG: Remote All Tx Rx
Frame Intfc Ref Mask ODU
Remote
All
Tx
Rx
(Remote Control) This menu sub-branch permits the user to define whether the unit is being controlled locally, or remotely.
IMPORTANT NOTE: The unit may be monitored over the remote control bus at any time. When in Local mode, however, configuration parameters may only be changed through the front panel. Conversely, when in Remote mode, the unit may be monitored from front panel, but configuration parameters may only be changed via the remote control bus.
This menu sub-branch permits the user to completely configure the unit, being prompted, step by step, to make choices, or edit data. This is highly recommended for new users, as it will clearly demonstrate all the parameters which need to be set.
(Transmit) This menu sub-branch permits the user to define, on a parameter-by-parameter basis, the transmit configuration of the unit. These menu sub-branches would be used if the user wished to change, for example, just the Transmit frequency.
(Receive) This menu sub-branch permits the user to define, on a parameter-byparameter basis, the receive configuration of the unit. These menu sub-branches would be used if the user wished to change, for example, just the receive data rate.
Frame
Intfc
This menu sub-branch permits the user to define operation in a transparent mode (no framing) or in a framed mode. In the framed mode, an overhead of 5% or 1.6% is added to the rate transmitted over the satellite so that
M&C and AUPC information may be passed to the distant end.
(Interface) This menu sub-branch permits the user to define which electrical interface type is active at the data connectors (either the EIA-530 port, or the G.703 port(s).
Ref
Mask
(Reference) This menu sub-branch permits the user to define whether the unit should use its own internal 10MHz reference, or phase lock to an externally applied reference, and if so, at what frequency.
This menu sub-branch permits the user to mask certain traffic alarms, which may cause problems to the user. As an example, certain multiplexers use ‘all ones’ as an idle pattern. However, by convention, the
‘all ones’ condition is taken to be the Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). If desired, this alarm may be masked.
ODU
(Outdoor Unit) This menu sub-branch permits the user to configure externally connected Low-noise Block Down Converter (LNB) and/or
Block Up Converter (BUC).
Each of these options is now described in detail.
30
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.5 (CONFIG) REMCONT (Remote control)
Select Local or Remote using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
Remote Control:
Local Remote (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
If Local is selected then remote control will be disabled. Remote monitoring is still possible.
If Remote is selected then the following sub-menus will be displayed:
If the unit has not been defined as an EDMAC SLAVE then:
Remote Control: Serial
Ethernet (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select Serial or Ethernet , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
6.5.1 (CONFIG, REMOTE) SERIAL
If Serial is selected:
Serial Config: Interface
Baudrate (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
(CONFIG, REMOTE, SERIAL, INTERFACE)
M&C Bus Interface: RS232
RS485-2W RS485-4W (
◄ ►
)
Select RS232 , RS485 (2-wire), or RS485 (4-wire), using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER . At this point the user will be further prompted to enter the bus address.
If is selected, the following menu is displayed:
In RS232 Mode the Bus
Address is fixed at 0000
31
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
(CONFIG, REM, INTFC, ADDR) RS485 BUS ADDRESS
However, if either RS485 mode is selected, the user will be further prompted:
RS485 Bus Address: 0245
(
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,ENTER)
Edit the RS485 bus address of this unit. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . The valid range of addresses is from 1 to 9999.
(CONFIG, REM, BAUD RATE)
If the user selects Baud Rate, the user is presented with the following menu:
Local M&C Bus Baud Rate:
19200 Baud (
▲ ▼ ,
ENTER)
Edit the baud rate of the remote control bus, connected locally to the M&C computer. The value is changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . Values of 2400, 4800, 9600,19200, 38400 and 57600 baud are possible.
Note that the asynchronous character format is FIXED at 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity (8-N-1).
6.5.2 (CONFIG, REMOTE) ETHERNET
If Ethernet is selected:
Ether IP Address/Range:
192.168.001.001/24
◄ ► , ▲ ▼
Edit the IP Address and Range for the Ethernet M&C port for this unit. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press
ENTER .
32
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.6 (CONFIG) ALL
The user is presented, in a sequential fashion, with every configuration option that is part of the individual configuration menus.
6.7 CONFIG) TX (Transmit)
Tx:FEC Mod Code Data Frq
On/Off Pwr Scram Clk Inv
Select FEC, Mod, Code, Data, Frq, On/Off, Pwr, Scram, Clk or Inv using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. The user will then be taken to a further sub-menu.
Each of these choices is described briefly in the table below:
FEC
Mod
Code
Data
(Forward Error Correction) This sub-menu permits the user to select the method of FEC used for transmission (Viterbi, TPC, etc). FEC type takes the highest configuration priority.
(Modulation) This sub-menu permits the user to select the modulation type used for transmission (BPSK, QPSK, 8-PSK, etc.). The choice of modulation will depend on the FEC type chosen.
(FEC Code Rate) This sub-menu permits the user to select the FEC Code
Rate used for transmission (Rate 1/2, Rate 3/4, etc). The choice of Code Rate will depend on both the FEC type and Modulation selected.
(Data Rate) This sub-menu permits the user to select the transmit data rate, in steps of 1 bps. The choice of data rate will depend on the FEC type, Modulation, and
Code Rate selected.
Frq
Scram
(Frequency) This sub-menu permits the user to select the transmit frequency, from 950 MHz to 1950 MHz, in steps of 100Hz.
On/Off This sub-menu permits user to control the output state of the transmit carrier.
(Output Power level) This sub-menu permits the user to control the output
Pwr level of transmit carrier, either manually, or using the AUPC (Automatic
Uplink Power Control) feature.
(Scrambler) This sub-menu permits the user to select whether or not data scrambling is used.
Clk
Inv
(Clock Source) This sub-menu permits the user to select the clock source for transmission. This can be from the CDM-570L’s high stability internal source, from an external source, or from the distant-end of the satellite link
(loop timed).
(Inversion) This sub-menu permits the user to invert the sense of the transmitted spectrum, or to invert the sense of the transmitted baseband data.
33
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
VERY IMPORTANT NOTE:
The FEC type takes the highest configuration priority, and the selection here depends on
IMPORTANT what, if any, optional plug-in codecs are installed. The choice of FEC type then determines what modulation types, code rates, and data rates are available. The order of hierarchy is therefore:
FEC type ► Modulation type ► Code Rate ► Data Rate
(Lowest)
If the user changes a parameter within this hierarchy, the other parameters may become invalid. In this case, the software will change those other parameters, in order that the configuration remains valid at all times.
Example : Suppose the user has selected Viterbi + Reed Solomon, QPSK, Rate 1/2.
Now, the user changes the modulation type from QPSK to 16-QAM. In this case, Rate
1/2 is no longer a valid code rate, and so it will be automatically changed to the nearest valid code rate (Rate 3/4).
Each of the configuration sub-branches will now be described in detail.
6.7.1 (CONFIG, TX) FEC TYPE
Tx FEC: Viterbi Vit+RS
TCM+RS TPC LDPC Uncoded
IMPORTANT NOTE: All possible choices are presented at all times.
If an option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow keys will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.
IMPORTANT
CASE RULES COMMENT
Vit+RS (Viterbi +Concatenated
Reed-Solomon)
TCM+RS (Trellis Coded
Modulation + Concatenated
Reed-Solomon)
TPC (Turbo Product Codec)
LDPC (Low Density Parity
Check Codec) WHEN
AVAILABLE (consult factory)
Uncoded
If the RS codec is installed
If the RS codec is installed
AND 8-PSK FAST is enabled
If the TPC codec is installed
If the TPC/LDPC codec is installed
Always valid - BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK only.
Fixed at 8-PSK and Rate 2/3
Forces Code Rate to 1:1 (uncoded)
34
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.7.2 (CONFIG, TX) MODULATION
Modulation: BPSK QPSK
OQPSK 8-PSK 16-QAM 8-QAM
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT NOTE: All possible choices are presented at all times . If an option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid , the ◄ ► arrow keys will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.
CASE
BPSK
RULES
Valid for all FEC types except TCM+RS
QPSK
OQPSK
8-PSK
8-QAM
16-QAM
Valid for all FEC types
Valid for all FEC types except except
TCM+RS
TCM+RS
Requires TCM+RS OR Turbo OR TPC/LDPC AND requires
8-PSK/8-QAM FAST option
Requires Turbo OR TPC/LDPC
AND requires 8-PSK/8-QAM FAST option
Requires Viterbi+RS OR Turbo OR TPC/LDPC
AND requires 16-QAM FAST option
6.7.3 (CONFIG, TX) CODE RATE
Tx Code Rate: 5/16 21/44
1/2 2/3 3/4 7/8 0.95 Unc
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT NOTE: All possible choices are presented at all times . If an option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow keys will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.
5/16
CASE
21/44
1/2
2/3
RULES
Requires BPSK AND Turbo
Requires BPSK or QPSK/OQPSK AND Turbo
Valid for BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK
Requires TCM AND 8-PSK AND RS codec installed OR
TPC/LDPC codec installed
3/4
7/8
Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK, 8-QAM and 16-QAM
Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK, 8-QAM and 16-QAM
0.95 Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK and 8-QAM
Unc (uncoded) Valid only for ‘Uncoded’ in FEC choice
35
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.7.4 (CONFIG, TX) DATA RATE
Tx Dat Rate:5000.000kbps
2500.000ksym (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,ENT)
IMPORTANT
None
The overall range of data rates is from 2.4 to 5000 kbps. The overall range of symbol rates is from 4.8 to 2500 ksymbols/second. The minimum and maximum data rates are dependent on modulation type and FEC encoder rate. If user changes the modulation or
FEC, and the currently selected data rate can no longer be supported, then the data rate will be adjusted automatically, up or down, keeping the symbol rate constant.
The bottom line of the display shows the symbol rate, based on FEC type, modulation, FEC
Code Rate, and Data Rate. The valid ranges of data rate are shown in the table below.
If the current interface type is selected to be G.703, the data rate will be automatically set to either 1544 (T1) or 2048 kbps (E1).
FEC Type
Modulation
BPSK
Code
Rate
Uncoded
Data Rate Range
4.8 kbps to 2.50 Mbps
EDMAC limited?
Yes – see note below
None
Viterbi
Viterbi
Viterbi
Viterbi
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
TCM + RS
Turbo
Turbo
Turbo
TPC/LDPC
TPC/LDPC
Turbo or TPC/LDPC
Turbo
Turbo
TPC/LDPC
Turbo or TPC/LDPC
Turbo
Turbo
Turbo
Turbo
QPSK/OQPSK
BPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
BPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
16-QAM
16-QAM
8-PSK
BPSK
BPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
8-PSK/8-QAM
8-PSK/8-QAM
8-PSK/8-QAM
8-PSK/8-QAM
16-QAM
16-QAM
Uncoded
Rate 1/2
Rate 1/2
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
Rate 1/2
Rate 1/2
Rate 3/4
9.6 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 1.25 Mbps
4.8 kbps to 2.50 Mbps
7.2 kbps to 3.75 Mbps
8.4 kbps to 4.375 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 1.112 Mbps
4.3 kbps to 2.25 Mbps
6.5 kbps to 3.375 Mbps
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Rate 7/8
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
Rate 2/3
7.5 kbps to 3.937 Mbps
13.0 kbps to 4.00 Mbps
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
16.8 kbps to 4.666 Mbps Yes – see note below
8.7 kbps to 4.50 Mbps Yes – see note below
Rate 5/16
Rate 21/44
2.4 kbps to 0.78 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 1.19 Mbps
Rate 21/44 4.8 kbps to 2.38 Mbps
Rate 1/2 4.8 kbps to 2.50 Mbps
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Rate 2/3
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
Rate 0.95
Rate 2/3
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
Rate 0.95
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
6.39 kbps to 3.33 Mbps Yes – see note below
7.2 kbps to 3.75 Mbps Yes – see note below
8.4 kbps to 4.37 Mbps
9.1 kbps to 4.72 Mbps
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
9.6 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
10.8 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
13.6 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
15.3 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
14.4 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
16.8 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
Yes – see note below
No
No
No
No
No
36
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Important Note : Where noted in the table above, if EDMAC framing is employed, the upper data rate will be reduced by 5% for data rates up to 2.048 Mbps, and by 1.6% for data rates above 2.048 Mbps, where EDMAC2 framing is used, or for Rate 21/44 BPSK/QPSK Turbo, or
Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo.
6.7.5 (CONFIG, TX) FREQUENCY
Tx IF Freq:1156.3456 MHz
(
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,ENT)
Edit the Transmit IF Frequency. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited using ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . The range of frequencies is from 950 to 1950 MHz, with a resoluton of 100 Hz.
If (using the ODU, BUC menus) the user has selected a BUC LO frequency (other than zero) and defined whether the mix is high-side or low-side, the display will be modified as shown below, to include the calculated Transmit RF frequency of the modem/BUC combination:
Tx IF Freq:1156.3456 MHz
RF=14156.3456(
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,ENT)
As the Tx IF frequency is edited the RF frequency will automatically be updated.
6.7.6 (CONFIG, TX) ON/OFF
IMPORTANT
Tx Output State: Off On
Rx-Tx Inhibit(
◄ ►
,ENTER)
Select either On , Off , or Rx-Tx Inhibit , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
When Rx-Tx Inhibit is selected, it will prevent the TX carrier from being transmitted, until the demodulator is locked.
To avoid the Tx Carrier from being turned off when the demodulator loses lock for a very short period of time, the demodulator must be unlocked continuously for a period of 10 seconds before the transmit carrier is inhibited. This time interval is fixed and the user cannot change it.
IMPORTANT NOTE : Having this feature enabled does not affect the internal IF loopback feature. However, be aware that if an external IF loopback is attempted
(connecting an external cable from the Tx IF output to the Rx IF input), then this will not work! (The Tx carrier cannot turn on until the demod is locked, and the demod cannot
37
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM lock, because the TX ouput is off. The net result is that the demod will not lock, and the
Tx carrier will not turn on.) USE THE RTI FEATURE WITH EXTREME CARE!
6.7.7 (CONFIG, TX) POWER
Output Power Level Mode:
Manual AUPC (
◄ ►
,ENTER)
Select the output power level mode, either Manual or AUPC , then press ENTER .
If the user selects Manual , the following menu is displayed:
(CONFIG, TX, PWR, MODE) MANUAL
Tx Output Power Level:
-03.9 dBm ADJ (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
)
Edit the output power level using the ◄ ► and ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER .
The range of output power is from 0 dBm to –40 dBm.
If BUC power leveling is ON, and the power level has been automatically adjusted, ADJ will appear in the display after the power level.
If the user selects AUPC , and ‘Framed’ mode is not selected, the following menu is displayed:
Warning! AUPC needs
Framed Mode (ENT or CLR)
Pressing either ENTER or CLEAR returns the user to the previous menu with Manual selected.
If the user selects AUPC , and ‘Framed’ mode is selected, the following menu is displayed:
38
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
(CONFIG, TX, PWR, MODE) AUPC
Target-Eb/No Max-Range
Alarm DemodUnlock (
◄ ►
)
Select either Target EbNo , Max-Range , Alarm or Demod-Unlock using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER .
Remote Demod - Target
Min Eb/No:9.9dB (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
)
(CONFIG, TX, PWR, MODE, AUPC) TARGET EbNo
Edit the target Eb/No of the remote demod, using the ◄ ►
and
▲ ▼ arrow keys.
Default value is 3.0 dB, and upper limit is 9.9 dB. The user should then press ENTER .
(CONFIG, TX, PWR, MODE, AUPC) MAX RANGE
Maximum-permitted Power increase: 1dB (
▲ ▼
,
ENT)
Edit the maximum permitted increase in power level (when in AUPC mode), using the
▲ ▼ arrow keys,. Default value is 1dB, and upper limit is 9 dB. Then press ENTER .
(CONFIG, TX, PWR, MODE, AUPC) ALARM
Action when max Tx Power reached: None TxAlarm
◄ ►
Select the action that will occur if the AUPC causes the maximum output power level to be reached, either None or TxAlarm . Then press ENTER .
(CONFIG, TX, PWR, MODE, AUPC) DEMOD-UNLOCK
Action when Remote Demod unlocks: Nom-Pwr Max-Pwr
Select the action that will occur if the remote demod is unlocked. The choices are: Nom-
Pwr (Nominal Power), where the ouput level will revert to the nominal power level set
39
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM under Manual , or Max-Pwr , (Maximum Power), where the ouput level will change to the maximum permitted. The user should then press ENTER .
6.7.8 (CONFIG, TX) SCRAMBLING
Tx Scrambling:Default-On
IESS-315-On Off (
◄ ►
,
ENT)
The options are:
Default-On - the appropriate scrambler type is automatically selected
IESS-315-On - this only applies when Turbo is installed and has been selected as the
FEC type
Off - No scrambling
As before, the options are displayed all of the time, but the ◄ ► arrow keys will force the cursor to skip past an unavailable choice.
The default scrambler types are:
IMPORTANT
Viterbi, no framing:
Viterbi, EDMAC frame:
Viterbi + RS or TCM/RS:
TPC or LDPC:
ITU V.35 (Intelsat variant)
Comtech proprietary, frame synchronized
Per IESS-308, frame synchronized
Comtech proprietary, frame synchronized
6.7.9 (CONFIG, TX) CLOCKING
Tx Clocking Mode: Int
Ext Loop-Timed (
◄ ►
,
ENT)
Select Int (Internal), Ext (External) or Loop-Timed , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
Internal indicates that the CDM-570L will supply a clock to the DTE, which is derived from its internal high-stability source. If the IP Module is installed and the selected Data
Interface is IP, then Internal is the only valid selection.
External indicates that the CDM-570L expects to receive a clock from the DTE, to which the unit can phase-lock its internal circuits. (If G.703 is selected as the Interface type, the software will force the clock mode to External .)
40
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Loop-Timed indicates that the transmit timing source should be the receive clock, from the direction of the satellite. This is a useful mode, in that no external connection needs to be made in this mode. If the demodulator loses lock, or if there is no receive signal present, the internal clock is substituted. Note also that this mode will work even with asymmetric Rx and Tx data rates.
6.7.10 (CONFIG, TX) INVERSION FUNCTIONS
Tx Inversion functions:
Spectrum Data (
◄ ► ,
ENT)
Select Spectrum or Data , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
(CONFIG, TX, INV) SPECTRUM
If Spectrum is selected, the following sub-menu will be displayed:
Tx Spectrum: Normal
Inverted (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select Normal or Inverted , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER .
(CONFIG, TX, INV) DATA
If Data is selected, the following sub-menu will be displayed:
Tx Data Sense: Normal
Inverted (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select Normal or Inverted , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
6.8 (CONFIG) RX (Receive)
41
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The sub-branches available are:
Rx:FEC Dem Code Data Frq
Acq Descram Buf Inv EbNo
Select FEC, Dem, Code, Data, Frq, Acq, Descram, Buf, Inv or EbNo using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER. The user will then be taken to a further sub-menu.
Each of these choices is described briefly in the table below:
FEC
Dem
Code
Data
Acq
On/Off
Descram
Buf
Inv
EbNo
(Forward Error Correction) This sub-menu permits the user to select the method of FEC used for reception (Viterbi, TPC, etc.). FEC type takes the highest configuration priority.
(Demodulation) This sub-menu permits the user to select the modulation type used for reception (BPSK, QPSK, 8-PSK, etc.). The choice of demodulation will depend on the FEC type chosen.
(FEC Code Rate) This sub-menu permits the user to select the FEC Code
Rate used for reception (Rate 1/2, Rate 3/4, etc.). The choice of Code Rate will depend on both the FEC type and Demodulation selected.
(Data Rate) This sub-menu permits the user to select the receive data rate, in steps of 1 bps. The choice of data rate will depend on the FEC type,
Demodulation, and Code Rate selected.
(Acquisition) This sub-menu permits the user to determine the amount of frequency uncertainty the demodulator will search over in order to find and lock to an incoming carrier.
This sub-menu permits the user to control the output state of the transmit carrier.
(Descrambler) This sub-menu permits the user to select whether or not data descrambling is used.
(Buffer) This sub-menu permits the user to select whether or not the
Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is used, and if so, the size of that buffer.
(Inversion) This sub-menu permits the user to invert the sense of the received spectrum, or to invert the sense of the received baseband data.
(Eb/No Alarm threshold) This sub-menu permits the user to determine the
Eb/No alarm threshold.
42
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
IMPORTANT
VERY IMPORTANT NOTE:
The FEC type takes the highest configuration priority, and the selection here depends on what, if any, optional plug-in codecs are installed. The choice of FEC type then determines what demodulation types, code rates, and data rates are available. The order of hierarchy is therefore:
FEC type ► Demodulation type ► Code Rate ► Data Rate
(Lowest)
If the user changes a parameter within this hierarchy, the other parameters may become invalid. In this case, the software will change those other parameters, in order that the configuration remains valid at all times.
Example : Suppose the user has selected Viterbi + Reed-Solomon, QPSK, Rate 1/2.
Now, the user changes the demodulation type from QPSK to 16-QAM. In this case, Rate
1/2 is no longer a valid code rate, and so it will be automatically changed to the nearest valid code rate (Rate 3/4).
Each of the configuration sub-branches will now be described in detail.
6.8.1 (CONFIG, RX) FEC TYPE
Rx FEC: Viterbi Vit+RS
TCM+RS TPC LDPC Uncoded
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT NOTE: All possible choices are presented at all times . If an option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow keys will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.
CASE
Viterbi
Vit+RS (Viterbi
+Concatenated Reed-
Solomon)
TCM+RS (Trellis Coded
Modulation + Concatenated
Reed-Solomon)
RULES
Always valid
If the RS codec is installed
If the RS codec is installed
AND 8-PSK FAST is enabled
COMMENT
Fixed at 8-PSK and
Rate 2/3
TPC (Turbo Product Codec) If the TPC codec is installed
LDPC (Low Density Parity
Check Codec) WHEN
AVAILABLE -consult factory
If the TPC/LDPC codec is installed
Uncoded Always valid - BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK only.
Forces Code Rate to
1:1 (uncoded)
43
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.8.2 (CONFIG, RX) DEMODULATION
IMPORTANT
Demodulation: BPSK QPSK
OQPSK 8-PSK 8-QAM 16-QAM
IMPORTANT NOTE : All possible choices are presented at all times. If an option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow keys will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.
CASE
BPSK
QPSK
OQPSK
8-PSK
8-QAM
16-QAM
RULES
Valid for all FEC types except TCM+RS
Valid for all FEC types except TCM+RS
Valid for all FEC types except TCM+RS
Requires TCM+RS OR Turbo OR
TPC/LDPC AND requires 8-PSK/8-QAM
FAST option
Requires Turbo OR TPC/LDPC codec
AND requires 8-PSK/8-QAM FAST option
Requires Viterbi+RS OR Turbo OR
TPC/LDPC codec
AND requires 16-QAM FAST option
44
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.8.3 (CONFIG, RX) CODE RATE
Rx Code Rate: 5/16 21/44
1/2 2/3 3/4 7/8 0.95 Unc
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT NOTE: All possible choices are presented at all times. If an option is not installed (either Hardware, or FAST) or valid, the ◄ ► arrow keys will force the cursor to skip past the unavailable choice.
5/16
CASE
Requires BPSK AND Turbo
RULES
21/44
1/2
2/3
Requires BPSK or QPSK/OQPSK
Valid for BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK
Requires TCM AND 8-PSK
TPC/LDPC codec installed
AND
AND Turbo
RS codec installed OR
3/4
7/8
Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK, 8-QAM and 16-QAM
Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK, 8-QAM and 16-QAM
0.95 Valid for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK and 8-QAM
Unc (uncoded) Valid only for ‘Uncoded’ in FEC choice
6.8.4 (CONFIG, RX) DATA RATE
IMPORTANT
Rx Dat Rate:5000.000kbps
2500.000ksym (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,
ENT)
Overall range of data rates is from 2.4 to 5000 kbps. Overall range of symbol rates is 4.8 to 2500 ksymbols/second. Minimum and maximum data rates are dependent on modulation type and FEC encoder rate. If the user changes modulation or FEC, and the currently selected data rate can no longer be supported, then the data rate will be adjusted automatically, up or down, keeping the symbol rate constant.
The bottom line of the display shows symbol rate, based on FEC type, modulation, FEC Code Rate, and Data
Rate.
If the current interface type is selected to be G.703, the data rate will be set to either 1544
(T1) or 2048 kbps (E1). This is shown below:
FEC Type
None
Modulation Code
Rate
BPSK Uncoded
Data Rate Range
4.8 kbps to 2.50 Mbps
EDMAC limited?
Yes – see note below
None
Viterbi
Viterbi
Viterbi
QPSK/OQPSK Uncoded
BPSK Rate 1/2
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 1/2
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 3/4
9.6 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 1.25 Mbps
4.8 kbps to 2.50 Mbps
7.2 kbps to 3.75 Mbps
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
45
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Viterbi
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
TCM + RS
Turbo
Turbo
Turbo
TPC/LDPC
TPC/LDPC
Turbo or TPC/LDPC
Turbo
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 7/8
BPSK Rate 1/2
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 1/2
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 3/4
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 7/8
16-QAM
16-QAM
8-PSK
BPSK
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
Rate 2/3
Rate 5/16
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 1/2
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 2/3
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 3/4
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 7/8
8.4 kbps to 4.375 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 1.112 Mbps
4.3 kbps to 2.25 Mbps
6.5 kbps to 3.375 Mbps
7.5 kbps to 3.937 Mbps
13.0 kbps to 4.00 Mbps Yes – see note below
16.8 kbps to 4.666 Mbps Yes – see note below
8.7 kbps to 4.50 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 0.78 Mbps
BPSK Rate 21/44 2.4 kbps to 1.19 Mbps
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 21/44 4.8 kbps to 2.38 Mbps
4.8 kbps to 2.50 Mbps
6.39 kbps to 3.33 Mbps
7.2 kbps to 3.75 Mbps
8.4 kbps to 4.37 Mbps
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Turbo
TPC/LDPC
Turbo or TPC/LDPC
Turbo
QPSK/OQPSK Rate 0.95
8-PSK/8-QAM Rate 2/3
8-PSK/8-QAM Rate 3/4
8-PSK/8-QAM Rate 7/8
9.1 kbps to 4.72 Mbps
9.6 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
10.8 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
13.6 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
No
No
Turbo
Turbo
8-PSK/8-QAM Rate 0.95
16-QAM Rate 3/4
15.3 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
14.4 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
No
No
Turbo 16-QAM Rate 7/8 16.8 kbps to 5.00 Mbps No
Important Note : Where noted in the table above, if EDMAC framing is employed, the upper data rate will be reduced by 5% for data rates up to 2.048 Mbps, and by 1.6% for data rates above 2.048 Mbps, where EDMAC2 framing is used, or for Rate 21/44 BPSK/QPSK Turbo, or Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo.
6.8.5 (CONFIG, RX) FREQUENCY
Rx IF Freq:1156.3456 MHz
(
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼ ,
ENT)
Edit the receive frequency. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys.
The user should then press ENTER . The range of frequencies is from 950 to 1950 MHz, with a resoluton of 100 Hz.
If (using the ODU, LNB menus) user has selected LNB LO frequency (other than zero) and defined whether the mix is high-side or low-side, the display will be modified as shown below, to include the calculated Receive RF frequency of the modem/LNB combination:
Rx IF Freq:1156.3456 MHz
RF=12156.3456(
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,
ENT)
As the Rx IF frequency is edited the RF frequency will automatically be updated.
46
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.8.6 (CONFIG, RX) ACQ
IMPORTANT
Demod Acquisition Range:
+/- 010 kHz (
▲ ▼
,ENTER)
Edit the acquisition search range of the demodulator (the value entered here determines the amount of frequency uncertainty the demodulator will search over in order to find and lock to an incoming carrier). Editing the value is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲
▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER .
The range varies according to symbol rate:
+/- 1 kHz to +/- 200 kHz for rates less than or equal to 625 ksymbols/sec
+/- 1 kHz to +/- 32 kHz for rates greater than 625 ksymbols/sec
The value entered here determines the amount of frequency uncertainty the demodulator will search over in order to find and lock to an incoming carrier.
CAUTION MUST BE EXCERCISED at low data rates where the acquisition range is greater than the symbol rate of the desired carrier. In this circumstance it may be possible to acquire lock on an adjacent (and hence undesired) carrier, if that carrier has identical characteristics (modulation, FEC, code rate, data rate, etc.) to the carrier of interest.
6.8.7 (CONFIG, RX) DESCRAMBLING
Descrambling: Default-On
IESS-315-On Off (
◄ ►
,ENT)
Options are:
Default-On - the appropriate descrambler type is automatically selected.
IESS-315-On - this only applies when Turbo is installed and has been selected as the
FEC type .
Off - no descrambling.
As before, the options are displayed all of the time, but the ◄ ► arrow keys will force the cursor to skip past an unavailable choice.
47
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
IMPORTANT
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The default descrambler types are:
Uncoded:
Viterbi, no framing:
Viterbi, EDMAC frame:
Viterbi + RS or TCM/RS:
TPC or LDPC:
ITU V.35 (Intelsat variant)
ITU V.35 (Intelsat variant)
Comtech proprietary, frame synchronized
Per IESS-308, frame synchronized
Comtech proprietary, frame synchronized
6.8.8 (CONFIG, RX) BUFFER
Edit the size, in bits, of the Plesiochronous/Doppler Buffer. The value is changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . Values of Disabled, +/- 1024,
2048, 4096, 8192, 16384 and 32768 bits are possible .
When Disabled is selected, the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is disabled. The receive clock will then be derived from the satellite signal, and will therefore be subject to clock offsets relative to the local transmit clock. This is due in part to the originating clock being slightly different from the local clock (a so-called plesiochronous offset), and to the motion of the satellite (a Doppler offset). This menu choice is shown below:
Rx Buffer: Disabled
(
▲ ▼
,
ENTER)
If the IP Module is installed and the selected Data Interface is IP, the buffer is Disabled by default and this is the only valid selection.
When a value other than ‘Disabled’ is selected, the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer is enabled, and set to the selected size. This is shown below:
Rx Buffer: +/-32768 Bits
(13.1ms) (
▲ ▼ ,
ENTER)
The input to the buffer will be the signal from the satellite, with any clock offsets and jitter. The output from the buffer will be derived from the local TRANSMIT clock. In this way, the receive data will be perfectly synchronous with this local clock. The CDM-
570L can be operated with independent receive and transmit data rates. Even in this configuration, where Rx data rate <> Tx data rate, the output clock for the buffer will be phase locked to the transmit clock.
While it is only possible to select the size in bits, the corresponding total buffer size is displayed in ms (which will vary in inverse proportion to the data rate).
48
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.8.9 (CONFIG, RX) INVERSION FUNCTIONS
Rx Inversion functions:
Spectrum Data (
◄ ►
,
ENT)
Select Spectrum or Data , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
If Spectrum is selected, the following sub-menu will be displayed:
Select Normal or Inverted , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
Rx Spectrum: Normal
Inverted (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
If Data is selected, the following sub-menu will be displayed:
Rx Data Sense: Normal
Inverted (
◄ ► ,
ENTER)
Select Normal or Inverted , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
6.8.10 (CONFIG, RX) Eb/No
Eb/No Alarm Point:
02.0 dB (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,
ENTER)
Edit the Eb/No alarm point. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys.
The user should then press ENTER .
The range of values is from 0.1 to 16.0 dB. The user may select a value here, and if the
Eb/No falls below this value, a receive traffic fault will be generated.
6.9 (CONFIG) FRAME (Framing Mode)
Framing Mode: Unframed
EDMAC EDMAC-2 (
◄ ►
,ENT)
49
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Select Unframed, EDMAC or EDMAC-2 , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
The sub-branches available are:
6.9.1 (CONFIG, FRAME) UNFRAMED
No framing is selected. No overhead is added, and the unit will be compatible with other manufacturer’s equipment, when operating in a ‘standard’ configuration.
6.9.2 (CONFIG, FRAME) EDMAC or EDMAC-2
Comtech EF Data’s proprietary framing is added. The framing permits the bi-directional passing of M&C and AUPC data between local and distant-end units. EDMAC is backwards compatible with the CDM-500, CDM-550, CDM-550T, CDM-600 and CDM-
600L. EDMAC-2 is a reduced overhead version of EDMAC, and is not completely backwards compatible with the modems listed above, but is in some modes (for example, in Turbo BPSK modes and at rates above 2.048 Mbps).
If either of these modes is selected, the following sub-menu will be displayed:
Framing mix: AUPC-Only
AUPC+EDMAC (
◄ ►
,ENTER)
Select either AUPC-Only (default) or AUPC+EDMAC, using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
Note that if framing is enabled (either EDMAC or EDMAC-2 ), then AUPC is automatically enabled, but the specific EDMAC feature (passing M&C data from a local to a distant-end unit) needs to enabled here.
If AUPC-Only is selected, then none of the EDMAC features are available, even though framing will still be enabled.
If AUPC+EDMAC is selected, then the user is further prompted to select whether the unit is an EDMAC master, or an EDMAC slave:
(CONFIG, FRAME, FRAMED EDMAC+AUPC, MODE)
EDMAC Mode:
Master Slave (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select either Master or Slave , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
An EDMAC Master is a unit which is local to the M&C computer, and which passes messages, via the overhead, to a distant-end modem.
50
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
An EDMAC Slave is a unit which is not local to the M&C computer, which is at the distant-end of a satellite link. If Master is selected then the following sub-menu is displayed:
Distant-end Base Address
0240 (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,
ENTER)
Edit the address of the distant-end modem to which this unit will pass messages. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲
▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER .
There is a restriction on values which can be entered here; they may only be entered in increments of 10. This is automatically taken care of; the user may not edit the last digit of the address. This has been implemented so that a single Master may pass messages for up to 10 devices at the distant end. The valid range of addresses is from 10 to 9990.
But if Slave is selected, then the following sub-menu is displayed:
Address of this Slave
Unit: 0241 (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,
ENT)
Edit the address of this Slave unit. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press
ENTER . The valid range of addresses is from 1 to 9999, although ‘base
10' values will be automatically skipped. The Slave EDMAC address will always end in ‘1’.
Remember that this is a unit which is intended to be located at the distant-end of a link, and will therefore be under the control of a Master at the other end. This is the equivalent of putting the unit into Remote
Control mode; no local control is possible.
6.10 (CONFIG) INTERFACE
Select RS422 (EIA-530), IP , V.35
, RS232 , or G.703
using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER
Data Interface: RS422 IP
V.35 RS232 G.703(
◄ ► ,
ENT)
51
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
If RS422 , V.35
, or RS232 are selected, the following sub menu will be displayed:
RTS/CTS Operation: (
▲ ▼
)
Loop,RTS Controls Tx Out
The option is changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER .
The following options are possible :
1) RTS/CTS Loop, No Action
RTS and CTS are looped, so that CTS echos the state of RTS, but RTS does not control the ON/OFF state of the carrier.
2) Loop, RTS Controls Tx Out
RTS and CTS are looped, so that CTS echos the state of RTS, and RTS controls the
ON/OFF state of the carrier (in other words, the modem will not bring up its TX carrier until RTS is asserted).
3) Ignore RTS, Assert CTS
RTS is ignored, and CTS is asserted unconditionally.
4) N/A - 1:N system in use -
If the 1:N switch on the rear panel is active, then RTS/CTS are not supported; the pins are assigned to redundancy functions.
If G.703
is selected, the following sub menu will be displayed:
G.703 Type: T1
E1-Bal E1-Unbal (
◄ ►
,
ENT)
Select T1 E1-Bal or E1-Unbal using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER
If T1 is selected, the following sub-menu will be displayed:
T1 Configuration: Length
Line-Code (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select Length or Line Code using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER
If Line –Code is selected, the following sub-menu will be displayed:
T1 Line Code (B8ZS):
On Off(AMI) (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
If Length is selected, the following sub-menu will be displayed:
T1 Line Length:
000-133 feet (
▲ ▼
,
ENTER)
52
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Edit the line length using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER Values will toggle between the following values:
0-133, 133-266, 266-399, 399-533 and 533-655 feet.
If either E1-Bal or E1-Unbal is selected, the following sub-menu will be displayed:
Select On or Off using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER.
E1 Line Code (HDB3):
On Off (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
6.11 (CONFIG) REFERENCE
IMPORTANT
IMPORTANT NOTE: The CDM-570L can accept an externally supplied frequency reference, using the BNC connector on the rear panel. However, rather than bypassing the internal reference, and substituting the external signal, the internal reference is used in a low-bandwidth (~ 2Hz) phase-locked loop (PLL), so the CDM-570L actually phase locks to the reference external signal. There are two distinct advantages to this scheme:
1) It permits hitless switching between the operation of internal and external reference. There are no sudden discontinuities of frequency and phase in the transmitted carrier.
2) Due to the very low bandwidth of the PLL, it permits the external reference to have an inferior phase noise characteristic than the internal reference of the CDM-570L . The narrow loop essentially ‘cleans up’ the external signal.
This is particularly important if the CDM-570L is being used to supply a
10MHz reference to a BUC or LNB.
Edit the configuration and value of the frequency reference. The value is changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . Values of Internal 10 MHz, External 01 MHz, External 02 MHz, External 05 MHz,
External 10 MHz, and External 20 MHz, are possible .
The user should then press ENTER . Two examples are shown below:
Frequency Reference:
Internal 10 MHz (
▲ ▼
,ENT)
Frequency Reference:
External 05 MHz (
▲ ▼
,ENT)
53
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.12 (CONFIG) MASK
Alarm Mask: Transmit
Receive Ref BUC LNB (
◄ ►
)
Select Transmit , Receive or Reference , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER .
If Transmit is selected the following sub-menu will be displayed:
Tx Alarm Mask: Tx-FIFO
G.703-BPV Tx-AIS(
◄ ► ,
ENT)
Tx-FIFO Alarm:
Active Masked (
◄ ►
,
ENT)
Select Tx-FIFO , G.703-BPV or Tx-AIS , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER . For each of the choices a sub-menu similar to the one shown below will be displayed:
Select Active or Masked , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER
.
If the user selects Active , then a Transmit Traffic fault will be generated whenever the transmitter sees that the transmit FIFO has slipped.
Similarly, the user can mask a G.703 BPV or Transmit AIS alarm.
If the user selects Masked , no alarm will be generated.
If Receive is selected the following sub-menu will be displayed:
Rx Alarm Mask: AGC Eb/No
Rx-AIS Buffer (
◄ ►
,
ENT)
Select AGC , Eb/No , Rx-AIS or Buffer , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER . For each of the choices a sub-menu similar to the one shown below will be displayed:
AGC Alarm:
Active Masked (
◄ ►
,
ENT)
Select Active or Masked , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER .
54
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
If the user selects Active , then a Receive Traffic fault will be generated whenever the demodulator sees that the composite input level being applied will cause compression in the IF stages, and hence degrade the performance of the demodulator.
Similarly, the user can mask an Eb/No, Receive AIS or Buffer alarm.
If the user selects Masked , no alarm will be generated.
If Reference is selected the following sub-menu will be displayed:
Reference Alarm:
Active Masked (
◄ ► ,
ENT)
Select Active or Masked , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
If the user selects Active , then a Transmit Traffic fault will be generated whenever the unit sees that a) External Reference is selected and b) there is no signal activity at the external reference port. If the user selects Masked , no alarm will be generated.
If BUC is selected the following sub-menu will be displayed:
BUC Alarm:
Active Masked (
◄ ►
,
ENT)
Select Active or Masked , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
If the user selects Masked , no alarm will be generated.
If LNB is selected the following sub-menu will be displayed:
LNB Alarm:
Active Masked (
◄ ►
,
ENT)
Select Active or Masked , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
If the user selects Masked , no alarm will be generated.
55
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.13 (CONFIG) ODU
ODU (Outdoor Unit):
BUC LNB (
◄ ►
,ENTER)
The ODU (Outdoor Unit) menu permits the user to choose between controlling and monitoring either a BUC (Block Upconverter) or an LNB (Low-noise Block downconverter). Select BUC or LNB , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
6.13.1 (CONFIG, ODU) BUC
If BUC is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC: M&C-FSK DC-Power
10MHz Alarm LO Mix (
◄ ►
)
Select M&C-FSK, DC-Power, 10MHz, Alarm, LO or Mix , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
M&C-FSK
DC-Power
10MHz
If an FSK-capable BUC is employed, this menu provides access to a further set of menus that define the FSK setup, and use it for control and monitor.
If a BUC supply is installed this menu permits the user to turn DC power ON or OFF.
This menu permits the user to turn the 10MHz frequency reference for the BUC ON or OFF.
Alarm
LO
Mix
This menu permits the user to define the upper and lower limits for a current ‘window’. If the measured BUC current falls outside this window, an alarm is generated.
This menu permits the user to define the LO frequency used in the BUC. This is then used in the display of RF frequency in the CONFIG Tx, Tx Frequency menu.
This menu permits the user to define the sense of the frequency translation – either high-side mix or low-side mix.
(CONFIG, ODU, BUC) M&C-FSK
If M&C-FSK is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC M&C(FSK): FSK-Comms
Address Tx-On/Off (
◄ ►
)
56
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Select Comms, Address, Tx-On/Off, or Pwr-Level , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
FSK-Comms
If an FSK-capable BUC is employed, this menu turns the
FSK between the modem and BUC either ON or OFF.
Address
TX-On/Off
(Address) This menu permits the user to enter the logical address of the BUC, from 1 to 15.
This menu permits the user to turn the RF Output of the
BUC ON or OFF.
If FSK-Comms is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC M&C FSK Comms:
On Off (
◄ ► ,
ENTER)
Select On or Off , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER .
(CONFIG, ODU, BUC, M&C-FSK) Address
If Addr is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC FSK Address: 01
(
▲ ▼
,ENTER)
Edit the value of the address using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER . The valid range is from 01 to 15.
(CONFIG, ODU, BUC, M&C-FSK) TX-ON/OFF
If Tx-On/Off is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC RF Output:
On Off (
◄ ► ,
ENTER)
57
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Select On or Off , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER .
(CONFIG, ODU, BUC) DC-POWER
If DC-Power is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC DC Power:
On Off (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select On or Off , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
(CONFIG, ODU, BUC) 10MHz
If 10MHz is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC 10MHz Reference:
On Off (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select On or Off , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
(CONFIG, ODU, BUC) ALARM
If Alarm is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
Set BUC Current Alarm:
Upper Lower (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select Upper or Lower , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER .
If Upper is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC Current Alarm Upper
Limit:1200mA (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼ ,
ENT)
Edit BUC Current Alarm Upper limit. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys.
58
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The user should then press ENTER . The range of current is 500 to 4000 mA.
If Lower is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC Current Alarm Lower
Limit:1200mA (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼ ,
ENT)
Edit BUC Current Alarm Lower limit. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . The range of current is 0 to
3000 mA.
(CONFIG, ODU, BUC) LO
If LO is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC LO Frequency:
12000 MHz (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,
ENTER)
Edit the value of the BUC LO frequency. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . The valid range is from 3000 to 65000 MHz.
Note this value is used to display the RF frequency of the modem/BUC combination. If a value of 00000 is entered here (the default), then no RF frequency will be displayed on the CONFIG, Tx, Tx Freq menu.
59
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
(CONFIG, ODU, BUC) MIX
If Mix is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
BUC Frequency Mix:
High-Side Low-Side (
◄ ►
)
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Select High-Side or Low-Side , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER.
6.13.2 (CONFIG, ODU) LNB
If LNB is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
LNB: DC-Voltage 10MHz
Alarm LO Mix (
◄ ►
, ENT)
Select DC-Voltage, 10MHz, Alarm, LO or Mix , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
DC-Voltage
Selects Power Off, 13, 18, or 24 volts as the LNB power supply output voltage.
10MHz
This menu permits the user to turn the 10MHz frequency reference for the BUC ON or OFF.
Alarm
LO
Mix
This menu permits the user to define the upper and lower limits for a current ‘window’. If the measured LNB current falls outside this window, an alarm is generated.
This menu permits the user to define the LO frequency used in the LNB. This is then used in the display of RF frequency in the CONFIG RX, RX FREQUENCY menu.
This menu permits the user to define the sense of the frequency translation – either high-side mix or low-side mix.
(CONFIG, ODU, LNB) VOLTAGE
If Voltage is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
LNB DC Supply Voltage:
13 volts (
▲ ▼
,
ENTER)
Edit the value of the LNB supply voltage, using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys.
The user should then press ENTER . The choices are 13 , 18 , 24 volts , or
Power Off.
60
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
(CONFIG, ODU, LNB) 10MHz
If 10MHz is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
LNB 10MHz Reference:
On Off (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select On or Off , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
(CONFIG, ODU, LNB) ALARM
If Alarm is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
Set LNB Current Alarm:
Upper Lower (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select Upper or Lower , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER .
If Upper is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
LNB Current Alarm Upper
Limit: 200mA (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,
ENT)
Edit the LNB Current Alarm Upper limit. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys.
The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . The range of current is 50 to 600 mA.
If Lower is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
LNB Current Alarm Lower
Limit: 050mA (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
,
ENT)
Edit the LNB Current Alarm Lower limit. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys.
The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . The range of current is 10 to 400 mA.
61
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
(CONFIG, ODU, LNB) LO
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
LNB LO Frequency:
12000 MHz (
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼ ,
ENTER)
Edit the value of the LNB LO frequency. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . The valid range is from 3000 to 6
5000 MHz.
Note that this value is used for displaying the RF frequency of the modem/BUC combination. If a value of 00000 is entered here (the default), then no RF frequency will be displayed on the CONFIG, Rx,
Rx Freq menu.
(CONFIG, ODU, LNB) MIX
If Mix is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
LNB Frequency Mix:
High-Side Low-Side (
◄ ►
)
Select High-Side or Low-Side , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER .
6.14 MONIT (Monitor)
MONITOR:Alarms Rx-Params
Event-Log Stats AUPC ODU
Select Alarms , Rx-Params , Event-Log , Stats , AUPC or ODU using the
◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
If the user selects Alarms , the following sub-menu is displayed:
6.14.1 (MONIT) ALARMS
IMPORTANT NOTE: The CDM-570L uses a system of Fault Prioritization.
In each category of fault, only the highest priority fault is displayed. For
IMPORTANT
62
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM instance, if the demodulator is unlocked, it is irrelevant if there are other receive faults present. If the demodulator then locks, but there is a fault of a lower priority present, this will then be displayed. This also holds true for the faults reported via the remote control. This system cuts down drastically on unwanted and irrelevant fault reporting. A comprehensive list of faults is shown at the end of this section.
Live Alarms:Unit Receive
Transmit ODU (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select Unit , Receive , Transmit or ODU , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER . Depending on the choice , one of the following menus will be shown:
(MON, ALARMS) UNIT (Unit alarms)
Unit Fault: -12 Volt PSU is Under-Voltage (ENT)
The screen will indicate if there are any Unit Faults. If not, it will display ‘ None ’.
Pressing ENTER takes the user back to the previous menu.
(MON, ALARMS) RECEIVE (Receive Traffic Status)
Rx Traffic: AGC Alarm -
Reduce Input level (ENT)
The screen will indicate if there are any Receive Traffic Faults. If not, it will display ‘ None ’. Pressing ENTER takes the user back to the previous menu.
(MON, ALARMS) TRANSMIT (Transmit Traffic Status)
Tx Traffic: No Tx Clock from Terrestrial (ENT)
The screen will indicate if there are any Transmit Traffic Faults. If not, it will display ‘ None ’. Pressing ENTER takes the user back to the previous menu.
(MON, (Outdoor Unit alarms)
ODU Alarms: BUC Current
Over Limit (ENT)
63
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The screen will indicate if there are any ODU Alarms. If not, it will display
‘ None ’. Pressing ENTER takes the user back to the previous menu.
LISTING OF PRIORITIZED FAULTS:
Unit Faults:
1) Power supply fault, +5 volts
2) Power supply fault , +12 volts
3) Power supply fault, –5 volts
4) Power supply fault, +23 volts
5) Power supply fault, –12 volts
6) Tx synthesizer lock
7) Rx 1st LO synthesizer lock
8) Rx 2 nd LO synthesizer lock
9) Reference PLL lock
10) IP Module fault
11) EEPROM checksum error
Tx Traffic status:
1) No clock from terrestrial interface
2) Tx FIFO slip
3) Loss of External Reference
4) AUPC upper limit reached
5) AIS detected on incoming data (from terrestrial direction)
6) Bipolar violation on G.703 interface
Rx Traffic status:
1) Demodulator unlocked
2) AGC Alarm - signal out of range
3) RS Frame sync alarm
4) EDMAC Frame sync alarm
5) Buffer Underflow
6) Buffer Overflow
7) Eb/No alarm
8) AIS detected on incoming data (from satellite direction)
ODU status:
1) BUC PLL lock fault
2) BUC current out of limits
3) BUC voltage out of limits
4) LNB current out of limits
5) LNB voltage out of limits
6) BUC temperature alarm
7) BUC software checksum error
6.14.2 (MONIT) RX-PARAMS (Receive Parameters)
64
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
If the user selects Rx-Params , the following sub-menu is displayed:
EbNo=05.7dB
BER=3.4E-9
∆
F=+11.7k Buf=50 RSL=-64
If the demodulator is locked, this screen shows the following:
Eb/No This shows the value of Eb/No calculated by the demodulator. The value referred to here is the energy per information bit (Ebi), divided by the noise spectral density (No).
BER This is an estimate of the corrected BER.
∆ F
Buf
The frequency offset of the received carrier, in kHz, with a displayed resolution of 100 Hz.
(Buffer fill state) This shows the fill state (in percent), of the receive
Buffer. After a reset, it will read 50. A value <50 indicates that the buffer is emptying, and >50 indicates that it is filling.
RSL (Receive Signal Level) A value in dBm, indicating the input power of the desired carrier, as seen by the demodulator. If the signal level is below the AGC range of the demod, this will display RSL <-99
If the demodulator is not locked, this screen shows the message ‘Demod: Not Locked ’, but continues to display the receive signal level. Pressing ENTER or CLEAR will take the user back to the previous menu.
Demod: Not Locked
RSL=-64
6.14.3 (MONIT) STORED EVENTS
If the user selects Stored Events , the following sub-menu is displayed:
Stored Events:
Clear-All
View
(
◄ ►
,ENTER)
Select View or Clear-All , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
(MON, EVENTS) VIEW
If the user selects View , the following screen is displayed:
Log23: 30/11/02 10:37:32
Fault - Demod Lock (
▲ ▼
)
The user may scroll backwards or forwards through the entries in the event log, using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Pressing ENTER or CLEAR will take the user back
65
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
IMPORTANT
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM to the previous menu. The event log can store up to 255 events. When a fault condition occurs, it is time-stamped and put into the log. Similarly, when the fault condition clears, this is also recorded, as shown below:
Log240:30/11/97 10:37:35
Clear - Demod Lock (
▲ ▼
)
If the user selects Clear-All , the following screen is displayed:
Clear all Stored Events?
No Yes (
▲ ▼ ,
ENTER)
If the user selects Yes , the event log is cleared, and the user is taken directly back to the previous menu. However, if there are faults present on the unit at this time, they will be re-time-stamped, and new log entries will be generated.
Note that in accordance with international convention , the date is shown in DAY-MONTH-YEAR format.
6.14.4 (MONIT) STATS (Link Statistics)
If the user selects Stats, the following sub-menu is displayed:
Link Statistics: View
Clear-All Config(
◄ ► ,
ENT)
Select View , Clear-All or Configure , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER .
(MONIT, STATS) VIEW
If the user selects View , the following screen is displayed:
Sta198:02/11/02 10:37:32
16.0, 16.0, 9.0, 9.0(
▲ ▼
)
The user may scroll backwards or forwards through the entries in the statistics log, using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Pressing ENTER or CLEAR will take the user back to the previous menu. The event log can store up to 255 events.
66
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
IMPORTANT
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The top line of the display indicates the log entry number, and the time and date of the entry. Note that in accordance with international convention, the date is shown in DAY-MONTH-YEAR format.
The bottom line of the display shows the statistics data which has been measured and recorded.
The meaning and format of the numbers is as follows:
Minimum Eb/No, Average Eb/No, Maximum TPLI, Average TPLI
(where TPLI means Transmit Power Level increase, if AUPC is enabled).
The user defines a measurement interval (see MONITOR, STATS,
CONFIGURE) and during this interval, Eb/No and TPLI are observed, at a one second rate. At the end of this period, the average Eb/No is calculated and recorded, and the minimum value seen in the interval. Similarly, the average
TPLI is calculated, along with the highest value seen in the interval.
Note: If the demod has lost lock during the measurement interval, the minimum
Eb/No will show ‘Loss’ rather than indicate a value. However, the average value
(while the demod was locked) will still be calculated and shown. If, on the other hand, the demodulator has been unlocked for the entire measurement interval, the average Eb/No will also show ‘Loss’. (The display will show ‘Loss, Loss’.)
If the measured values are greater than, or equal to 16.0 dB, the display will show
16.0 dB.
If AUPC is not enabled, the values of maximum and average TPLI will both show ‘Off'.
Examples:
08.0, 13.5, 2.5, 1.8 means:
Minimum Eb/No observed in the measurement interval = 8.0 dB
Average Eb/No observed in the measurement interval = 13.5 dB
Maximum TPLI observed in the measurement interval = 2.5 dB
Average TPLI observed in the measurement interval = 1.8 dB
Loss, 04.5, Off, Off means:
There was a loss of demod lock during the measurement interval
Average Eb/No observed in the measurement interval = 4.5 dB
Maximum TPLI observed in the measurement interval = AUPC disabled
Average TPLI observed in the measurement interval = AUPC disabled
(MONIT, STATS) CLEAR
67
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
If the user selects Clear-All , the following screen is displayed:
Clear all Stored Stats?
No Yes (
▲ ▼ ,
ENTER)
If the user selects Yes , the Statistics log is cleared, and the user is taken directly back to the previous menu.
(MONIT, STATS) CONFIGURE
If the users selects Configure , the following sub-menu is displayed:
Stats Logging Interval:
Disabled (
▲ ▼
,
ENTER)
The user is prompted to enter the logging interval (the period of time over which the statistics will be measured), using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER .
The user can choose Disabled, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, or 90 minutes .
Stats Logging Interval:
30 minutes (
▲ ▼
,
ENTER)
6.14.5 (MONIT) AUPC
If the user selects AUPC the following sub-menu is displayed:
AUPC:Remote EbNo =14.0dB
TX Power Increase =2.2dB
The top line displays the value of Eb/No of the demodulator at the distant end of the satellite link. The Eb/No will display Unlock if the remote demod is unlocked. The bottom line shows how much the AUPC system has increased the output power. If AUPC is not enabled, the value of Tx Power Increase will show as 0.0 dB.
6.14.6 (MONIT) ODU
If ODU is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
Outdoor Unit Monitor:
BUC LNB (
◄ ► ,
ENTER)
68
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Select LNB or BUC , using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
LNB Voltage: 13.1 volts
LNB Current: 235 mA(ENT)
The menu displays the LNB Voltage and Current. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the next-highest menu.
If BUC is selected, the following menu is displayed:
BUC:DC=47.8V,3.25A SW=05
T=+38C PLL=Flt Pwr=02.1W
The menu displays the following parameters:
DC
(DC Power) If a BUC supply is installed, displays measured BUC supply voltage and load current, measured at the Tx-IF connector.
T
SW
PLL
Pwr
(Temperature) If BUC FSK is enabled, displays BUC ambient temperature in ° C.
If BUC FSK is enabled, displays the M&C software version of the BUC.
If BUC FSK is enabled, displays the fault status of the BUC PLL synthesizers.
(Output) If BUC FSK is enabled, displays the output power as measured by the BUC power monitor.
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the next-highest menu.
6.15 TEST
TEST: Norm IF
m
Dig
m
I/O
m
RF
m
Tx-CW Tx-1,0(
◄ ►
,
ENT)
Select Norm , IF Loop , Dig Loop , I/O Loop , RF Loop , Tx-CW , or Tx-1,0 , using the
◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
This sub-menu permits the user to select the following test modes:
69
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Norm
IF Loop
Dig Loop
I/O Loop
RF Loop
TX-CW
TX-1,0
(Normal) This clears any test modes or loopbacks, and places the unit back into an operational state.
(IF Loopback) This test mode invokes an internal IF loop. This is a particularly useful feature, as it permits the user to perform a quick diagnostic test without having to disturb external cabling. Furthermore, all of the receive configuration parameters are temporarily changed to match those of the transmit side. When
Normal is again selected, all of the previous values are restored. During an IF
Loop, the Tx carrier continues to be transmitted. See Figure 6.4
(Digital Loopback) This test mode invokes a digital loopback, which loops data at the output of the framer/scrambler on the transmit side, back into the deframer/descrambler on the receive side. If concatenated Reed-Solomon FEC is being used, this is also included in the digital loop. See Figure 6.4
(Inward/Outward loopback) This test mode invokes two distinct loopbacks. The first of these is the inward loop, which takes data being received from the satellite direction, and passes it directly to the modulator. Simultaneously, the outward loop is invoked, whereby data being fed to the transmit data interface is routed directly back out of the receive data interface. See Figure 6.4
(RF Loopback) This test mode is almost identical to the IF loop mode. All of the receive configuration parameters are temporarily changed to match those of the transmit side, however, no internal connection is made. This is useful for performing a satellite loopback. When NORMAL is again selected, all of the previous values are restored.
(Transmit CW) This is a test mode which forces the modulator to transmit a pure carrier (unmodulated). Used for measuring phase noise.
(Transmit an alternating 1,0,1,0 pattern) This is a test mode which forces the modulator to transmit a carrier modulated with an alternating 1,0,1,0 pattern, at the currently selected symbol rate. This causes two discrete spectral lines to appear, spaced at +/- half the symbol rate, about the carrier frequency. This mode is used to check the carrier suppression of the Modulator. If OQPSK is selected as the modulation type, the test will produce a spectral pattern suitable for the measurement of SSB rejection – useful in determining the phase and amplitude accuracy of the modulator.
70
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
IF LOOPBACK
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
DIGITAL
LOOPBACK
I/O LOOPBACK
Figure 10. Loopback Modes
71
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
6.16 INFO (Information)
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
INFO:All Tx Rx Buf Frame
Intfc Rem Msk Ref ID 1:1
Select All, Tx, Rx, Buf, Frame, Intfc, Rem, Mask, Red, ID or 1:1 , using the
◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
These screens display information on the current configuration of the unit.
Depending on the choice selected, one of the following screens will be displayed:
6.16.1 (INFO) ALL
This works in an identical fashion to CONFIG, ALL . It sequentially displays all
CONFIG screens, but does not permit the user to edit a config, just to view it.
6.16.2 (INFO) TX (Transmit information)
Tx:1140.000 5000.000 TUR
8P 0.95 S EXT -20.0 ON I
The information displayed here is as follows:
Top line:
Transmit Frequency and Data Rate ( NOTE: Due to space limitations, the resolution of displayed frequency is limited to 1 kHz, and data rate to 10 bps)
FEC Encoder type (VIT = Viterbi, VRS=Viterbi + Reed-Solomon,
TCM = Trellis Coded + Reed-Solomon, TUR = Turbo, UNC = uncoded)
Bottom line:
Modulation type (Q = QPSK, OQ= OQPSK, B = BPSK, 8P = 8-PSK,
8Q = 8QAM, 16=16-QAM).
Code Rate (Unc = Uncoded, 2144 = 21/44, then 5/16, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 7/8, 0.95)
Scrambler state (S = Scrambler on, N = Scrambler off)
Clocking Mode (INT = internal, EXT = external, LOP = loop)
Output power level
Transmit output state (ON = on , OF = off,
EO= external off, RT= Rx-Tx Inhibit)
TSI state (I = Transmit Spectral Inversion on, N = off)
72
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.16.3 (INFO) RX (Receive information)
Rx:1140.000 5000.000 TUR
8P 0.95 D BUF +/-32k I
The information displayed here is as follows:
Receive Frequency and Data Rate ( NOTE: Due to space limitations, the resolution of displayed frequency is limited to 1 kHz, and data rate to 10Hz,)
FEC Decoder type (VIT = Viterbi, VRS=Viterbi + Reed-Solomon,
TCM = Trellis Coded + Reed-Solomon, TUR = Turbo, UNC = uncoded)
Demodulation type (Q = QPSK, OQ= OQPSK, B = BPSK, 8P = 8-PSK,
8Q = 8QAM, 16=16-QAM).
Code Rate (Unc = Uncoded, 2144 = 21/44, then 5/16, 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 7/8, 0.95)
Descrambler state (D = Descrambler on, N = Descrambler off)
Clocking Mode (SAT = buffer disabled, BUF = buffer enabled)
Demod Sweep Acquisition range
RSI state (I = Receive Spectral Inversion on, N = off)
6.16.4 (INFO) BUFF (Buffer information)
Buffer: Enabled (Tx=Rx)
Size:+/-04096 bits (ENT)
This displays if the buffer is enabled or disabled, shows the exact clocking mode
( Tx=Rx , or Tx<> Rx ), and the buffer size. Pressing ENTER takes the user back to the previous menu.
6.16.5 (INFO) FRAME (Framing and EDMAC information)
Examples:
Framing: Disabled
(ENTER or CLEAR)
Framing:AUPC-Only,EDMAC2
(ENTER or CLEAR)
73
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Framing: AUPC+EDMAC2
Master,0240 (ENT or CLR)
Framing: AUPC+EDMAC
Slave, 0241 (ENT or CLR)
This screen shows EDMAC mode, and shows if the unit is EDMAC Master or Slave , with the appropriate address. Pressing ENTER or CLEAR takes the user back to the previous menu.
6.16.6 (INFO) INTFC (Interface information)
This screen shows details of the electrical interface type of the main data port. If RS422 ,
V.35
or RS232 is selected, the menu will also indicate the operation of RTS/CTS.
Pressing ENTER or CLEAR takes the user back to the previous menu.
Examples:
Interface: RS422 (ENT)
RTS/CTS Loop, No Action
Interface:G.703 E1-Unbal
HDB3 (ENTER or CLEAR)
Interface: G.703 T1 B8ZS
533-655 feet(ENT or CLR)
Interface: IP (ENT)
IEEE 802.3 Ethernet
6.16.7 (INFO) REMCONT (Remote Control information)
This screen shows if the unit is in Local or Remote mode, and gives details of the electrical interface type selected, the unit’s address, and the baud rate selected, etc.
Pressing ENTER or CLEAR takes the user back to the previous menu. Example:
Remote M&C: Monitor Only
(Local Control only)
Further examples:
Remote M&C: RS485-4Wire
Address: 0001 19200 Baud
74
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Remote M&C: 100BaseTx
IP Addr: 255.255.255.255
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.16.8 (INFO) MASK (Alarm mask information)
This shows, in the same format as the CONFIG, Mask sub menu, which alarms are currently masked. If an alarm is not masked, a blank is displayed in the relevant screen position.
Mask: FIFO BPV TAIS RAIS
AGC EbNo BUF Ref BUC LNB
6.16.9 (INFO) REF (Frequency Reference)
This shows the source of the frequency reference for the CDM-570L.
Frequency Reference:
Internal 10 MHz (ENTER)
6.16.10 (INFO) ID (Circuit ID)
This displays the user-defined Circuit ID string, which is entered via the UTIL, ID screen. To return to the previous menu, press ENTER .
Circuit ID: (ENTER)
24 CHARACTER TST MESSAGE
75
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
6.16.11 (INFO) 1:1 (1:1 Redundancy information)
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Redundancy State:Standby
Serial 1:1 Link: Active
This screen shows the following:
Redundancy status - either Online or Standby (1:1 or 1:N)
1:1 link status - this shows the status of the serial link between the two units. – either Active or Idle
Pressing ENTER or CLEAR takes the user back to the previous menu.
6.17 SAVE/LOAD
Save/Load Configuration:
Save Load (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select Save or Load using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
These sub-menus permit the user to store or load up to 10 different modem configurations in the non-volatile memory of the modem (0 through 9).
6.17.1 (SAVE/LOAD) SAVE
Selecting Save will display the following screen, if the selected location is empty:
Save Config to Loc: 9
Empty (
▲ ▼
)
However, if the location already contains data, the following screen will be displayed:
Save Config to Loc: 9
11:10:29 23/12/03 (
▲ ▼
)
76
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The user is shown the time and date stamp of the previously stored configuration, for identification purposes.
Select the location where the current configuration will be stored, using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER . Locations 0 through 9 are available.
If the selected location does not contain a previously stored configuration, the following screen is displayed:
Your Configuration has been Saved to Loc 9 (ENT)
Pressing ENTER or CLEAR will take the user back to the previous menu.
If, however, the selected location contains a previously stored configuration, the following screen is displayed:
Loc 9 Contains Data!
Overwrite? NO YES (
◄ ►
)
Select No or Yes using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
Selecting Yes will overwrite the existing configuration at the selected location.
6.17.2 (SAVE/LOAD) LOAD
Having selected Load , if there is a configuration stored at the selected location the following screen will be displayed:
Load Config from Loc: 9
11:10:29 23/12/03 (
▲ ▼
)
Note the data and time stamp indentifying the stored configuration.
If the selected location contains no data, the following screen will be displayed:
Load Config from Loc 9
Empty (
▲ ▼
)
Select the location to load a configuration from, using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys, then press ENTER . Locations 0 through 9 are available.
77
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
If the selected location contains valid data, the following screen will be displayed:
New Config has been
Loaded from Loc 9 (ENT)
Pressing ENTER or CLEAR will take the user back to the previous menu.
6.18 UTILITY
UTIL: Buffer Clock Ref
ID 1:1 VFD Firmware FAST
Select Buffer , Clock , Ref , ID , 1:1, VFD, Firmware or FAST using the
◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
According to the selection, the following sub-menus are displayed:
6.18.1 (UTIL) BUFFER (Buffer re-center)
Press ENTER to Re-Center the Receive Buffer
Pressing ENTER will cause a forced re-centering of the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer.
6.18.2 (UTIL) CLOCK (Set real-time clock)
IMPORTANT
Edit Real-Time Clock:
12:00:00 24/04/03(
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
)
Edit the time and date settings of the real-time clock. This is accomplished by selecting the digit to be edited, using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The value of the digit is then changed using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER . Note that in accordance with international convention, the date is shown in DAY-MONTH-YEAR format.
78
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.18.3 (UTIL) REF (Reference)
Internal Freq Ref:Adjust
Warm-up delay (
◄ ►
,ENTER)
Select Adjust or Warm-up delay using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press
ENTER .
(UTIL, REF) ADJUST
If is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
Internal 10 MHz Freq Ref
Fine Adjust:+017(
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
)
Fine adjustment of the Internal 10 MHz reference oscillator is possible through this menu. Use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the value. Note that in order to facilitate adjustment, the value is updated as the digits are incremented – the user does not need to press the ENTER key. The range of values is from –999 to +999.
Note : The numbers displayed here do not correspond to an exact frequency increment. A user should perform this fine adjustment while using an external frequency counter, connected to either: a) the internal 10 MHz reference, if the user has internal access to the equipment, or b) the Tx Output, set for CW, 0 dBm output level, and an exact center frequency (1000 MHz, for example).
(UTIL, REF) WARM-UP DELAY
If Warm-up delay is selected, the following sub-menu is displayed:
Warm-up delay: Disable
Enable (
◄ ►
,ENTER)
Select Disable or Enable using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
If the user selects Disable, the CDM-570L will power-up and go into normal operational service without any delay. Because the CDM-570L uses a high-stability oven-controlled
10 MHz reference oscillator (OCXO) there is a finite time required for the oven to reach operating temperature. Consequently, there will be a frequency error (as great as 2 x 10 -6 ) when the modem first powers up, and it may take up to 2 minutes before the frequency has settled to its correct value. This will affect the Tx synthesizer (and hence the Tx output frequency) the Rx synthesizers, and the generation of the Internal Tx baseband
79
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM clock. For a CDM-570L operating on its own, this may not be a problem, but if the 10
MHz reference signal is being used to drive an externally-connected BUC, the frequency error at the RF output may be large, particularly at Ku or Ka-band.
In order to avoid this problem, the user may choose to enable a warm-up delay, which will suspend normal operation of the unit until the operating temperature of the OCXO has stablized. This is accomplished by selecting Enable, then pressing ENTER.
Warm-up delay is not fixed. Instead, CDM-570L uses an intelligent algorithm to minimize this delay, under all circumstances. CDM-570L uses its internal temperature sensor, and a knowledge of how long the unit has been powered down, to determine how long the warm-up delay should be.
For example, the worst case occurs when the unit has been powered down sufficiently long that the unit has reached thermal equilibrium with its surroundings, and the external temperature is at the lowest value possible. In this circumstance the CDM-570L will take
2 minutes to warm-up.
If the external temperature is hot, and the unit was powered down, then a short time later, powered up again, the warm-up period will be very short, perhaps only several seconds.
In order to alert the user, when the warm-up delay has been enabled, the opening screen will display the following:
Comtech CDM-570L Modem
Ref Warming-up: 045 secs
The bottom right of the display counts down, in seconds, until the warm-up period is complete. During this period, the Tx Carrier is deliberately muted . At the end of the warm-up period, the bottom line will revert to the ‘normal’ display of Firmware version, and the unit will enter its normal operational state.
IMPORTANT NOTE: If the user wishes to bypass this feature, the warm-up period may be over-ridden at any time by pressing the CLEAR key.
IMPORTANT
6.18.4 (UTIL) ID (Circuit ID)
Edit Circuit ID:(
◄ ►
,
▲ ▼
)
24 CHARACTER TST MESSAGE
Edit the Circuit ID string, using the ◄ ► and ▲ ▼ arrow keys. Only the bottom line is available (24 characters). The cursor selects the position on the bottom line ( ◄ ► ) and the character is then edited ( ▲ ▼ ). The following characters are available:
Space ( ) * + - , . / 0-9 and A-Z.
When the user has composed the string, press ENTER .
80
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
6.18.5 (UTIL) 1:1 (Manual 1:1 switchover)
Press ENT to force modem to Standby (1:1 ONLY)
If the unit is part of a 1:1 redundant pair of modems, and this unit, is currently on-line, pressing ENTER will cause the unit to switch to standby. Pressing CLEAR will exit the menu without causing the switchover.
6.18.6 (UTIL) VFD (VFD Display brightness)
Edit Display Brightness:
100% (
▲ ▼ ,
ENTER)
Edit the display brightness, using the ▲ ▼ arrow keys. The user should then press
ENTER .
6.18.7 (UTIL) FIRMWARE
This series of sub-menus permits the user to view information about the CDM-570L internal firmware. The modem can store two complete firmware images, and the user can select which image will be loaded the next time the unit re-boots.
IMPORTANT
THESE MENUS ARE FOR DIAGNOSTIC PURPOSES. ONLY CHANGE AN IMAGE IF
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO BY COMTECH EF DATA CUSTOMER SUPPORT
TECHNICIANS.
Firmware Images:
Info Select (
◄ ►
,
ENTER)
Select either Info or Select , using the ◄ ► arrow keys. The user should then press ENTER .
81
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
If the user selects Info , the following sub-menu is displayed:
Firmware Info: Bootrom
Image#1 Image #2 MPP50
The user may select, using the ◄ ► arrow keys and ENTER key, to view information about the Bootrom, the 2 images, or the IP module (if installed).
Each image is further broken down as follows:
Image#x: Bulk Main-FPGA
App Turbo-FPGA RS-FPGA
The user selects, using the ◄ ► arrow keys and ENTER key, which of these elements is then displayed. A screen similar to the one shown below will be displayed:
Bulk#x:
FWxxxx
01/21/04
1.1.1
If the user selects Select , the following sub-menu is displayed:
Current Active Image: #1
Next Reboot Image: #1 #2
The top line shows the current active image. On the bottom line the user may select, using the ◄ ► arrow keys and ENTER key, the image that will be active the next time the unit is re-booted.
6.18.8 (UTIL) FAST (FAST code options)
FAST is the way to enable new options in the modem. Obtain the FAST code for the new option from Comtech EF Data.
FAST:Cnfg View (H/W 0.03)
MainBoard S/N: 123456789
82
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The FAST menu allows the user to either Configure (enter) a new FAST code into the unit or to enable Demo Mode, or to View which options are currently installed. Select Cnfg or View using the ◄ ► arrow keys, then press ENTER .
In addition, the user is also presented with the Hardware Revision Number, and the Main Board Serial Number. This Serial Number is a unique indentifier for the
FAST upgrade process (and is different from the Chassis Serial Number) and is required to obtain a new FAST code from the factory.
If the user selects Cnfg , then the following menu is displayed:
FAST Configuration:
Edit Code Demo Mode
If the user selects Edit Code , then the following menu is displayed:
Edit 20 digit FAST Code:
00000000000000000000 ENT
Enter the code carefully. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to each character. Use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the character, then press ENTER .
The modem will respond with “Configured Successfully” if the new FAST option has been accepted as shown below.
Configured Successfully
(ENTER or CLEAR)
If, on the other hand, the FAST code is rejected, the following menu will be displayed:
FAST Code Rejected!
(ENTER or CLEAR)
If the user selects Demo Mode , then the following menu is displayed:
FAST Demo Mode: Off On
604800 seconds remain
Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to select Off or On. When On, the second line will display the under of seconds remaining available for the free Demo Mode.
When enabled, Demo Mode allows access to ALL CDM-570L FAST options for 604800 seconds (7 full days). Demo Mode may be turned on and off an unlimited number of
83
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM time until the 604800 seconds have expired. The seconds count is only decrement when the mode is On. When the Demo period expires the following menu is display displayed:
FAST Demo Mode: Off On
Demo Period Expired
IMPORTANT
CHANGING THE STATE OF DEMO MODE WILL CAUSE THE MODEM FIRMWARE TO
REBOOT. ALSO, IF DEMO MODE IS ENABLED AND THE TIMER EXPIRES THE
MODEM FIRMWARE WILL REBOOT.
If the user selects View , then the following menu is displayed, for example:
View Options: 03 (
▲ ▼
)
150W BPSU Not Installed
Use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to scroll through each Option Number in turn. As the cursor highlights each option, the description of the option will be displayed on the bottom line, along with the information “Installed or Not Installed”.
The options are shown below:
Option
Number
Option
Type
Displayed
Code
Description
01 Hardware 150W BPSU 150 Watt, 48 volt BUC PSU
07
08
09
10
02
03
04
Hardware
Hardware
Hardware
100W BPSU
RS Codec
TPC Codec
05 Hardware TPC/LDPC
06 Hardware IP Module
15
16
17
Hardware
Hardware
FAST
FAST
FAST
FAST
FAST
H/W Exp-1
H/W Exp-2
2048 kbps
5000 kbps
11 FAST 8PSK/8QAM
12 FAST 16-QAM
13
14
FAST
FAST
S/W Exp-1
Hdr Comp
Data Comp
IP QoS
3xDES
100 Watt, 24 volt BUC PSU
Reed-Solomon Codec
Turbo Product Codec
IP Traffic Module
Future Hardware Expansion 1
Future Hardware Expansion 2
2048 kbps max data rate
5000 kbps max data rate
8-PSK and 8-QAM modulation
Future Software Expansion 1
IP Header Compression
IP Datagram Compression
IP Quality of Service
IP 3xDES Encryption
84
Chapter 7. FORWARD ERROR
CORRECTION OPTIONS
7.1 Introduction
As standard, the CDM-570L Modem is equipped with an industry-standard Viterbi
F orward E rror C orrection (FEC) encoder/decoder. The constraint lengths and encoding polynomials are compatible with the vast majority of existing modems from other manufacturers. Comtech EF Data has performed compatibility testing to ensure interoperability. In addition, there are two plug-in daughter cards (SIMM modules), both field upgradeable, for adding other FEC functionality.
The first of these is a Concatenated Reed-Solomon Codec, which is combined with
Viterbi coding, to significantly improve BER versus Eb/No performance. It is required for running 8-PSK/TCM, and for the 16-QAM Viterbi modes.
The second optional plug-in card is the Turbo Product Codec. Turbo Coding represents a very significant development in the area of FEC, and Comtech EF Data’s Turbo Product
Codec offers Rate 5/16 and Rate 21/44 for BPSK, Rate 21/44 QPSK, Rate 3/4 and Rate
7/8 for QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK and 16-QAM, and Rate 0.95 for QPSK and 8-PSK. Turbo
Product Coding provides the best Forward Error Correction technology currently available, and is now offered with a sufficiently broad range of code rates and modulation types that link performance can be optimized under any conditions.
At the time of writing, Comtech EF Data is planning to release a new codec, which is a combination of Turbo Product Coding and Low Density Parity Check (LDPC) coding.
Please consult the factory for details of availabilty on this new TPC/LDPC Codec.
85
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
7.2 Viterbi
The combination of convolutional coding and Viterbi decoding has become an almost universal standard for satellite communications. The CDM-570L complies with the
Intelsat IESS 308/309 standards for Viterbi decoding with a constraint length of seven.
This is a de facto standard, even in a closed network environment, which means almost guaranteed inter-operability with other manufacturer’s equipment. It provides very useful levels of coding gain, and its short decoding delay and error-burst characteristics make it particularly suitable for low data rate coded voice applications. It has a short constraint length, fixed at 7, for all code rates. (The constraint length is defined as the number of output symbols from the encoder that are affected by a single input bit.) By choosing various coding rates (Rate 1/2, 3/4 or 7/8) the user can trade off coding gain for bandwidth expansion. Rate 1/2 coding gives the best improvement in error rate, but doubles the transmitted data rate, and doubles the occupied bandwidth of the signal. Rate
7/8 coding, at the other extreme, provides the most modest improvement in performance, but only expands the transmitted bandwidth by 14%. A major advantage of the Viterbi decoding method is that the performance is independent of data rate, and does not display a pronounced threshold effect (i.e., does not fail rapidly below a certain value of Eb/No).
Note that in BPSK mode, the CDM-570L only permits a coding rate of 1/2. Because the method of convolutional coding used with Viterbi, the encoder does not preserve the original data intact, and is called non-systematic .
Table 11. Viterbi Decoding Summary
FOR
Good BER performance - very useful coding gain.
AGAINST
Higher coding gain possible with other methods
Almost universally used, with de facto standards for constraint length and coding polynomials
Shortest decoding delay (~100 bits) of any FEC scheme - good for coded voice, VOIP, etc.
Short constraint length produces small error bursts - good for coded voice.
No pronounced threshold effect - fails gracefully.
Coding gain independent of data rate.
7.3 Reed-Solomon Outer Codec (Hardware Option)
IMPORTANT
It cannot be emphasized strongly enough that the purpose of the concatenated Reed-
Solomon is to dramatically improve the BER performance of a link under given noise conditions. It should NOT be considered as a method to reduce the link EIRP to the point where rain-fade margin, particularly at Ku-band, is no longer required.
The concatenation of an outer Reed-Solomon Codec with Viterbi decoder first became popular when it was introduced by Intelsat in the early 1990s. It permits significant
86
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
CAUTION improvements in error performance without significant bandwidth expansion. The coding overhead added by the RS outer Codec is typically around 10%, which translates to a 0.4 dB power penalty for a given link. Reed-Solomon codes are block codes (as opposed to
Viterbi which is convolutional), and in order to be processed correctly the data must be framed and de-framed. Additionally, Reed-Solomon codes are limited in how well they can correct errors that occur in bursts. This, unfortunately, is the nature of the uncorrected errors from a Viterbi decoder, which produce clusters of errors that are multiples of half the constraint length. For this reason, the data must be interleaved following RS encoding, and is then de-interleaved prior to decoding. This ensures that a single burst of errors leaving the Viterbi decoder is spread out over a number of interleaving frames, so errors entering the RS decoder do not exceed its capacity to correct those errors. In the case of the CDM-570L, two different RS code rates are used, according to the mode of operation.
A 220,200 code is used in transparent closed network modes, and a 200,180 code is used in framed (EDMAC) modes. (220,200 means that data is put into blocks of 220 bytes, of which 200 bytes are data, and 20 bytes are FEC overhead.) These two codes were chosen because they fit well into Comtech EF Data’s clock generation scheme, and they have almost identical coding gain. When Viterbi decoding is used as the primary FEC, an interleaver depth of four is used. The increase in coding gain is at the expense of delay.
The interleaving/de-interleaving delay and the delay through the decoder itself can be as high as 25 kbits. At very low data rates, this equates to several seconds, making it highly unsuitable for voice applications. Additionally, the de-interleaver frame synchronization method can add significantly to the time taken for the demodulator to declare acquisition.
A characteristic of concatenated RS coding is the very pronounced threshold effect. For any given modem design, there will be a threshold value of Eb/No below which the demodulator cannot stay synchronized. This may be due to the carrier-recovery circuits, or the synchronization threshold of the primary FEC device, or both. In the CDM-570L, and Rate 1/2 operation, this threshold is around 4 dB Eb/No. Below this value, operation is not possible, but above this value, the error performance of the concatenated RS system produces exceptionally low error rates for a very small increase in Eb/No.
Care should be taken not to operate the demodulator near its sync threshold. Small fluctuations in Eb/No may cause total loss of the link, with the subsequent need for the demodulator to re-acquire the signal.
Table 12. Concatenated RS Coding Summary
FOR
Exceptionally good BER performance - several orders of magnitude improvement in link
BER under given link conditions.
Very small additional bandwidth expansion
AGAINST
Very pronounced threshold effect - does not fail gracefully in poor Eb/No conditions. Additional coding overhead actually degrades sync threshold, and reduces link fade margin.
Significant processing delay (~25 kbits) - not good for voice, or IP applications
Adds to demod acquisition time.
87
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
7.4 Trellis Coding (requires 8-PSK/8-QAM FAST Option)
In the other FEC methods described here, the processes of coding and modulation are independent. The FEC codec has no knowledge of, or interaction with, the modulator.
However, there are schemes in which the coding and modulation are combined together, where the encoder places FEC symbols in a precise manner into the signal constellation.
This can yield an overall improvement in performance, and is used in higher-order modulation schemes, such as 8-PSK, 16-PSK, 16-QAM, etc. When convolution coding is used, the overall coded modulation approach is referred to as Trellis Coded Modulation
(TCM). Ungerboeck was an early pioneer, and developed optimum mapping and decoding schemes. However, the decoding scheme was seen as complex, and expensive, and Qualcomm Inc. developed a variation on the theme, which uses a Viterbi decoder at the core, surrounded by adjunct processing. The scheme is able to achieve performance very close to the optimum Ungerboeck method, but with far less complexity, and is called pragmatic Trellis Coded Modulation .
Now, Intelsat recognized that, as more and more high power transponders are put in to service, the transponders are no longer power limited , but bandwidth limited. In order to maximize transponder capacity, they looked at 8-PSK as a method of reducing the occupied bandwidth of a carrier, and adopted Qualcomm’s pragmatic TCM, at Rate 2/3.
A Rate 2/3 8-PSK/TCM carrier occupies only 50% of the bandwidth of a Rate 1/2 QPSK carrier. However, the overall coding gain of the scheme is not adequate by itself, and so it is required that the scheme be concatenated with an outer RS codec. When combined, there is a threshold value of Eb/No of around 6 dB, and above approximately 7 dB, the bit error rate is better than 1 x 10 -8 .
The detractions of the concatenated RS approach apply here also, along with more stringent requirements for phase noise and group delay distortion – the natural consequences of the higher-order modulation.
The CDM-570L implements a Closed Network version of Rate 2/3 8-PSK/TCM/RS, using either the 220, 200 or 200,180 Reed-Solomon outer codes. Although not compatible, it provides identical performance to the Open Network IESS-310 standard.
Table 13. 8-PSK/TCM Coding Summary
FOR
Exceptionally bandwidth efficient compared to QPSK
AGAINST
Needs concatenated RS outer codec to give acceptable coding gain performance
Demod acquisition threshold much higher than for QPSK
8-PSK is more sensitive to phase noise and group delay distortion than QPSK
88
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
7.5 Turbo Product Codec (Hardware Option)
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
7.5.1 Introduction
Turbo coding is an FEC technique developed within the last few years, which delivers significant performance improvements compared to more traditional techniques. Two general classes of Turbo Codes have been developed, Turbo Convolutional Codes (TCC), and Turbo Product Codes (TPC, a block coding technique). Comtech EF Data has chosen to implement an FEC codec based on TPC. A Turbo Product Code is a 2 or 3 dimensional array of block codes. Encoding is relatively straightforward, but decoding is a very complex process requiring multiple iterations of processing for maximum performance to be achieved.
Unlike the popular method of concatenating a Reed-Solomon codec with a primary FEC codec, Turbo Product Coding is an entirely stand-alone method. It does not require the complex interleaving/de-interleaving of the RS approach, and consequently, decoding delays are significantly reduced. Furthermore, the traditional concatenated RS schemes exhibit a very pronounced threshold effect. A small reduction in Eb/No can result in total loss of demod and decoder synchronization. TPC does not suffer from this problem. The demod and decoder remain synchronized down to the point where output error rate becomes unusable. This is considered to be an advantageous characteristic in fading environment. Typically, in QPSK, 8-PSK and 16-QAM TPC modes the demod and decoder can remain synchronized 2 – 3 dB below the Viterbi/R-S or TCM cases .
With this release of the CDM-570L, Comtech EF Data now provides the best Forward
Error Correction technology currently available, offering a very broad range of TPC code rates, combined with the entire range of modulation types, from BPSK to 16-QAM.
7.5.2 TPC modes available in the CDM-570L
Table 14. Available TPC Modes
Code Rate/Modulation
Rate 21/44 BPSK
Rate 5/16 BPSK
Rate 21/44 QPSK, OQPSK
Rate 3/4 QPSK, OQPSK
Rate 3/4 8-PSK
Rate 3/4 16-QAM
Rate 7/8 QPSK, OQPSK
Rate 7/8 8-PSK
Rate 7/8 16-QAM
Rate 0.95 QPSK, OQPSK
Rate 0.95 8-PSK
Data Rate Range
2.4 kbps to 1.19 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 0.78 Mbps
4.8 kbps to 2.38 Mbps
7.2 kbps to 3.75 Mbps
10.8 kbps to 5.0 Mbps
14.4 kbps to 5.0 Mbps
8.4 kbps to 4.37 Mbps
13.6 kbps to 5.0 Mbps
16.8 kbps to 5.0 Mbps
9.1 kbps to 4.72 Mbps
15.3 kbps to 5.0 Mbps
89
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
7.5.3 End-to-End Processing Delay
In many cases, FEC methods that provide increased coding gain do so at the expense of increased processing delay. However, with TPC, this increase in delay is very modest.
The table below shows, for the CDM-570L, the processing delays for the major FEC types, including the three TPC modes:
Table 15. Turbo Product Coding processing delay comparison
FEC Mode (64 kbps data rate)
Viterbi, Rate 1/2
End-to-end delay, ms
12
Viterbi Rate 1/2 + Reed Solomon
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 3/4
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 21/44, BPSK
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 5/16, BPSK
266
47
64
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 7/8
Turbo Product Coding, Rate 0.95
48
245 *
69
* A larger block is used for the Rate 7/8 code, which increases decoding delay.
Note that in all cases, the delay is inversely proportional to data rate, so for 128 kbps, the delay values would be half of those shown above. It can be seen that the concatenated
Reed-Solomon cases increase the delay significantly, due mainly to interleaving/deinterleaving.
90
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
7.5.4 Comparison of all TPC Modes
Mode
QPSK Rate 1/2 Viterbi *
BPSK Rate 21/44 Turbo
BPSK Rate 5/16 Turbo
QPSK/ OQPSK
Rate 21/4 Turbo
QPSK/ OQPSK
Rate 3/4 Turbo
QPSK/ OQPSK
Rate 7/8 Turbo
QPSK/ OQPSK
Rate 0.95 Turbo
8-PSK Rate 2/3 TCM ** and RS (IESS-310)
8-PSK Rate 3/4 Turbo
8-PSK Rate 7/8 Turbo
8-PSK Rate 0.95 Turbo
16-QAM Rate 3/4 Turbo
16-QAM Rate 7/8 Turbo
Eb/No at
BER = 10 -8
Guaranteed
(Typical in parentheses)
7.3 dB
(6.8 dB)
3.3 dB
(3.0 dB)
2.8 dB
(2.5 dB)
3.2 dB
(2.8 dB)
4.4 dB
(4.0 dB)
4.5 dB
(4.2 dB)
6.9 dB
(6.5 dB)
6.9 dB
(6.0 dB)
6.8 dB
(6.3 dB)
7.2 dB
(6.8 dB)
10.3dB
(9.9 dB)
8.2 dB
(7.7 dB)
8.3 dB
(7.9 dB)
Eb/No at
BER = 10 -6
Guaranteed
(Typical in parentheses)
6.0 dB
(5.5 dB)
2.9 dB
(2.6 dB)
2.4 dB
(2.1 dB)
2.9 dB
(2.6 dB)
3.8 dB
(3.3 dB)
4.3 dB
(4.0 dB)
6.4 dB
(6.0 dB)
6.5 dB
(5.6 dB)
6.2 dB
(5.7 dB)
7.0 dB
(6.6dB)
9.3 dB
(8.9 dB)
7.4 dB
(7.0 dB)
8.1 dB
(7.7 dB)
Spectral
Efficiency
Symbol Rate
1.00 bits/Hz 1.0 x bit rate
0.48 bits/Hz 2.1 x bit rate
0.31 bits/Hz 3.2 x bit rate
Occupied *
Bandwidth for 1 Mbps
Carrier
0.96 bits/Hz 1.05 x bit rate 1246 kHz
1.50 bits/Hz 0.67 x bit rate
1.75 bits/Hz 0.57 x bit rate
1.90 bits/Hz 0.53 x bit rate
1.82 bits/Hz 0.56 x bit rate
2.25 bits/Hz 0.44 x bit rate
2.62 bits/Hz 0.38 x bit rate
2.85 bits/Hz 0.35 x bit rate
3.00 bits/Hz 0.33 x bit rate
3.50 bits/Hz 0.28 x bit rate
1190 kHz
2493 kHz
3808 kHz
793 kHz
678 kHz
626 kHz
666 kHz
529 kHz
453 kHz
377 kHz
396 kHz
340 kHz
16-QAM Rate 3/4 **
Viterbi/Reed-Solomon
8.1 dB
(7.5 dB)
8.6 dB
(8.0 dB)
2.73 bits/Hz 0.37 x bit rate 435 kHz
16-QAM Rate 7/8 **
Viterbi/Reed-Solomon
9.5 dB
(9.0 dB)
10.1 dB
(9.5 dB)
3.18 bits/Hz 0.31 x bit rate 374 kHz
*
The occupied bandwidth is defined at the width of the transmitted spectrum taken at the –10 dB points on the plot of power spectral density. This equates to 1.19 x symbol rate for the CDM-570L transmit filtering.
**
Included for comparative purposes
91
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
It can be seen that the 8-PSK Rate 3/4 Turbo performance closely approaches that of the
Rate 2/3 TCM/Reed-Solomon case – the BER performance is within approximately 0.4 dB. However, it should be noted that the Rate 3/4 Turbo mode is 20% more bandwidth efficient than the TCM case. The additional advantages of Turbo (lower delay, performance during fades, etc.) should also be considered.
Table 16. Turbo Product Coding Summary
FOR
Exceptionally good BER performance - significant improvement compared with every other FEC method in use today
No pronounced threshold effect - fails gracefully
Exceptional bandwidth efficiency
Coding gain independent of data rate (in this implementation)
Low decoding delay
Easy field upgrade in CDM-570L
AGAINST
Nothing!
7.6 Uncoded Operation (No FEC)
There are occasions when a user may wish to operate a satellite link with no forward error correction of any kind. For this reason, the CDM-570L offers this uncoded mode for three modulation types - BPSK, QPSK, and OQPSK. However, the user should be aware of some of the implications of using this approach.
PSK demodulators have two inherent undesirable features. The first of these is known as
‘phase ambiguity’, and is due to the fact the demodulator does not have any absolute phase reference, and in the process of carrier recovery, the demodulator can lock up in any of K phase states, where K = 2 for BPSK, K = 4 for QPSK. Without the ability to resolve these ambiguous states there would be a 1-in-2 chance that the data at the output of the demodulator would be wrong, in the case of BPSK. For QPSK, the probability would be 3 in 4.
The problem is solved in the case of BPSK by differentially encoding the data prior to transmission, and then performing the inverse decoding process. This is a very simple process, but has the disadvantage that it doubles the receive BER. For every bit error the demodulator produces, the differential decoder produces two.
The problem for QPSK is more complex, as there are 4 possible lock states, leading to 4 ambiguities. When FEC is employed, the lock state of the FEC decoder can be used to resolve two of the four ambiguities, and the remaining two can be resolved using serial differential encoding/decoding. However, when no FEC is being used, an entirely different scheme must be used. Therefore, in QPSK, a parallel differential encoding/decoding technique is used, but has the disadvantage that it again doubles the receive BER.
92
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
OQPSK is a different situation again, where the ambiguities result not only from not having an absolute phase reference, but also not knowing which of the two parallel paths in the demod, I or Q, contains the half-symbol delay. Another type of differential encoding is used, but yet again the error rate is doubled, compared to ideal.
The second problem inherent in PSK demodulators is that of ‘data false locking’.
In order to accomplish the task of carrier recovery, the demodulator must use a non-linear process. A second-order non-linearity is used for BPSK, and a fourth-order non-linearity is used for QPSK. When data at a certain symbol rate is used to modulate the carrier, the demodulator can lock at incorrect frequencies, spaced at intervals of one-quarter of the symbol rate away from the carrier. Fortunately, when FEC decoding is used, the decoder synchronization state can be used to verify the correct lock point has been achieved, and to reject the false locks.
However, if uncoded operation is used, there is no way to recognize a data false lock. The demodulator will indicate that it is correctly locked, but the data out will not be correct.
This problem has been almost entirely eliminated in the CDM-570L with the fast acquisition algorithm which includes Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) techniques. However, there is a very small probabilty that a data false lock could still occur in uncoded mode, and in this circumstance Comtech EF Data cannot be held responsible for incorrect operation.
93
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1
Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
Viterbi
Decoding
1E-2
Typical
Performance
1E-3
1E-4
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
Specification limit, Rate 7/8
Coding
1E-8
1E-9
BER
Specification limit Rate 1/2
Coding
Specification limit, Rate 3/4
Coding
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 11. Viterbi Decoding
94
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1E-1
1E-2
Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
Viterbi with concatenated
RS 220,200
Outer Code
Sync threshold,
Rate 3/4
1E-3
Sync threshold,
Rate 7/8
1E-4
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9
BER
Combined sync threshold, demod and Viterbi
Decoder, Rate 1/2
Specification
Limit Rate 1/2 and 220,200
Outer Code
Typical performance
Specification
Limit Rate 3/4 and 220,200
Outer Code
Specification
Limit Rate 7/8 and 220,200
Outer Code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 12. Viterbi with concatenated RS Outer Code
95
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
1E-1
1E-2
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
8-PSK/TCM Rate 2/3
Decoding, with 220,
200 RS Outer Code
1E-3
1E-4
1E-5
Typical
Performance
1E-6
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9
BER
Specification limit
Rate 2/3 Coding and
220,200 RS Outer Code
Specification limit, Rate 2/3
Coding
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 13. 8-PSK/TCM Rate 2/3 with concatenated RS Outer Code
96
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
1E-1
1E-2
Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Uncoded
BPSK/QPSK
Comtech Turbo Product Codec
Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK,
8-PSK and 16-QAM
Uncoded
16-QAM
1E-3
Spec limit
Rate 3/4
8-PSK
1E-4
1E-5
Spec limit
Rate 3/4
QPSK/OQPSK
Uncoded
8-PSK
1E-6
1E-7
Spec limit
Rate 3/4
16-QAM
1E-8
1E-9
BER
Typical performance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 14. Comtech EF Data Turbo Product Codec
Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK, 8-PSK AND 16-QAM
97
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
1E-1
1E-2
Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Uncoded
BPSK/QPSK
Comtech Turbo Product Codec
Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK,
8-PSK and 16-QAM
Uncoded
16-QAM
1E-3
1E-4
Spec limit
Rate 7/8
QPSK/OQPSK
Spec limit
Rate 7/8
8-PSK
Uncoded
8-PSK
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
Spec limit
Rate 7/8
16-QAM
1E-8
1E-9
BER
Typical performance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 15. Comtech EF Data Turbo Product Codec
Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK, 8-PSK AND 16-QAM
98
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
1E-1
1E-2
1E-3
Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Uncoded
BPSK/QPSK
Comtech Turbo Product Codec
Rate 21/44 QPSK/OQPSK
Rate 0.95 QPSK/OQPSK and 8-PSK
Uncoded
8-PSK
1E-4
1E-5
1E-6
Spec limit
Rate 1/2
QPSK/OQPSK
Spec limit
Rate 0.95
QPSK/OQPSK
1E-7
Spec limit
Rate 0.95
8-PSK
1E-8
1E-9
BER
Typical performance
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 16. Comtech EF Data Turbo Product Codec
Rate 21/44 QPSK, Rate 0.95 QPSK and Rate 0.95 8-PSK
99
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
1E-1
1E-2
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Comtech Turbo Product Codec
Rate 21/44 BPSK
Rate 5/16 BPSK
1E-3
Spec limit
Rate 5/16
BPSK
Spec limit
Rate 21/44
BPSK
1E-4
Uncoded
BPSK/QPSK
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
1E-8
Typical performance
1E-9
BER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 17. Rate 21/44 BPSK and Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo
100
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
1E-1
1E-2
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
16-QAM Viterbi, Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8 with 220,200 RS Outer Code
Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
Uncoded 16-QAM
1E-3
1E-4
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
Typical
Performance
Specification limit Rate 7/8
Viterbi and
220,200 RS
Outer Code
1E-8
1E-9
BER
Specification limit Rate
3/4 Viterbi and 220,200
RS Outer Code
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 18. 16-QAM Viterbi, Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8 with 220,200 RS Outer Code
101
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
1E-1
1E-2
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Eb/No in dB
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Uncoded BPSK/QPSK
Differential
Encoding -
No FEC, no scrambling
1E-3
1E-4
1E-5
1E-6
1E-7
1E-8
1E-9
BER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Figure 19. Differential Encoding - No FEC, no scrambling
102
Chapter 8. OFFSET QPSK
OPERATION
Offset QPSK modulation is a variation of normal QPSK, which is offered in the CDM-
570L. Normal, bandlimited, QPSK produces an RF signal envelope that necessarily goes through a point of zero amplitude when the modulator transitions through non-adjacent phase states. This is not considered to be a problem in most communication systems, as long as the entire signal processing chain is linear.
However, when bandlimited QPSK is passed through a non-linearity (for instance, a saturated power amplifier), there is a tendency for the carefully-filtered spectrum to degrade. This phenomenon is termed ‘spectral re-growth’, and at the extreme (hard limiting) the original, unfiltered sin(x)/x spectrum would result. In most systems, this would cause an unacceptable level of interference to adjacent carriers, and would cause degradation of the BER performance of the corresponding demodulator.
To overcome the problem of the envelope collapsing to a point of zero amplitude, Offset
QPSK places a delay between I and Q channels of exactly 1/2 symbol. Now the modulator cannot transition through zero when faced with non-adjacent phase states. The result is that there is far less variation in the envelope of the signal, and non-linearities do not cause the same level of degradation.
The demodulator must re-align the I and Q symbol streams before the process of carrier recovery can take place. For various reasons this makes the process of acquisition more difficult, and acquisition times may be longer, especially at low data rates.
103
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
This page is intentionally blank
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
104
Chapter 9. CLOCKING MODES
When dealing with satellite modems, the subject of clocking can be a complex issue. This section describes the various clocking options that are available with the CDM-570L.
There are two fundamentally different interfaces provided by the modem plus the optional IP Module Ethernet interface:
• Synchronous clock and data interfaces (EIA-422, V.35, etc.) that permit great flexibility concerning the source and direction of clocks. These are complex.
• G.703 interfaces combine clock and data into a single signal (and are referred to as self-clocking ). In their basic form these are less flexible and easier to understand.
• For the optional IP Module Ethernet interface, clocking is internally controlled and clock selection is not available
9.1 Transmit Clocking
There are four transmit clocking modes in the CDM-570L. EIA-422/449 signal mnemonics will be used for illustration, but the description applies equally to V.35, and synchronous EIA-232.
9.1.1 Internal Clock
In this mode, the modem, assumed always to be the DCE, supplies the clock to the DTE.
(The EIA-422/449 name for this signal is Send Timing, or ST.) The DTE then clocks from this source, and gives the modem transmit data (Send Data, or SD), synchronous with this clock. It is optional whether the DTE also returns the clock (Terminal Timing, or TT). The modem can accept it if it is present, but uses ST if it is not. At rates above 2
Mbps, Comtech EF Data highly recommends that the user returns TT to ensure the correct clock/data relationship.
G.703: The internal clock mode does not apply; the clock is always recovered from the incoming signal, and the modem locks its modulator clocks to this.
105
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
9.1.2 Tx Terrestrial
In this mode, the modem expects to see the DTE provide the clock, so that it can phaselock its internal circuits. In this case, the modem does not provide any signal on ST, but instead requires a clock signal on Terminal Timing (TT), synchronous with the data. If no clock is present, an alarm will be generated and the modem will substitute its internal clock.
G.703: This is the ‘natural’ clock mode.
9.1.3 Rx Loop-Timed, Rx=Tx
In certain circumstances, a terminal at the distant-end of a satellite link may be required to provide a clock to the DTE equipment which is locked to the receive satellite signal.
This is similar to Internal Clock mode, in that the modem will source Send Timing (ST) to the DTE, but now the timing is derived from the demodulator. The DTE then clocks from this source, and gives the modem transmit data (Send Data, or SD), synchronous with this clock. It is optional whether the DTE also returns the clock (Terminal Timing, or TT); the modem can accept it, if it is present, but uses ST if it is not. If the demodulator loses lock, the modem’s internal clock will be substituted, so an accurate and stable clock is present on ST, rather than a clock that may jitter and wander in a random fashion.
G.703: Does not apply.
9.1.4 Rx Loop-Timed, Rx<>Tx (Asymmetric Loop Timing)
The CDM-570L incorporates circuitry which permits loop timing when the Tx and Rx data rates are not the same. In this case the clock frequency appearing at ST will be whatever the TX data rate is programmed to, but phase-locked to the demodulator’s receive symbol clock. In all other respects the operation is the same as for ‘standard’ loop timing.
G.703: Does not apply.
106
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
9.2 Receive Clocking
There are three receive clocking modes in the CDM-570L, plus an additional setting used for Drop and Insert only – see later section.
9.2.1 Buffer Disabled (Rx Satellite)
When the buffer is disabled, the receive clock (Receive Timing, or RT) is derived directly from the demodulator, and hence will be subject to plesiochronous and Doppler offsets.
In certain instances, this may be acceptable. There is still a minimum buffer in use to dejitter the effects of removing overhead framing.
G.703: Applicable.
9.2.2 Buffer Enabled, Tx=Rx
In this instance, it is required that the buffer be enabled, so that the clock and data appearing on Receive Timing and Receive Data (RT and RD respectively) are synchronous with the transmit clock. This is a relatively simple case, as the output clock for the buffer is derived directly from either ST, TT or the external source.
G.703: Applicable.
9.2.3 Buffer Enabled, Rx<>Tx
This is an uncommon case, where the receive data rate does not equal the transmit clock.
The modem will generate a phase-locked buffer output clock which uses the selected reference, regardless of its frequency in relation to the receive data rate.
G.703: Applicable.
9.3 X.21 Notes
For X.21 operation, use the RS-422 pins, but ignore Receive Clock if the Modem is DTE, and ignore Transmit clocks if the Modem is DCE.
107
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Figure 20 Tx Clock Modes
108
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Figure 21 Rx Clock Modes
109
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
This page is intentionally blank
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
110
Chapter 10. EDMAC CHANNEL
10.1 Theory Of Operation
EDMAC is an acronym for E mbedded D istant-end M onitor A nd C ontrol. This is a feature which permits the user to access the M&C features of modems which are at the distant-end of a satellite link.
This is accomplished by adding extra information to the user’s data, but in a manner which is completely transparent to the user.
On the transmit side:
The data is split into frames, each frame containing 1008 bits (except Rate 21/44 BPSK
Turbo, or when the data rates exceed 2048 kbps, where the frame length is 2928 bits, and
Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo where the frame length is 3072 bits). Forty-eight bits in each frame are overhead, and the rest of these bits are the user’s data. This increases the rate of transmission by 5% (approximately 1.6% for the Turbo BPSK cases, and for all data rates greater than 2.048 Mbps). For example, if the user’s data rate is 64 kbps, the actual transmission rate will now be at 67.2 kbps. Note that the user may also select EDMAC-2 framing, which uses a 2928 bit frame, and yields a 1.6% overhead for all modulation types and data rates.
At the start of each frame a 12 bit synchronization word is added. This allows the demodulator to find and lock to the start of frame. At regular intervals throughout the frame, additional data bytes and flag bits are added (a further 36 bits in total). It is these additional bytes which convey the M&C data.
When framing is used, the normal V.35 scrambler is no longer used. This V.35 approach is called ‘self synchronizing’ because, in the receiver, no external information is required for the de-scrambling process to recover the original data. The disadvantage of this method is that it multiplies errors. On average, if one bit error is present at the input of the descrambler, three output errors are generated. However, there is an alternative when the data is in a framed format. In this case, a different class of scrambler may be used, one which uses the start of frame information to start the scrambling process at an exact known state. In the receiver, having synchronised to the frame, the de-scrambler can
111
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM begin its processing at exactly the right time. This method does not multiply errors, and therefore has a clear advantage over V.35 scrambling. This is fortunate, as there is a penalty to be paid for adding the framing. By adding the extra 5% to the transmitted data rate, the effective Eb/No seen by the user will degrade by a factor of 10log(1.05), or 0.21 dB (0.07dB in the case of the two BPSK Turbo rates). The use of an externally synchronized scrambler and descrambler almost exactly compensates for this degradation. The net effect is that the user will see effectively identical BER performance whether framing is used or not.
On the receive side:
When the demodulator locks to the incoming carrier, it must go through the additional step of searching for, and locking to, the synchronization word. This uniquely identifies the start of frame, and permits the extraction of the overhead bytes and flag bits at the correct position within the frame. In addition, the start of frame permits the de-scrambler to correctly recover the data. The user’s data is extracted, and sent through additional processing, in the normal manner. The extracted overhead bytes are examined to determine if they contain valid M&C bytes.
10.2 M&C Connection
Data to be transmitted to the distant-end is sent to a local unit via the remote control port.
A message for the distant-end is indistinguishable from a ‘local’ message. It has the same structure and content, only the address will identify it as being for a distant-end unit.
Before the M&C data can be successfully transmitted and received, pairs of units must be split into EDMAC Masters and EDMAC Slaves. Masters are local to the M&C
Computer, and Slaves are distant-end.
Now, a unit which has been designated an EDMAC master not only responds to its own unique bus address, but it will also be configured to listen for the address which corresponds to its EDMAC Slave. When a complete message packet has been received by the EDMAC Master, it will begin to transmit this packet over the satellite channel, using the overhead bytes which become available.
Note: The ‘normal’ protocol for the message packet is not used over the satellite path, as it is subject to errors. For this reason, a much more robust protocol is used which incorporates extensive error checking.
At the distant-end, the EDMAC slave, configured for the correct address, receives these bytes, and when a complete packet has been received, it will take the action requested, and then send the appropriate response to the EDMAC Master, using the return overhead path on the satellite link. The EDMAC Master assembles the complete packet, and transmits the response back to the M&C Computer.
Apart from the round-trip satellite delay, the M&C Computer does not see any difference between local and distant-end units - it sends out a packet, addressed to a particular unit, and gets back a response. It can be seen that the EDMAC Master simply acts as forwarding service, in a manner which is completely transparent.
112
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
This approach does not require any additional cabling; connection is made using the normal M&C remote port. Furthermore, the user does not have to worry about configuring the baud rate of the M&C connection to match the lowest data rate modem in the system. The M&C system can have mixed data-rate modems, from 2.4 kbps to 2048 kbps, and still run at speeds in excess of 19,200 baud. It should be pointed out that at 2.4 kbps, the effective throughput of the overhead channel is only 11 async characters/second. For a message of 24 bytes, the time between sending a poll request and receiving a response will be around 5 seconds. (Note that when either of the BPSK
Turbo rates are in use, the overhead rate is reduced by a factor of three, and therefore the response time will be around 15 seconds.)
10.3 Setup Summary
To access a distant-end unit:
Designate a Master/Slave pair: Master at the local-end, Slave at the distant-end.
On the local-end unit, enable framing, and EDMAC, define the unit as MASTER, then enter the bus address. This is constrained to be ‘base 10' meaning that only addresses such as 10, 20, 30, 40, etc, are allowed.
Choose a unique bus address for the distant-end. This should normally be set to the ‘base 10' address + 1. For example, if the MASTER unit is set to 30, choose
31 for the distant-end unit.
On the distant-end unit, enable framing, and EDMAC, define the unit as SLAVE, then enter the bus address. The orange EDMAC Mode LED should be illuminated.
Once the satellite link has been established, connect the M&C Computer, and begin communications, with both the local and distant end units.
NOTE: EDMAC modes are fully compatible with AUPC modes.
113
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
This page is intentionally blank.
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
114
Chapter 11. AUTOMATIC UPLINK
POWER CONTROL
11.1 Introduction
Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) is a feature whereby a local modem is permitted to adjust its own output power level in order to attempt to maintain the Eb/No at the remote modem.
WARNING
The user MUST obtain permission from the Satellite
Operator to use this feature.
Improper use of this feature could result in a transmitting terminal seriously exceeding its allocated flux density on the
Operator’s satellite. This could produce interference to other carriers, and could cause transponder saturation problems.
To accomplish this, the framed (EDMAC, or EDMAC-2) mode of operation must be used. The remote modem constantly sends back information about the demodulator
Eb/No using reserved bytes in the overhead structure. The local modem then compares this value of Eb/No with a pre-defined target value. If the Remote Eb/No is below the target, the local modem will increase its output power, and hence, a closed-loop feedback system is created over the satellite link. A particularly attractive benefit of this feature is that whenever framed operation is selected, the remote demodulator’s Eb/No can be viewed from the front panel display of the local modem. Note also that AUPC can be used simultaneously with EDMAC.
There are several important parameters associated with this mode of operation, and the user needs to understand how the AUPC feature works, and the implications of setting these parameters.
115
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
11.2 Setting AUPC Parameters
1) The user, under the menu ( CONFIG, Frame) first ensures that Framing is selected. EDMAC or EDMAC-2 may be selected, then the Framing mix – either AUPC-Only or AUPC +EDMAC . The important consideration is that
EDMAC framing should be enabled.
2) The user should verify that the remote modem also has EDMAC framing enabled.
3) The user, under the menu ( CONFIG, Tx, Power ) sets the nominal output power of the modem. This is done by selecting the Manual mode, then editing the Tx output power level displayed.
4) The user will then select AUPC as the operating mode. At this point the user will be prompted to define four key parameters:
11.2.1 Target Eb/No
Target Eb/No is value of Eb/No that the user desires to keep constant at the remote modem.
If the Eb/No exceeds this value, the AUPC control will reduce the Tx output power, but will never drop below the nominal value set.
If the Eb/No falls below this value, the AUPC control will increase the Tx output power, but will never exceed the value determined by the parameter Max-Range .
• The minimum value the user can enter is 0.0 dB
• The maximum value the user can enter is 9.9 dB
• The default value is 3.0 dB
• The resolution is 0.1 dB
11.2.2 Max Range
Max-Range defines how much the modem is permitted to increase the output level, under AUPC control.
•
•
•
•
The minimum value the user can enter is 0 dB
The maximum value the user can enter is 9 dB
The default value is 1 dB
The resolution is 1 dB
116
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
11.2.3 Alarm
The Alarm parameter defines how the user wants the modem to act if, under AUPC control, the maximum power limit is reached.
The two choices are:
• None (no action)
• Tx-Alarm (generate a TX alarm)
The default setting is None .
11.2.4 Demod Unlock
This defines the action the modem will take if the remote demodulator loses lock.
The two choices are:
• Nom-Pwr (reduce the Tx Output Power to the nominal value)
• Max-Pwr (increase the Tx Output Power to the maximum value permitted by the parameter Max-Range )
The default setting is Nom-Pwr .
( Note : If the local demod loses lock, the modem will automatically move its output power to the nominal value.)
11.3 Compensation Rate
As with any closed-loop control system, the loop parameters must be chosen to ensure stability at all times. Several features have been incorporated to ensure that the AUPC system does overshoot, or oscillate.
• First, the rate at which corrections to the output power can be made is fixed at once every 4 seconds. This takes into account the round trip delay over the satellite link, the time taken for a power change to be reflected in the remote demodulator’s value of Eb/No, and other processing delays in the modems.
• Second, if the comparison of actual and target Eb/No yields a result that requires a change in output power, the first correction made will be 80% of the calculated step. This avoids the possibility of overshoot. Subsequent corrections are made until the difference is less than 0.5 dB. At this point, the output power is only changed in increments of 0.1 dB, to avoid ‘hunting’ around the correct set point.
117
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
11.4 Monitoring
The remote demodulator’s value of Eb/No can be monitored at all times, either from the front panel ( Monitor, AUPC ) or via the remote control interface. The resolution of the reading is 0.2 dB. For all values greater than or equal to 16 dB, the value 16.0 dB will be displayed. As long as framing is enabled, the value will still be available, regardless of the AUPC mode, or framing mix.
Also displayed is the current value of Tx power increase. If EDMAC framing is enabled, but AUPC is disabled, this will indicate 0.0 dB. This value is also available via the remote control interface.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Comtech EF Data strongly cautions against the use of large values of permitted power level increase under AUPC control. Users should consider using the absolute minimum range necessary to improve rainfade margin.
118
Chapter 12. SUMMARY OF
SPECIFICATIONS
12.1 Modulator
Modulation
Symbol rate range
Data rate range
Operating modes
Transmit filtering
Scrambling
FEC
BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8-PSK, and 16-QAM
8-QAM (planned future upgrade – consult Factory for latest information)
4.8 ksps to 2.5 Msps
See Section 14.4
Transparent, Closed Network, IESS-315 (VSAT Turbo)
Proprietary EDMAC framed mode:
* 5% overhead - EDMAC
(all modes except BPSK Turbo, Rate 21/44 OQPSK Turbo, and data rates < 2.048 Mbps)
* 1.6% overhead - EDMAC-2
(Rate 21/44, 5/16 Turbo, Rate 1/2 OQPSK Turbo, and all other rates >2.048 Mbps)
R-S Outer Codec (optional)
* 220,200 outer code (transparent mode)
* 200,180 outer code (EDMAC modes)
Turbo Product Codec (optional):
* Rate 21/44 BPSK
* Rate 5/16 BPSK
* Rate 21/44 QPSK/OQPSK
* Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/16-QAM
* Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/16-QAM
* Rate 0.95 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK (exact Code Rate is actually 0.944)
LDPC (planned future upgrade – consult Factory for latest information)
Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) mode
Per INTELSAT IESS-308 (FIR digital filter implementation)
Transparent Closed Network mode, no R-S or Turbo coding - per ITU V.35 (Intelsat variant)
EDMAC mode, no R-S coding - externally frame synchronized - proprietary
Turbo Product Code mode - externally frame synchronized - proprietary
All R-S modes - externally frame synchronized per IESS-308/309/310
None : Uncoded BPSK/QPSK/OQPSK
Viterbi: k=7, per IESS-308/309
BPSK: Rate 1/2
119
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
QPSK/OQPSK: Rate 1/2, Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8
16-QAM: Rate 3/4 and Rate 7/8 (requires Reed-Solomon)
Reed-Solomon (Closed Network) :
220,200 outer code (transparent mode)
200,180 outer code (EDMAC modes)
Interleaver depth = 4
8-PSK/TCM Rate 2/3 (Trellis) with concatenated Reed-Solomon
CLOSED NETWORK - NOT IESS-310 COMPATIBLE
Turbo Product Codec (optional plug-in card):
Rate 5/16 BPSK - 2 dimensional
Rate 21/44 BPSK - 3 dimensional
Rate 21/44 QPSK/OQPSK - 3 dimensional
Rate 3/4 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/16-QAM - 2 dimensional
Rate 7/8 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK/16-QAM - 2 dimensional
Rate 0.95 QPSK/OQPSK/8-PSK - 2 dimensional eTPC (exact Code Rate is actually 17/18, or 0.944)
Output frequency 950 - 1950 MHz, 100 Hz resolution
Stability ±0.06 ppm (±6 x 10 -8 ) 0 to 50 o C (32 to 122 o F)
Harmonics and spurious
Better than -55 dBC/4 kHz (typically <-60 dBC/4kHz) – measured from 25 MHz to 2GHz
Transmit on/off ratio 55 dB minimum
Output phase noise < 0.67
0 rms double sided, 100 Hz to 1MHz
(minimum of 10 dB better overall than the INTELSAT IESS-308/309 requirement)
Output power
Power accuracy
Output impedance
Output connector
Clocking options
External TX
Carrier Off
0 to -40 dBm, 0.1 dB steps - manual mode. See Automatic Uplink Power Control section also.
±1.0 dB over frequency, data rate, modulation type and temperature
50 Ω
19 dB minimum return loss
Type N female
Internal, ±0.06 ppm (SCT)
External, locking over a ±100 ppm range (TT)
Loop timing (Rx satellite clock) - supports asymmetric operation - Rx and Tx data rates do not need to be identical
By TTL 'low' signal or external contact closure - hardware function automatically over-rides processor, or by RTS signal on main data interface
120
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
-50
-55
-35
-40
-45
-15
-20
-25
-30
-5
-10
0
0.00
0.10
0.20
0.30
0.40
0.50
0.60
0.70
0.80
0.90
1.00
1.10
1.20
1.30
1.40
Symbol Rate, Rs
1.50
Comtech EF Data
CDM-570L Transmit
Power Spectral Density, referred to symbol rate
Intelsat
IESS 308/309 limit
CDM-570L Modulator typically < -50 dB, and guaranteed to be
< -45 dB at offsets
> 0.75 Rs Spectral density, dB
Intelsat
IESS 308/309 limit
12.2 Demodulator
Data rate range, operating modes, de-scrambling, input impedance/return loss etc., as per
Modulator
Input power range
FEC
Acquisition range
Desired Carrier: -130 + 10 log(Symbol Rate) to -90 + 10 log(Symbol Rate)
+40 dBC maximum composite, up to -10 dBm, absolute max.
Viterbi: 3 bit soft decision
Trellis: Pragmatic TCM/8-PSK with closed network concatenated Reed-Solomon
Reed-Solomon(Closed Network): Proprietary
Turbo Product Codec: 4 bit soft decision, proprietary
±1 to ±32 kHz, programmable in 1kHz increments, for symbol rates below 625 ksymbols/sec
±1 to ±200 kHz, programmable in 1kHz increments, for symbol rates above 625 ksymbols/sec
Acquisition time Highly dependent on data rate, FEC rate, and demodulator acquisition range. Examples: 120 ms average at 64 kbps, R1/2 QPSK, ±10 kHz acquisition sweep range, 6dB Eb/No
3.5 s average at 9.6 kbps, R1/2 QPSK, ±10 kHz, 6dB Eb/No
Note: Reed-Solomon and TPC increases acquisition time, due to the additional time taken for the
RS/TPC decoder to declare synchronization.
Clock tracking range ± 100 ppm min
121
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
VITERBI
BER performance
(met in the presence of two adjacent carriers, each 7 dB higher than the desired carrier)
VITERBI and RS
220,200 or 200,180
Outer Code BER
(with two adjacent carriers, each 7 dB higher than the desired carrier)
For:
BER=10 -5
BER=10 -6
BER=10 -7
For:
BER=10 -5
BER=10 -6
BER=10 -7
Rate 1/2 (B, Q, OQ)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
5.4 dB (4.9 dB)
6.0 dB (5.5 dB)
6.7 dB (6.2 dB)
Rate 1/2 (B, Q, OQ
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
4.3 dB (4.0 dB)
4.4 dB (4.1 dB)
4.5 dB (4.2 dB)
8-PSK/TCM/RS
CODEC
BER
(With two adjacent carriers, each 7 dB higher than the desired carrier)
TURBO PRODUCT
CODEC
Rate 21/44 QPSK
Rate 21/44 BPSK
Rate 5/16 BPSK
BER
(With two adjacent carriers, each 7 dB higher than the desired carrier)
TURBO PRODUCT
CODEC
Rate 3/4 QPSK
Rate 3/4 8-PSK
Rate 3/4 16-QAM
BER
(With two adjacent carriers, each 7 dB higher than the desired carrier)
For:
BER=10 -5
BER=10 -7
BER=10 -8
For:
BER=10 -6
BER=10 -7
BER=10 -8
For:
BER=10 -6
BER=10 -7
BER=10 -8
R 2/3 8-PSK/TCM/RS
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in
parentheses)
6.3 dB (5.4 dB)
6.7 dB (5.8 dB)
6.9 dB (6.0 dB)
Rate 21/44 (Q, OQ)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
2.9 dB (2.6 dB)
3.1 dB (2.7 dB)
3.3 dB (2.8 dB)
Rate 3/4 (Q, OQ)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
3.8dB (3.4dB)
4.1dB (3.7dB)
4.4dB (4.0dB)
Rate 21/44 (B)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in
parentheses)
2.8 dB (2.5dB)
3.1 dB (2.8 dB)
3.3 dB (2.90dB)
Rate 3/4 (8-PSK)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
6.2 dB (5.8 dB)
6.4 dB (6.0 dB)
6.8 dB (6.3 dB)
Rate 3/4 (Q, OQ)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
6.8 dB (6.3 dB)
7.4 dB (6.9 dB)
8.2 dB (7.7 dB)
Rate 3/4 (Q, OQ)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
5.6 dB (4.7 dB)
5.8 dB (4.8 dB)
6.0 dB (5.2 dB)
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Rate 7/8 (Q, OQ)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
7.7 dB (7.2 dB)
8.4 dB (7.9 dB)
9.0 dB (8.6 dB)
Rate 7/8 (Q, OQ)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
6.5 dB (6.0 dB)
6.7 dB
(6.2 dB)
6.9 dB (6.5 dB)
Rate 5/16 (B)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
2.4 dB (2.1dB)
2.6 dB (2.3dB)
2.7 dB (2.4dB)
Rate 3/4 (16-QAM)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
7.4dB (7.0 dB)
7.8 dB (7.3 dB)
8.2 dB (7.7 dB)
122
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
TURBO PRODUCT
CODEC
Rate 7/8 QPSK
Rate 7/8 8-PSK
Rate 7/8 16-QAM
BER
(With two adjacent carriers, each 7 dB higher than the desired carrier)
TURBO PRODUCT
CODEC
Rate 0.95 QPSK
Rate 0.95 8-PSK
BER
(With two adjacent carriers, each 7 dB higher than the desired carrier)
16-QAM
VITERBI/RS
(With two adjacent carriers, each 7 dB higher than the desired carrier)
Plesiochronous/
Doppler Buffer
Monitor Functions
For:
BER=10 -6
BER=10 -7
BER=10 -8
For:
BER=10 -6
BER=10 -7
BER=10 -8
For:
BER=10 -6
BER=10 -8
Rate 7/8 (Q, OQ)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
4.3 dB (4.0 dB)
4.4 dB (4.1 dB)
4.5 dB (4.2 dB)
Rate 0.95 (Q, OQ)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
6.4 dB (6.0 dB)
6.7 dB (6.3 dB)
6.9 dB (6.5 dB)
16-QAM Rate 3/4
Viterbi/RS
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
8.1 dB (7.5 dB)
8.6 dB (8.0 dB)
Rate 7/8 (8-PSK)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
7.0 dB (6.6 dB)
7.1 dB (6.7 dB)
7.2 dB (6.8 dB)
Rate 0.95 (8-PSK)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
9.3 dB (8.9 dB)
9.8 dB (9.4 dB)
10.3 dB (9.9 dB)
16-QAM Rate 7/8
Viterbi/RS
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
9.5 dB (9.0 dB)
10.1 dB (9.5 dB)
Rate 7/8 (16-QAM)
Guaranteed Eb/No:
(typical value in parentheses)
8.1 dB (7.7 dB)
8.2 dB (7.8 dB)
8.3 dB (7.9 dB)
Selectable size of ± 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192, 16384 and 32768 bits
Size selection is displayed in bits and milliseconds
Supports asymmetric operation - when buffer is clocked from Tx clock, Rx and Tx rates do not need to be identical.
Eb/No estimate, 2 to 16 dB ( ± 0.25 dB accuracy)
Corrected Bit Error Rate, 1E-3 to 1E-9
Frequency offset, ± 200 kHz range, 100 Hz resolution
Buffer fill state, in percent
Receive signal level (-20 to –90 dBm, accuracy is ± 2.5 dB)
12.3 Data and miscellaneous Interfaces
Primary Data
(3 selectable modes)
RS-422/EIA-530 DCE (Rates up to 5 Mbps)
(also supports X.21 DCE & DTE)
V.35 DCE (Rates up to 5 Mbps)
Synchronous EIA-232 (Rates up to 300 kbps)
G.703 1.544 Mbps T1 (Balanced 100 Ω )
2.048 Mbps E1 (unbalanced 75 Ω or balanced 120 Ω )
External Reference In 1, 2, 5, 10 or 20 MHz, -6dBm to +10dBm
(The external reference locks Tx and Rx synthesizers, and all baseband clock generation)
25-pin D-sub (female)
15-pin D-sub (female) or BNC (female)
BNC (female)
123
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Modem Alarms
1:1 Control
Remote Control
Ethernet
Relay outputs (Tx, Rx & unit faults)
Demodulator I & Q test outputs (constellation)
Demodulator Rx Signal Level output (0 to 10 volts)
External carrier off input
RS-232 link to other modem, and switching signals in 1:1 pair, via CRS-170
RS-232 or RS-485 modem control and monitoring
10/100 Base Tx for http, SNMP and Telnet interfaces
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
15-pin D-sub (male)
9-pin D-sub (female)
9-pin D-sub (male)
RJ45
12.4 Automatic Uplink Power Control
Operating Mode
Target Eb/No range
Max AUPC range
Monitor functions
Requires Closed Network Framed mode for transport of Eb/No information from remote modem
(EDMAC can be enabled or disabled)
0 to 9.9 dB at remote demod (default is 4.0 dB)
0 to 9 dB (default is 3 dB)
Remote demod Eb/No
Tx power level increase
(front panel or via remote control interface)
12.5 Data Rate Ranges
FEC Type
None
None
Viterbi
Viterbi
Viterbi
Viterbi
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
Viterbi + RS
TCM + RS
Turbo
Turbo
Turbo
TPC/LDPC
TPC/LDPC
Turbo or TPC/LDPC
Turbo
Modulation
BPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
BPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
BPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
16-QAM
16-QAM
8-PSK
BPSK
BPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
QPSK/OQPSK
Code Rate
Uncoded
Uncoded
Rate 1/2
Rate 1/2
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
Rate 1/2
Rate 1/2
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
Rate 2/3
Rate 5/16
Rate 21/44
Rate 21/44
Rate 1/2
Rate 2/3
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
Data Rate Range
4.8 kbps to 2.50 Mbps
9.6 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 1.25 Mbps
4.8 kbps to 2.50 Mbps
7.2 kbps to 3.75 Mbps
8.4 kbps to 4.375 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 1.112 Mbps
4.3 kbps to 2.25 Mbps
6.5 kbps to 3.375 Mbps
7.5 kbps to 3.937 Mbps
13.0 kbps to 4.00 Mbps
16.8 kbps to 4.666 Mbps
8.7 kbps to 4.50 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 0.78 Mbps
2.4 kbps to 1.19 Mbps
4.8 kbps to 2.38 Mbps
4.8 kbps to 2.50 Mbps
6.39 kbps to 3.33 Mbps
7.2 kbps to 3.75 Mbps
8.4 kbps to 4.37 Mbps
EDMAC limited?
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
124
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Turbo
TPC/LDPC
Turbo or TPC/LDPC
Turbo
Turbo
Turbo
Turbo
QPSK/OQPSK
8-PSK/8-QAM
8-PSK/8-QAM
8-PSK/8-QAM
8-PSK/8-QAM
16-QAM
16-QAM
Rate 0.95
Rate 2/3
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
Rate 0.95
Rate 3/4
Rate 7/8
9.1 kbps to 4.72 Mbps
9.6 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
10.8 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
13.6 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
15.3 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
14.4 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
16.8 kbps to 5.00 Mbps
Yes – see note below
Yes – see note below
No
No
No
No
No
Important Note : Where noted in the table above, if EDMAC framing is employed, the upper data rate will be reduced by 5% for data rates up to 2.048 Mbps, and by 1.5% for data rates above 2.048 Mbps, where EDMAC2 framing is used, or for Rate
21/44 BPSK/QPSK Turbo, or Rate 5/16 BPSK Turbo.
12.6 Miscellaneous
Front panel
Loopbacks
Fault relays
M&C Interface
Ethernet
M&C Software
Dimensions
Weight
AC consumption
Operating voltage
Operating temperature
Tactile keypad, 6 keys (Up/Down, Left/Right, Enter/Clear)
Vacuum Fluorescent Display (blue) - 2 lines of 24 characters
Internal IF loopback, RF loopback, digital loopback, and inward/outward loopback
Hardware fault, Rx and Tx Traffic Alarms
EIA-232 and EIA-485 (addressable multidrop, 2-wire or 4-wire)
10/100 Base Tx for http, SNMP and Telnet interfaces
CMCS software for control of local and distant units
1U high, 16 inches (406 mm) deep
7 lbs (3.2 kgs) max (not including BUC Power Supply)
Without BUC Power Supply:
22 Watts (typical) 28 Watts (maximum)
When fitted with 150 Watt BUC power supply:
250 Watts (maximum)
100 - 240 volts AC, +6%/-10% - autosensing
(total absolute max. range is 90 - 254 volts AC)
0 to 50 o C (32 to 122 o F)
12.7 Approvals
“CE” as follows: EN 55022 Class B (Emissions)
EN 50082-1 (Immunity)
EN 60950 (Safety)
FCC FCC Part 15 Class B
EN 61000-3-2
EN 61000-3-3
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
125
EN 61000-4-6
EN 61000-4-8
EN 61000-4-9
EN 61000-4-11
EN 61000-4-13
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
This page is intentionally blank
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
126
Chapter 13. SERIAL REMOTE
CONTROL
13.1 Introduction
This section describes the protocol and message command set for remote monitor and control of the CDM-570L Modem.
The electrical interface is either an EIA-485 multi-drop bus (for the control of many devices) or an EIA-232 connection (for the control of a single device), and data is transmitted in asynchronous serial form, using ASCII characters. Control and status information is transmitted in packets, of variable length, in accordance with the structure and protocol defined in later sections.
13.2 RS-485
For applications where multiple devices are to be monitored and controlled, a full-duplex
(or 4-wire) RS-485 is preferred. Half-duplex (2-wire) RS-485 is possible, but is not preferred.
In full-duplex RS-485 communication there are two separate, isolated, independent, differential-mode twisted pairs, each handling serial data in different directions. It is assumed that there is a ‘controller’ device (a PC or dumb terminal), which transmits data, in a broadcast mode, via one of the pairs. Many ‘target’ devices are connected to this pair, which all simultaneously receive data from the controller. The controller is the only device with a line-driver connected to this pair - the target devices only have linereceivers connected.
In the other direction, on the other pair, each target has a tri-stateable line driver connected, and the controller has a line-receiver connected. All the line drivers are held in high-impedance mode until one (and only one) target transmits back to the controller.
127
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Each target has a unique address, and each time the controller transmits, in a framed
‘packet’ of data, the address of the intended recipient target is included. All of the targets receive the packet, but only one (the intended) will reply. The target enables its output line driver, and transmits its return data packet back to the controller, in the other direction, on the physically separate pair.
RS-485 (full duplex) summary:
• Two differential pairs - one pair for controller to target, one pair for target to controller.
• Controller-to-target pair has one line driver (controller), and all targets have linereceivers.
• Target-to-controller pair has one line receiver (controller), and all targets have tri-state drivers.
13.3 RS-232
This a much simpler configuration in which the controller device is connected directly to the target via a two-wire-plus-ground connection. Controller-to-target data is carried, via
RS-232 electrical levels, on one conductor, and target-to-controller data is carried in the other direction on the other conductor.
13.4 Basic Protocol
Whether in RS-232 or RS-485 mode, all data is transmitted as asynchronous serial characters, suitable for transmission and reception by a UART. In this case, the only supported asynchronous character format is 8N1 (8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit). The baud rate may vary between 2400 and 57600 baud.
All data is transmitted in framed packets. The controller is assumed to be a PC or ASCII dumb terminal, which is in charge of the process of monitor and control. The controller is the only device which is permitted to initiate, at will, the transmission of data. Targets are only permitted to transmit when they have been specifically instructed to do so by the controller.
All bytes within a packet are printable ASCII characters, less than ASCII code 127. In this context, the Carriage Return and Line Feed characters are considered printable.
All messages from controller to target require a response (with one exception). This will be either to return data which has been requested by the controller, or to acknowledge reception of an instruction to change the configuration of the target. The exception to this is when the controller broadcasts a message (such as Set time/date) using Address 0, when the target is set to RS-485 mode.
128
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
13.5 Packet Structure
Start of
Packet
<
ASCII code 60
(1 character)
Start of
Packet
>
ASCII code 62
(1 character)
Controller-to-target:
Target
Address
(4 characters)
Example: <0135/TFQ=1949.2345{CR}
Target-to-controller:
Target
Address
(4 characters)
Address
De-limiter
/
ASCII code 47
(1 character)
Address
De-limiter
/
ASCII code 47
(1 character)
Instruction
Code
(3 characters)
Instruction
Code
(3 characters)
Code Qualifier
= or ?
ASCII code 61 or 63
(1 character)
Code Qualifier
=, ?, !, *, # or ~
ASCII code 61, 63,
33, 42, 35, 126
(1 character)
Example: >0654/RSW=32{CR}{LF}
Each of the components of the packet is now explained.
Optional
Arguments
(n characters)
Optional
Arguments
(From 0 to n characters)
End of Packet
Carriage Return
ASCII code 13
(1 character)
End of Packet
Carriage Return,
Line Feed
ASCII code 13,10
(2 characters)
13.5.1 Start Of Packet
Controller to Target: This is the character ‘<’ (ASCII code 60)
Target to Controller: This is the character ‘>’ (ASCII code 62)
Because this is used to provide a reliable indication of the start of packet, these two characters may not appear anywhere else within the body of the message.
13.5.2 Address
Up to 9999 devices can be uniquely addressed. In RS-232 applications this value is set to
0. In RS-485 applications, the permissible range of values is 1 to 9999. It is programmed into a target unit using the front panel keypad.
129
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
IMPORTANT
The controller sends a packet with the address of a target - the destination of the packet. When the target responds, the address used is the same address, to indicate to the controller the source of the packet. The controller does not have its own address.
13.5.3 Instruction Code
This is a three-character alphabetic sequence which identifies the subject of the message.
Wherever possible, the instruction codes have been chosen to have some significance.
For example, TFQ stands for transmit frequency, RMD is for receive modulation type, etc. This aids in the readability of the message, should it be displayed in its raw ASCII form. Only upper case alphabetic characters may be used (A-Z, ASCII codes 65 - 90).
13.5.4 Instruction Code Qualifier
This is a single character which further qualifies the preceding instruction code.
Code Qualifiers obey the following rules:
1) From Controller to Target, the only permitted values are:
= (ASCII code 61)
?
(ASCII code 63)
They have these meanings:
The = code (controller to target) is used as the assignment operator, and is used to indicate that the parameter defined by the preceding byte should be set to the value of the argument(s) which follow it. For example, in a message from controller to target,
TFQ=0950.0000 would mean ‘set the transmit frequency to 950 MHz’.
The ?
code (controller to target) is used as the query operator, and is used to indicate that the target should return the current value of the parameter defined by the preceding byte.
For example, in a message from controller to target, TFQ? would mean ‘return the current value of the transmit frequency’.
2) From Target to Controller, the only permitted values are:
= (ASCII code 61)
?
(ASCII code 63)
!
(ASCII code 33)
* (ASCII code 42)
# (ASCII code 35)
~ (ASCII Code 126)
+ ( ASCII Code 43)
They have these meanings:
130
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The = code (target to controller) is used in two ways:
First, if the controller has sent a query code to a target (for example TFQ?, meaning
‘what’s the Transmit frequency?’), the target would respond with TFQ=xxxx.xxxx, where xxxx.xxxx represents the frequency in question.
Second, if the controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, then, providing the value sent in the argument is valid, the target will acknowledge the message by replying with TFQ= (with no message arguments).
The ?
code (target to controller) is only used as follows:
If the controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, then, if the value sent in the argument is not valid, the target will acknowledge the message by replying (for example) with TFQ? (with no message arguments). This indicates that there was an error in the message sent by the controller.
The * code (target to controller) is only used as follows:
If the controller sends an instruction to set a parameter to a particular value, and, if the value sent in the argument is valid, BUT the modem will not permit that particular parameter to be changed at that time, then the target will acknowledge the message by replying (for example) with TFQ* (with no message arguments).
The !
code (target to controller) is only used as follows:
If the controller sends an instruction code which the target does not recognize, then the target will acknowledge the message by echoing the invalid instruction, followed by the ! character. Example: XYZ!
The # code (target to controller) is only used as follows:
If the controller sends a correctly formatted command, BUT the modem is not in remote mode, it will not allow reconfiguration, and then it will respond with TFQ#.
The ~ code (target to controller) is only used as follows:
If a message was sent via a local modem to a distant end device or ODU, then the message was transmitted transparently through the local modem. In the event of the distant-end device not responding, the local modem would generate a response, for example, 0001/RET ~ , indicating that it had finished waiting for a response and was now ready for further communications.
The + code (target to controller) is only used as follows:
This is similar to the = code (acknowledgement), indicating that a command has been accepted and processed, but in addition, indicates that some other configuration parameter has also been modified. Example : Suppose the user has selected Viterbi +
Reed-Solomon, QPSK, Rate 1/2. Now, the user changes the modulation type from QPSK to 16-QAM by sending TMD=4.
In this case, Rate 1/2 is no longer a valid code rate, and so it will be automatically changed to the nearest valid code rate (Rate 3/4). The target will therefore respond with TMD+ .
131
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
13.5.5 Message Arguments
Arguments are not required for all messages. Arguments include ASCII codes for the characters 0 to 9 (ASCII 48 to 57), period (ASCII 46) and comma (ASCII 44), plus miscellaneous printable characters.
13.5.6 End Of Packet
Controller to Target: This is the ‘Carriage Return’ character (ASCII code 13).
Target to Controller: This is the two-character sequence ‘Carriage Return’, ‘Line Feed’.
(ASCII code 13, and code 10.)
Both indicate the valid termination of a packet.
132
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Unit
Interface
Type
T1 Line
Build-Out
Unit Framing
Mode
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
ITF=
LBO=
FRM=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
1 byte, value of 0 through 8
1 byte, value of 0 thru 4
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Terrestrial interface type, where:
0=EIA-422/EIA530 DCE
1=V.35 DCE
2=EIA-232 (sync).
3= G.703 T1 AMI (forces Rx and Tx data rates to 1544 kbps)
4= G.703 T1 B8ZS (forces Rx and Tx data rates to 1544 kbps)
5= G.703 E1 Unbal AMI (forces Rx and Tx rates to 2048 kbps)
6= G.703 E1 Unbal HDB3 (forces Rx and Tx rates to 2048 kbps)
7= G.703 E1 Bal AMI (forces Rx and Tx rates to 2048 kbps)
8= G.703 E1 Bal HDB3 (forces Rx and Tx rates to 2048 kbps)
9 = IP Interface
All other codes invalid. Example: ITF=2 (V.35)
Command or Query.
Valid only for T1 interface, where
0 = 0-133 feet
1 = 133-266 feet
2 = 266-399 feet
3 = 399-533 feet
4 = 533-655 feet
Example: LBO=2
(In all other modes other thanT1, this is a don’t care.)
Command or Query.
Unit operating mode, where
0=Unframed
1= EDMAC Framing
2= EDMAC-2 Framing
Example: FRM=1 (which is framed)
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
ITF? ITF=
ITF?
ITF*
ITF#
ITF+
LBO=
LBO?
LBO *
LBO #
FRM=
FRM?
FRM*
FRM#
FRM+
LBO?
FRM?
Response to Query
ITF =x
(see description of arguments)
LBO=x
(see description of arguments)
FRM=x
(see description of arguments)
Priority System = ITF (Highest priority), FRM, TFT, TMD, TCR, and TDR (Lowest Priority), indicated by shading . Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the parameters of lower priority.
133
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Tx Frequency TFQ=
Tx FEC Type
Tx
Modulation
Type
TFT=
TMD=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
9 bytes
1 byte, value of 0 thru 6
1 byte, value of 0 thru 5
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Tx Frequency, 950 to 1950 MHz
Resolution=100 Hz
Example: TFQ=0950.9872
Command or Query.
Tx FEC coding type, where:
0=None (uncoded - no FEC) (Forces TCR=7 1/1) with differential encoding ON
1=Viterbi
2=Viterbi + Reed-Solomon
3=Reserved – do not use
4= Reserved – do not use
5=TCM + Reed-Solomon (Forces TCR=3 2/3)
6=Turbo
7= TPC/LDPC (Future option)
Example: TFT=1 (which is Viterbi coding)
Command or Query.
Tx Modulation type, where:
0=BPSK
1=QPSK
2=OQPSK
3=8PSK
4=16-QAM (Turbo or Viterbi + RS only)
5=8-QAM (Future option)
Depending on FEC type, not all of these selections will be valid.
Example: TMD=2 (which is OQPSK)
Response to
Command
TFQ=
TFQ?
TFQ*
TFQ#
TFT=
TFT?
TFT*
TFT#
TFT+
TMD=
TMD?
TMD*
TMD#
TMD+
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TFQ?
TFT?
TMD?
Response to Query
TFQ=xxxx.xxxx
(see description of arguments)
TFT=x
(see description of arguments)
TMD=x
(see description of arguments)
134
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Parameter
Tx FEC Code
Rate
Type
Tx Data Rate
Tx Spectrum
Invert
Tx Scrambler
Tx Power
Level
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TCR=
TDR=
TSI=
TSC=
TPL=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
1 byte, value of 0 thru 7
8 bytes
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0, 1 or 2
4 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query
Tx Code Rate, where:
0 = Rate 5/16 (Turbo Only)
1 = Rate 21/44 (Turbo Only)
2 = Rate 1/2
3 = Rate 2/3 (8-PSK TCM or 8-QAM only)
4 = Rate 3/4
5 = Rate 7/8
6 = Rate 0.95 (Turbo Only)
7 = Rate 1/1 (Uncoded or No FEC)
Depending on FEC and Modulation type, not all of these selections will be valid.
Example: TCR=4 (which is Rate 3/4)
Command or Query.
Tx Data rate, in kbps, between 2.4 kbps and 5.0 Mbps
Resolution=1 bps.
Example: TDR=2047.999 (which is 2047.999 kbps)
Command or Query.
Tx Spectrum Invert selection, where:
0=Normal,
1=Tx Spectrum Inverted
Example: TSI=0 (which is normal)
Command or Query.
Tx Scrambler state, where:
0=Off
1=On (default scrambler type)
2 = On - IESS-315 (Turbo only)
Example: TSC=1 (Scrambler On)
Command or Query.
Tx Output power level between 0 and -40 dBm (minus sign assumed).
Note: Beyond –40 dBm is beyond the specification.
Example: TPL=13.4
(Command not valid in AUPC mode)
135
TDR=
TDR?
TDR*
TDR#
TSI=
TSI?
TSI*
TSI#
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TCR? TCR=
TCR?
TCR*
TCR#
TCR+
Response to Query
TCR=x
(see description of arguments)
TSC=
TSC?
TSC*
TSC#
TPL=
TPL?
TPL*
TPL#
TDR?
TSI?
TSC?
TPL?
TDR=xxxx.xxx
(see description of arguments)
TSI=x
(see description of arguments)
TSC=x
(see description of arguments)
TPL=xx.x
(see description of arguments)
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
AUPC Enable AUP=
AUPC
Parameters
Remote Eb/No
Tx Power
Level Increase
APP=
N/A
N/A
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
6 bytes
4 bytes
3 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
AUPC mode enable/disable, where:
0=Disabled
1=Enabled
Example: AUP=1
Note: EDMAC framing must be selected for the AUPC feature to work.
Command or Query.
Defines AUPC operating parameters. Has the form abc.cd, where: a=Defines action on max. power condition.
(0=do nothing, 1=generate Tx alarm) b=Defines action on remote demod unlock.
(0=go to nominal power, 1=go to max power) c=target Eb/No value, for remote demod, from 0.0 to 9.9 dB d =Max increase in Tx Power permitted, from 0 to 9 dB
Example: APP=015.67 (Sets no alarm, max power, 5.6 dB target and 7 dB power increase.)
(Command not valid in Manual mode)
Query only.
Returns the value of Eb/No of the remote demod.
Responds 99.9 = remote demod unlocked.
Responds xx.x if EDMAC is disabled. xx.x=02.0 to 16.0
Example: REB=12.4
Note: For values > 16.0 dB, the reply will be 16.0
Query only.
Returns the increase in Tx power level, in dB (from the nominal setting) due to the action of AUPC. Range is 0.0 to 9.9 dB
Responds x.x if AUPC is disabled.
Example: PLI=2.3
Response to
Command
AUP=
AUP?
AUP*
AUP#
APP=
APP?
APP*
APP#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
AUP?
Response to Query
AUP=x
(see description of arguments)
APP? APP=abc.cd
(see description of arguments)
N/A REB? REB=xx.x
(see description of arguments)
N/A PLI? PLI=x.x
(see description of arguments)
136
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Tx Carrier
State
Type
Tx Clock
Source
Tx Data Invert
Warm-up
Delay
Countdown
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TCK=
TDI=
TXO=
WUD=
CTD=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
1 byte, value 0 thru 2
1 byte, value 0 or 1
1 byte, value 0 thru 4
1 byte, value 0 or 1
3 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Tx Clock Source, where:
0=Internal
1=Tx Terrestrial
2= Loop-Timed
Example: TCK=0 (selects Internal)
Command or Query.
Invert Transmit Data
0=Normal
1=Inverted
Example: TDI=1 (selects Inverted TX Data)
Command or Query.
Tx Carrier State, where:
0=OFF due to front panel or remote control command
1=ON
2=RTI (receive/transmit inhibit)
3=OFF due to ext H/W Tx Carrier Off command (not a valid argument when used as a command)
4=Off due to BUC warm up delay (not a valid argument in a command format.)
Example: TXO=1 (Tx Carrier ON)
Command or Query.
Warm-up Delay for internal frequency reference (OCXO)
0=Disabled (instant on – no delay for OCXO to reach temperature)
1=Enabled (unit waits until OCXO reaches correct temperature)
Example: WUD=1 (selects Warm-up Delay)
Command or Query.
As a query , returns the Warm-up Delay countdown, in seconds remaining. Range is from 000 to 200 seconds.
As a command , only takes the argument 000. Used to truncate the
Warm-up delay period to zero, forcing the unit into ‘instant-on’ mode.
Example: CTD? – responds with CTD=067 – means the unit will wait another 67 seconds before it will enter an operational state.
CTD=000 terminates the warm-up delay.
Response to
Command
TCK=
TCK?
TCK*
TCK#
TDI=
TDI?
TDI*
TDI#
TXO=
TXO?
TXO*
TXO#
WUD=
WUD?
WUD*
WUD#
CTD=
CTD?
CTD*
CTD#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
TCK?
Response to Query
TCK=x
(see description of arguments)
TDI? TDI=x
(see description of arguments)
TXO? TXO=x
(see description of arguments)
WUD? WUD=x
(see description of arguments)
CTD? CTD=xxx
(see description of arguments)
137
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Rx Frequency RFQ=
Rx FEC Type
Rx Demod type
RFT=
RMD=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
9 bytes
1 byte, value of 0 thru 6
1 byte, value of 0 thru 5
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Rx Frequency, 950 to 1950 MHz
Resolution=100 Hz
Example: RFQ=0950.9872
Command or Query.
Rx FEC Type, where:
0=None (uncoded – no FEC) with differential encoding ON
1=Viterbi
2=Viterbi + Reed-Solomon
3= Reserved – do not use
4= Reserved – do not use
5=TCM + Reed-Solomon
6=Turbo
7= TPC/LDPC (Future option)
Example: RFT=1 (which is Viterbi only)
Command or Query.
Rx Demodulation, where:
0=BPSK
1=QPSK
2=OQPSK
3=8PSK
4=16QAM (Turbo or Viterbi + RS only)
5=8-QAM (Future option)
Depending on FEC type, not all of these selections will be valid.
All other codes are invalid.
Example: RMD=2 (selects OQPSK)
Response to
Command
RFQ=
RFQ?
RFQ*
RFQ#
RFT=
RFT?
RFT*
RFT#
RFT+
RMD=
RMD?
RMD*
RMD#
RMD+
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
RFQ? RFQ=xxxx.xxxx
(see description of arguments)
RFT?
RMD?
RFT=x
(same format as command argument)
RMD=x
(see description of arguments)
138
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
Rx FEC Code
Rate
Rx Data Rate RDR=
Rx Spectrum
Invert
Rx
Descrambler
RCR=
RSI=
RDS=
1 byte, value of 0 thru 7
8 bytes
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0, 1 or 2
Command or Query.
Rx FEC Code Rate, where:
0 = Rate 5/16 (Turbo Only)
1 = Rate 21/44 (Turbo Only)
2 = Rate 1/2
3 = Rate 2/3 (8-PSK TCM or 8-QAM only)
4 = Rate 3/4
5 = Rate 7/8
6 = Rate 0.95 (Turbo Only)
7 = Rate 1/1 (Uncoded or No FEC)
Depending on FEC and demodulation type, not all of these selections will be valid.
Example: RCR=1 (selects Rate 3/4)
Command or Query.
Rx Data Rate, in kbps, between 2.4 kbps to 5 Mbps.
Resolution=1 bps
Example: RDR=2047.999
Command or Query.
Rx Spectrum Invert, where:
0=Normal
1=Rx Spectrum Invert
Example: RSI=0 (selects Normal)
Command or Query.
Rx Descrambler state, where:
0=Off
1=On (default descrambler type)
2 = On - IESS-315 (Turbo only)
Example: RDS=1 (Scrambler On)
RCR=
RCR?
RCR*
RCR#
RCR+
RDR=
RDR?
RDR*
RDR#
RSI=
RSI?
RSI*
RSI#
RDS=
RDS?
RDS*
RDS#
RCR?
RDR?
RSI?
RDS?
RCR=x
(see description of arguments)
RDR=xxxx.xxx
(see description of arguments)
RSI=x
(see description of arguments)
RDS=x
(see description of arguments)
Priority System = ITF (Highest priority) , FRM, RFT, RMD, RCR, and RDR (Lowest Priority), indicated by shading. Any change to a higher priority parameter can override any of the parameters of lower priority.
139
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Rx Data Invert RDI=
Rx Demod
Acquisition
Sweep Width
Eb/No Alarm
Point
External
Reference
Frequency
RSW=
EBA=
Rx Buffer Size RBS=
ERF=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
1 byte, value 0 or 1
3 bytes
4 bytes
1 byte, value of 0, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5 or 6
1 byte, value of 0 thru 5
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Invert Receive Data, where:
0=Normal
1=Inverted
Example: RDI = 1 (selects Inverted Rx Data)
Command or Query.
Rx ± acquisition sweep range of demodulator, in kHz, ranging from ± 1 to ± 32 kHz (rates < 625 ksym/second) or from ± 1 to ± 200 kHz (rates >= 625 ksym/second)
Example: RSW=009 (selects ± 9 kHz)
Command or Query.
Eb/No alarm point in dB, with a range between 0.1 and 16 dB.
Resolution=0.1 dB
Example: EBA=12.3
Command or Query.
Rx buffer size, where:
0 = Buffer disabled (Clock mode = Rx satellite)
1 = +/- 1024 bits
2 = +/- 2048 bits
3 = +/- 4096 bits
4 = +/- 8192 bits
5 = +/- 16384 bits
6 = +/- 32768 bits
Example: RBS=0
Command or Query.
External Reference Frequency, where:
0=Internal
1=External 1 MHz
2=External 2 MHz
3=External 5 MHz
4=External 10 MHz
5=External 20 MHz
Example: ERF=0 (External reference not used - uses internal)
EBA=
EBA?
EBA*
EBA#
RBS=
RBS?
RBS*
RBS#
ERF=
ERF?
ERF *
ERF #
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
RDI? RDI=
RDI?
RDI*
RDI#
Response to Query
RDI=x
(see description of arguments)
RSW=
RSW?
RSW*
RSW#
RSW? RSW=xxx
(see description of arguments)
EBA? EBA=xx.x
(see description of arguments)
RBS? RBS=x
(same format as command argument)
=x
(see description of arguments)
140
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
EDMAC
Unit Test
Mode
Framing Mode
EDMAC Slave
Address Range
IP Address
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
EFM=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
1 byte, value of 0, 1 or 2
ESA=
IPA=
TST=
4 bytes
18 bytes, numerical
1 byte, value of 0 thru 6
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
EDMAC mode, where:
0 = EDMAC OFF (Framing is on, AUPC active)
1 = EDMAC MASTER
2 = EDMAC SLAVE (Query Only)
Example: EFM=1 (EDMAC Enabled as Master)
Command or Query.
EDMAC Slave Address Range - sets the range of addresses of distant-end units (modems or transceivers) for which this unit, as the Master, will forward messages. Only values which are integer multiples of ten are permitted. (0010, 0020, 0030, 0040, etc.).
Example: ESA=0090
This command is only valid for an EDMAC master.
When used as a Query, it may be sent to an EDMAC slave, which will respond with the appropriate address.
Command or Query.
Used to set the IP address and network prefix for the
10/100 BaseT Ethernet management port, in the format: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.yy, where: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address, and yy is the network prefix (0-31)
Example: 010.006.030.001.24
Command or Query.
CDM-570L Test Mode, where:
0= Normal Mode (no test)
1=IF Loopback
2=Digital Loopback
3=I/O Loopback
4=RF Loopback
5=Tx CW
6=Tx Alternating 1,0 Pattern
Example: TST=1 (IF Loopback)
Response to
Command
EFM=
EFM?
EFM*
EFM#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
EFM? EFM=x
(see description of arguments)
ESA=
ESA?
ESA*
ESA#
IPA=
IPA?
IPA*
IPA#
TST=
TST?
TST*
TST#
ESA? ESA=xxxx
(see description of arguments)
(see description of arguments)
TST? TST=x
(see description of arguments)
141
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Unit Alarm
Mask
Request to
Send
Force 1:1
Switch
Circuit ID
String
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
Description of Arguments
MSK=
RTS=
12 bytes
1 byte, value of 0 thru 3
Command or Query.
Alarm mask conditions, in form abcdefghijkl , where: a=Tx FIFO (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked) b=G.703 BPV (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked) c=Tx-AIS (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked) d=Rx AGC Alarm (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked) e=Eb/No Alarm (0 = unmasked, 1 = masked) f=Rx-AIS g=Buffer slip h=Ext Reference alarm i=BUC alarm j=LNB alarm k=spare, l= spare
Command or Query.
Defines how RTS/CTS will operate at the main data interface p, No Action looped, so that CTS echoes the state of RTS, but RTS does not control the ON/OFF state of the carrier ontrols Tx O/P looped, so that CTS echoes the state of RTS, and RTS controls the
ON/OFF state of the carrier (in other words, the modem will not bring up its TX carrier until RTS is asserted.)
Assert CTS use. RTS/CTS ignored (Query only) RTS is ignored, and CTS is asserted unconditionally.
Example: RTS=0 (RTS/CTS Loop, No Action).
FSW= None Command
Forces the unit to toggle the Unit Fail relay to the ‘fail’ state for approx 500ms. If the unit is a 1:1 pair, and it is currently the ‘On
Line’ unit, this will force a switchover, so the unit will then be in
‘Standby’ mode. The command is always executed by the unit, regardless of whether it is stand-alone, in a 1:1 pair, or part of a
1:N system. This command takes no arguments.
CID= 24 bytes Command or Query.
Sets or queries the user-defined Circuit ID string, which is a fixed length of 24 characters.
Valid characters include:
Space ( ) * + – , . / 0 9 and A thru Z
Response to
Command
MSK=
MSK?
MSK*
MSK#
RTS=
RTS?
RTS*
RTS#
FSW=
(message ok)
CID=
CID?
CID*
CID#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
MSK? MSK=abcdefghijkl
(see description of arguments)
RTS? RTS=x
(see description of arguments)
N/A N/A
CID? CID=xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxx
(see description of arguments)
142
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Global
Configuration
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
MGC=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
115 bytes, with numerical entries, fixed values and delimiters
Description of Arguments
Command or Query. Global Configuration of CDM570L, in the form: abcdddd.ddddefghhhh.hhhijkk.klmnoppp.ppqrrrrrrr
AAAA.AAAABCDEEEE.EEEFGHIIIJJ.JKLLLLLLLLMNOOO
OPQQQQQQQQQQQQRSTTTTTTTT where: a = Unit Interface Type same as ITF b = T1 Line build-out same as LBO c = Unit Framing mode same as FRM dddd.dddd = Tx Frequency same as TFQ e = Tx FEC Type same as TFT f = Tx Modulation type same as TMD g = Tx FEC Rate same as TCR hhhh.hhh = Tx Data Rate same as TDR i = Tx Spectrum Inversion same as TSI j = Tx Scrambler state same as TSC kk.k = Tx Power Level same as TPL l = Tx Clock Source ame as TCK m = Tx Data Invert same as TDI n = Tx Carrier State same as TXO o = AUPC Enable same as AUP ppp.pp = AUPC parameter setup same as APP q = Warm-up delay same as WUD
rrrrrrr = expansion bytes
AAAA.AAAA = Rx Frequency same as RFQ
B = Rx FEC Type same as RFT
C = Rx Modulation Type same as RMD
D= Rx FEC Rate same as RCR
EEEE.EEE = Rx Data Rate same as RDR
F = Rx Spectrum Inversion same as RSI
G = Rx Descrambler state same as RDS
H = Rx Data Invert same as RDI
III = Rx Sweep Width same as RSW
JJ.J = Eb/No Alarm Point same as EBA
K = Rx Buffer Size same as RBS
LLLLLLLL = expansion bytes
M = External Reference Frequency same as ERF
N = EDMAC Framing Mode same as EFM
OOOO = EDMAC Slave Address same as ESA
P = Unit test Mode (Read only) same as TST
QQQQQQQQQQQQ = Unit Alarm Mask same as MSK
R=RTS/CTS Control same as RTS
S = Statistics Sampling Interval same as SSI
TTTTTTTT = expansion bytes
Fill unused expansion bytes with ‘x’
Response to
Command
MGC=
MGC?
MGC*
MGC#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
MGC?
MGC?n
Response to Query
MGC=abcdddd.ddddefg hhhh.hhhijkk.klmnoppp.
ppqqqqqqqqAAAA.AA
AABCDEEEE.EEEFG
HIIIJJ.JKLLLLLLLLM
NOOOOPQQQQQQQQ
QQQQRSTTTTTTTT
(see description of arguments)
Where n=0 to 9
Returns the MGC portion of 1 of 10 stored configurations
(see description of arguments)
143
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Configuration
Save
Configuration
Load
ReCenter
Buffer
RTC Date
RTC Time
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
Description of Arguments
CST=
CLD=
1 byte
1 byte
Command only.
Causes the CDM570L to store the current modem configuration in
Configuration Memory location defined by the one-byte argument
(0 to 9).
Example: CST=4 (store the current configuration in location 4)
Command only.
Causes the CDM570L to retrieve a previously stored modem configuration from Configuration Memory location defined by the one-byte argument (0 to 9).
Example: CLD=4 (retrieve modem configuration from location 4)
RCB= None Command
Forces the software to recenter the receive Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer.
Note: This command takes no arguments.
Example: RCB=
DAY= 6 bytes Command or Query.
A date in the form ddmmyy, where dd = day of the month (01 to 31), mm = month (01 to 12) yy = year (00 to 99)
Example: DAY=240457 (April 24, 2057)
TIM= 6 bytes Command or Query.
A time in the form hhmmss, indicating the time from midnight, where: hh = hours (00 to 23) mm = minutes (00 to 59) ss = seconds (00 to 59)
Example: TIM=231259 (23 hours:12 minutes:59 seconds)
Response to
Command
CST=
CST?
CST*
CST#
CLD=
CLD?
CLD*
CLD#
RCB=
RCB?
RCB*
RCB#
DAY=
DAY?
DAY*
DAY#
TIM=
TIM?
TIM*
TIM#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
DAY? DAY=ddmmyy
(see description of arguments)
TIM? TIM=hhmmss
(see description of arguments)
144
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Number of
Unread stored
Events
Retrieve next 5 unread Stored
Events
Clear All
Stored Events
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
Description of Arguments
N/A 3 bytes Query only.
Unit returns the Number of stored Events, which remain Unread, in the form xxx.
Note: This means unread over the remote control.
Example: NUE=126
N/A 75 bytes Query only.
Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Events which have not yet been read over the remote control. Reply format: {CR}Subbody{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body, where Sub-body= ABCddmmyyhhmmss,
A being the fault/clear indicator.
F=Fault
C=Clear
I=Info
B being the fault type where:
1=Unit
2=Rx Traffic
3=Tx Traffic
4=ODU
5= Power on/off, or log cleared
C is Fault Code numbers, as in FLT?
or Info Code, which is:
0=Power Off
1=Power On
2=Log Cleared
3=Global Config Change
4=Redundancy Config Change
If there are less than 5 events to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros.
If there are no new events, the response is RNE*.
CAE= None Command
Forces the software to clear the software events log.
Example: CAE=
Note: This command takes no arguments.
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A NUE? NUE=xxx
(see description of arguments)
N/A RNE? RNE={CR}ABCddmmy yhhmmss{CR}ABCddm myyhhmmss{CR}ABCd dmmyyhhmmss{CR}AB
Cddmmyyhhmmss
{CR}ABCddmmyyhhm mss
(see description for details of arguments)
CAE=
CAE?
CAE*
CAE#
N/A N/A
145
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Initialize
Statistics
Sample
Interval
Number of
Unread stored
Statistics
Clear All
Stored
Statistics
Events Pointer
Retrieve next 5 unread Stored
Statistics
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
SSI=
N/A
N/A
CAS=
1 byte, numerical
3 bytes
130 bytes
None
Description of Arguments
Response to
Command
IEP=
IEP#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A N/A
Resets internal pointer to allow RNE? queries to start at the beginning of the stored events log.
Command or Query.
Used to set the sample interval for the Statistics Logging Function
SSI=x, where x= 0 to 9 in 10 minute steps.
Note: Setting this parameter to 0 disables the statistics logging function.
Example: SSI=3 means 30 minutes
Query only.
Unit returns the number of stored Statistics, which remain Unread, in the form xxx.
Note: This means unread over the remote control.
Example: NUS=247
Query only.
Unit returns the oldest 5 Stored Statistics, which have not yet been read over the remote control. Reply format:
{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Sub-body{CR}Subbody{CR}Sub-body, where Sub-body=
AA.ABB.BC.CD.Dddmmyyhhmmss,
AA.A=Minimum Eb/No during sample period.
BB.B=Average Eb/No during sample period.
C.C=Max. Tx Power Level Increase during sample period.
D.D=Average Tx Power Level Increase during sample period. ddmmyyhhmmss = date/time stamp.
If there are no new events, the unit replies with RNS*. If there are less than 5 statistics to be retrieved, the remaining positions are padded with zeros.
Command only.
Forces the software to clear the software statistics log.
Example: CAS=
Note: This command takes no arguments.
SSI=
SSI?
SSI*
SSI#
SSI? SSI=x
(see description for details of argument)
N/A NUS? NUS=xxx
(see description of arguments)
N/A RNS? RNS={CR}AA.ABB.B
C.CD.Dddmmyyhhmms
CAS=
CAS?
CAS*
CAS# s{CR}AA.ABB.BC.CD.
Dddmmyyhhmmss{
CR}AA.ABB.BC.CD.D
ddmmyyhhmmss{CR}A
A.ABB.BC.CD.Dddmm
yyhhmmss{CR}AA.AB
B.BC.CD.Dddmmyyhh
mmss
(see description for details of arguments)
N/A N/A
146
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Initialize
Statistics
Pointer
Rx Eb/No
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
4 bytes
Rx Signal
Level
Rx Frequency
Offset
Buffer Fill
State
N/A
N/A
N/A
4 bytes
6 bytes
2 bytes
Description of Arguments
Resets internal pointer to allow RNS? queries to start at the beginning of the statistics log.
Query only.
Unit returns the value of Eb/No, between 0 and 16 dB,
Resolution 0.1 dB.
Returns 99.9 if demod is unlocked.
Example EBN=12.3 (which is Eb/No = 12.3 dB)
For values greater than 16.0 dB, the reply will be: EBN=+016
Query Only.
Unit returns the value of the Rx signal level, in dBm, between –5 and –99 dBm, in the form: ccxx, where: cc = code:
GT=Greater Than
LT=Less Than
== is equal to xx = value (the ‘-‘ sign is implied)
Examples:
RSL=LT99 (Rx signal level is less than -99 dBm)
RSL===41 (Rx signal level is equal to -41 dBm)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the measured frequency offset of the carrier being demodulated, in the form sxxx.x, where: s = sign (+ or - character) xxx.x = value (range from ± 0 to ± 200 kHz, 100 Hz resolution)
Returns +999.9 if the demodulator is unlocked.
Example: RFO=+002.3 (which is + 2.3 kHz)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the buffer fill state, between 1 to 99%.
Returns 00 if demodulator is unlocked.
Example: BFS=33 (which is 33%)
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A N/A ISP=
ISP#
N/A EBN? EBN=xxxx
(see description of arguments)
N/A RSL? RSL=ccxx
(see description of arguments)
N/A RFO? RFO=sxxx.x
(see description of arguments)
N/A BFS? BFS=xx
(see description of arguments)
147
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Rx BER
Software
Revision
Redundancy
State
Local/Remote
Status
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
5 bytes
N/A
LRS=
N/A
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
34-37 bytes
Description of Arguments
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the estimated corrected BER in the form a.b x 10 -c . First three bytes are the value. Last two bytes are the exponent. Returns 99999 if the demodulator is unlocked.
Example: BER=4.8E3 (which is BER = 4.8 x 10 -3 )
Query only.
Unit returns the redundancy state of the unit, where
0=Offline
1=Online
Example: RED=1 (which is Online)
Command or Query.
Local/Remote status, where:
0=Local
1=Remote
Example: LRS=1 (which is Remote)
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the internal software revision installed in the unit, in the form :
Boot:x.y.z Bulk1:x.y.z Bulk2:x.y.z
Or
Boot:x.y.zz Bulk1:x.y.zz Bulk2:x.y.zz
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A BER? BER=a.bEc
(see description of arguments)
N/A RED? RED=x
(see description of arguments)
LRS=
LRS?
LRS*
LRS#
LRS? LRS=x
(see description of arguments)
N/A SWR? SWR=Boot:x.y.zz
Bulk1:x.y.zz
Bulk2:x.y.zz
(see description of arguments)
148
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Software
Information
Software
Image
Serial Number
Temperature
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
IMG=
N/A
N/A
1 byte, value of 1 or 2
9 bytes
3 bytes
Description of Arguments
Complete unit software information:
Example: FRW=
Boot:
FW/10804-1-,1.1.1,03/30/04
Bulk1:
FW/10805C,1.1.4,6/16/04
FW/10806-1C,1.1.4,6/16/04
FW/10807-1B,1.1.3,05/03/04
FW/10808-1-,1.1.1,03/30/04
FW/10809-1-,1.1.1,03/30/04
Bulk2:
FW/10805B,1.1.3,5/28/04
FW/10806-1B,1.1.3,5/28/04
FW/10807-1B,1.1.3,05/03/04
FW/10808-1-,1.1.1,03/30/04
FW/10809-1-,1.1.1,03/30/04
Command or Query.
Current Active software image, where:
1=Bulk Image # 1 currently active
2=Bulk Image # 2 currently active
Example: IMG=1 (which is Image #1 active)
Query only.
Used to query the unit 9-digit serial number. Unit returns its S/N in the form xxxxxxxxx.
Example: SNO=176500143
Query only.
Unit returns the value of the internal temperature, in the form of sxx (degrees C). s = sign (+ or - character) xx = value
Example: TMP=+26
Response to
Command
IMG=
IMG?
IMG*
IMG#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A FRW? FRW=x….x
(see description of arguments)
IMG? IMG=x
(see description of arguments)
N/A SNO? SNO=xxxxxxxxx
(see description of arguments)
N/A TMP? TMP=sxx
(see description of arguments)
149
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Equipment ID N/A
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
11 bytes
Description of Arguments
Query only.
Unit returns information concerning the equipment identification, and the option field, in the form abbbcdefghi; where: a = Turbo option: 0 = None, 1 = Turbo, 2 = TPC/LDPC bbb = defines the modem model number (571 in this case) c = RS Codec Option: 0 = None, 1 = Installed d = Data Rate Option: 0 = Base (512 kbps), 1 = up to 2048 kbps,
2 = up to 5000 kbps e = Higher-order modulation: 0= None, 1 = 8-PSK/8-QAM,
2 = 16QAM, 3 = 8-PSK/8-QAM and 16QAM f = IP Module: 0 = None, 1 = Installed g = BUC option: 0 = None, 1 = 100 Watt, 2 = 150 Watt h = Spare – for future use i = Spare – for future use
Example: EID=157101311xx means Turbo, CDM-570L, No RS codec, up to 2048bps, 8-PSK/8-QAM and 16-QAM, IP Module installed, 100 Watt BUC supply installed
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
(see description of arguments)
571 is the CDM-570L
150
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Faults and
Status
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
6 bytes
Description of Arguments
Query only.
Unit returns the current highest-priority fault and status codes for the Unit
(hardware), Tx Traffic, Rx Traffic and ODU in the form abcdef , where: a = Unit faults:
0 = No faults
1 = Power supply fault, +5 volts
2 = Power supply fault , +12 volts
3 = Power supply fault, –5 volts
4 = Power supply fault, +23 volts
5 = Power supply fault, –12 volts
6 = Tx synthesizer lock
7 = Rx 1st LO synthesizer lock
8 = Rx 2 nd LO synthesizer Lock
9 = Ref PLL lock
E = IP Module
F = EEPROM checksum error
A, B, C, and D are TBD (for future expansion) b = Tx Traffic status:
0 = Tx traffic OK
1 = No clock from terrestrial interface
3 = Tx FIFO slip
5 = Loss of External Reference
7 = AUPC upper limit reached
9 = AIS detected on incoming data
B = Bipolar violation on G.703 interface
2, 4, 6, 8 and A are TBD (for future expansion) c = Rx Traffic status:
0 = Rx Traffic OK
1 = Demodulator unlocked
3 = AGC Alarm - signal out of range
5 = RS Frame sync alarm
7 = EDMAC Frame sync alarm
A = Buffer Underflow
B = Buffer Overflow
D = Eb/No alarm
F = AIS detected on incoming data
2, 4, 6, 8, 9, C and E are TBD (for future expansion) d = ODU status:
0=No ODU faults
1=BUC PLL
3=BUC current
5=BUC voltage
7=LNB current
9=LNB voltage
B=BUC temperature
D=BUC checksum
2, 4, 6, 8, A, and C are TBD (for future expansion)
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query description for details of arguments) e=Change in fault status since last poll. f=Change in unit configuration since last poll
(see description of arguments)
151
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
LNB Power
Control
LNB
Frequency
Reference enable
LNB Low current limit
LNB High current limit
LNB LO
Frequency
LNB Current
LNB Voltage
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
LPC=
LFR=
LCL=
LCH=
LLO=
N/A
N/A
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
1 byte, value of 0,1,2 or 3
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
3 bytes
3 bytes
6 bytes
3 bytes
4 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
LNB Power Control, where
0=Off
1=On, 13V LNB Voltage
2=On, 18V LNB Voltage
3=On, 24V LNB Voltage
Example: LPC=1 (LNB power is On, 13 volts)
Command or Query.
0=Disable LNB Reference
1=Enable LNB Reference
Example: LFR=0 (LNB 10 MHz reference off)
Command or Query.
LNB lower alarm limit for current, in the form xxx, where xxx is the current value between 10 and 400 mA.
Example: LCL=050
Command or Query.
LNB upper alarm limit for current, in the form xxx, where xxx is is the current value between 50 and 600 mA.
Example: LCH=450
Command or Query.
LNB Receive LO frequency information in the form: xxxxxs, where: xxxxx is the LO frequency, in the range of 3000 to 65000 MHz
All 0’s (000000) disables the feature. s is the sign for the mix (+ or - character)
Terminal Frequency = LNB LO ± RFQ
Example: LLO=06000- (LO is 6 GHz, high-side mix)
Query only.
Indicates the value of the LNB Current, in the form: xxx, where xxx is between 0 and 999, units mA.
If not available, response is 000.
Example: LDC=210 (LNB DC current is 210 mA)
Query only.
Indicates the value of the LNB Voltage, in the form: xx.x, where xx.x is between 0 and 30.0
If not available, response is 00.0.
Example: LDV=24.2 (LNB DC voltage is 24.2 volts)
LFR=
LFR?
LFR*
LFR#
LCL=
LCL?
LCL*
LCL#
LCH=
LCH?
LCH*
LCH#
LLO=
LLO?
LLO*
LLO#
Response to
Command
LPC=
LPC?
LPC*
LPC#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
LPC? LPC=x
(see description of arguments)
LFR? LFR=x
(see description of arguments)
LCL? LCL=xxx
(see description of arguments)
LCH? LCH=xxx
(see description of arguments)
LLO? LLO=xxxxxs
(see description of arguments)
N/A LDC? LDC=xxx
(see description of arguments)
N/A LDV? LDV=xx.x
(see description of arguments)
152
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
BUC Address BAD=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
2 byte, value of 01 to 15
BUC Comms enable
BUC Power
Control
BUC 10 MHz
Reference
BUC Output
Enable
BUC High
Current Limit
BUC Low
Current Limit
BCE=
BPC=
BFR=
BOE=
BCH=
BCL=
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
4 bytes
4 bytes
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
Indicates the BUC Address, in the form: xx, where xx is between
01 and 15.
Example: BAD=03
Command or Query.
Enables or disables communications, via the FSK link, with an externally connected Block Up Converter (BUC), where:
0=Disabled
1=Enabled
Example: BCE=0 (Disabled)
Command or Query.
0=Disable BUC DC Power
1=Enable BUC DC Power
Example: BPC=0 (BUC DC power disabled)
Command or Query.
Enables or disables the 10 MHz frequency reference to the BUC
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Example: BFR=0 (BUC 10MHz reference disabled)
Command or Query.
Indicates BUC Output enable,
0 = Off (output disabled)
1 = On (output enabled)
Example: BOE=1 (BUC output is enabled)
Command or Query.
BUC High Current Limit, a value between 500 and 4000 mA
Example: BCH=3100
Command or Query.
BUC Low Current Limit, a value between 0 and 3000 mA
Example: BCL=0600
Response to
Command
BAD =
BAD?
BAD *
BAD #
BCE=
BCE?
BCE*
BCE#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
BAD? BAD=xx
(see description of arguments)
BCE? BCE=x
(see description of arguments)
BPC=
BPC?
BPC*
BPC#
BFR=
BFR?
BFR*
BFR#
BOE=
BOE?
BOE*
BOE#
BCH=
BCH?
BCH*
BCH#
BCL=
BCL?
BCL*
BCL#
BPC? BPC=x
(see description of arguments)
BFR? BFR=x
(see description of arguments)
BOE? BOE=x
(see description of arguments)
BCH? BCH=xxxx
(see description of arguments)
BCL? BCL=xxxx
(see description of arguments)
153
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
BUC LO
Frequency
BUC Output
Power Level
BUC
Temperature
BUC PLL
Alarm
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
BLO=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
6 bytes
N/A
N/A
N/A
4 bytes
3 bytes
1 byte, value of 0 or 1
Description of Arguments
Command or Query.
BUC transmit LO frequency information in the form: xxxxxs, where: xxxxx is the LO frequency, in the range of 3000 to 65000 MHz
All 0’s (000000) disables the feature. s is the sign for the mix (+ or - character)
Terminal Frequency = BUC LO ± TFQ
Example: BLO = 12000+ (BUC LO is 12 GHz, low-side mix)
Query only.
BUC output power level in the form xx.x, where xx.x is the value in Watts.
Example: BOL=08.3 (BUC reports output power is 8.3 Watts)
Returns 00.0 when FSK and BUC power are not enabled.
Query only.
Indicates BUC temperature, in the form: sxx, where: s = sign (+ or - character) xx = value
If not available, response is –99
Example: BUT=-13 (BUC temperature is -13 degrees C)
Note: This query is only valid when the FSK and BUC power are turned On.
Query only.
BUC PLL lock state, where:
0=Unlocked
1=Locked
Example: BPA=1 (BUC PLL is locked)
If not available, response is 9
Note: This command is only valid when the FSK and BUC power are turned On.
Response to
Command
BLO=
BLO?
BLO*
BLO#
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
BLO? BLO=xxxxxs
(see description of arguments)
N/A BOL? BOL=xx.x
(see description of arguments)
N/A BUT? BUT=sxx
(see description of arguments)
N/A BPA? BPA=x
(see description of arguments)
154
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
BUC Software
Version
BUC Current
BUC Voltage
Terminal Tx
Frequency
Terminal Rx
Frequency
OGC Outdoor
Unit Global
Configuration
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
OGC=
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
2 bytes
4 bytes
4 bytes
10 bytes
10 bytes
50 Bytes
Description of Arguments
Query only.
Indicates the BUC software version, in the form xx,
Example: BSV=05 (Software version 05)
If not available, response is 00
Note: This command is only valid when the FSK and BUC power are turned On.
Query only.
Indicates the value of the BUC Current, in the form: xxxx, where xxxx is between 0 and 9999, units mA.
If not available, response is 0000.
Example: BDC=3100
Query only.
Indicates the value of the BUC Voltage, in the form: xx.x, where xx.x is between 0 and 64.0
If not available, response is 00.0.
Example: BDV=43.6 (BUC DC voltage is 43.6 volts)
Query only.
Terminal Tx Frequency, where frequency = BUC LO ± TFQ
Resolution=100 Hz
Returns 00000.0000 if LNB LO is zero
Example: TTF=14250.9872
Query only.
Terminal Rx Frequency, where frequency = LNB LO ± RFQ
Resolution=100 Hz
Returns 00000.0000 if LNB LO is zero
Example: TRF=11650.2249
Command or Query
ODU Global Configuration of CDM-570L in the form: aabcdexxxxhhhhiiiijjjjjkxxxxxxlmnnnooopppppqxxxxxx, where:
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
N/A BSV? BSV=x.x
(see description of arguments)
N/A BDC? BDC=xxxx
(see description of arguments)
N/A
N/A TTF? TTF=xxxxx.xxxx
(see description of arguments)
N/A TRF? TRF=xxxxx.xxxx
(see description of arguments)
OGC=
OGC?
OGC*
OGC#
BDV?
OGC?
BDV=xx.x
(see description of arguments)
OGC=aabcdfxxxhhhhiiii jjjjjkxxxxxxlmnnnooopp pppqxxxxxx
(see description of arguments)
OGC?n
155
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Parameter
Type
Command
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Arguments for Command or Response to Query
Description of Arguments aa = BUC Address b = BUC FSK comms enable c = BUC Power Control d = BUC 10MHz Frequency Reference enable e = BUC Tx Output Enable xxxx = expansion bytes hhhh = BUC Low Alarm Limit iiii = BUC High Alarm Limit jjjjjk = BUC LO frequency, mix sign xxxxxx = expansion bytes l = LNB Power Control m = LNB 10MHz Frequency Reference enable nnn = LNB Low Alarm Limit ooo = LNB High Alarm Limit pppppq = LNB LO Frequency, mix sign xxxxxx = expansion bytes
Any unavailable parameters will be filled with xxx.
Note: The following codes are used in the ‘Response to Command’ column:
=
?
*
#
Message ok
Received ok, but invalid arguments found
Message ok, but not permitted in current mode
Message ok, but unit is not in Remote mode
Time out of an EDMAC pass-through message
Warning. Command accepted, but other parameters were changed in addition
~
+ same as BAD same as BCE same as BPC same as BFR same as BOE same as BCL same as BCH same as BLO same as LPC same as LFR same as LCL same as LCH same as LLO
Response to
Command
Query
(Instruction
Code and
Qualifier)
Response to Query
Where n=0 to 9 returns the OGC portion of 1 of 10 stored configurations
(see description of arguments)
156
Chapter 14. IP MODULE Ethernet
Interface Overview
14.1 Introduction
The optional IP Module Ethernet Interface can be added to make the CDM-570L a high-performance, low-cost, IP-Centric satellite modem well suited for closed network Single Channel Per Carrier (SCPC) links. It is ideal for many VSAT applications. A CDM-570L with the IP Module can also be utilized in a
ViperSat satellite bandwidth management sytem. The following chapters focus on the CDM-570L IP
Module capabilities and operation. Refer to the ViperSat Operational Manual, for more specific information on the CDM-570L IP Module operation when deployed in a ViperSat system.
14.2 Major Assemblies
Assembly
PL/10235-
Description
IP Module
14.3 IP MODULE Standard Features
10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface
Powerful network management
• Web Server interface for complete product management
• SNMP with public and private MIB
• Telnet interface for remote product M & C
• Console Port interface for local network management
Remote software/firmware upgrade via FTP
Configuration backup and restore via FTP
Event Logging to capture all IP Module activity
157
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Detailed Statistics of IP traffic
IGMP support for multicast
CDM-550 Emulation Mode
Static IP routing for unicast and multicast easyConnect Mode
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
14.3.1 10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface
In Router Mode operation, the 10/100BaseT Ethernet Interface is used for routing IP traffic to be transmited over the satellite or routed to another device on the local LAN. In easyConnect
Mode, the Ethernet Interface is used to forward IP and non-IP traffic over the satellite. Local or remote management of all CDM-570L and IP Module functions is also available via Telnet,
HTTP, or SNMP.
14.3.2 Powerful Network Management
The CDM-570L IP-Centric Modem may be configured, operated and monitored using any of the following methods:
User Interface Connection
Front Panel
Serial Remote
Control
Serial Command
Line Interface (CLI)
Telnet
Web Server
SNMP
Local - Keypad
Local - Serial RS-232/RS-485 via Remote Control Port
Local - Serial RS-232 via
Console Port
Local or remote - Ethernet via
10/100 BaseT Traffic interface
Local or remote - Ethernet via
10/100 BaseT Traffic interface
Local or remote - Ethernet via
10/100 BaseT Traffic interface
Modem
Functions
ALL
IP MODULE
Functions
IP Address/Subnet
Mask only
Reference
Chapter 6
Mask only
Chapter 14
ALL ALL
ALL ALL
ALL ALL
ALL ALL
14.3.3 Remote software/firmware upgrade via FTP
The IP Module uses ‘flash memory’ technology internally, and new firmware can be uploaded to or from an external PC by FTP. This makes software upgrading very simple, and updates can now be sent via the Internet, E-mail, or on disk. The upgrade can be performed without opening the unit or having to be in the same physical location.
158
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
14.3.4 Configuration backup and restore via FTP
All IP Module configuration parameters are stored in a simple text file. The parameter file can easily be retrieved locally or remotely by FTP. The file can then be used to quickly configure a replacement modem if needed.
14.3.5 Event Logging to capture all IP MODULE activity
All IP Module activity can be stored into an easy-to-read Event Log. This file can also be retrieved locally or remotely by FTP.
14.3.6 Detailed Statistics of IP traffic
IP traffic statistics are continuously updated and allow detailed performance analysis or can be used to identify traffic problems. The statistics are available through the Serial Console locally, or can be gathered remotely by Telnet, HTTP, or SNMP.
14.3.7 IGMP support for multicast
IGMP is a standard feature in the IP Module. If enabled, it responds to IGMP queries for the configured multicast routes on the transmit side and generates IGMP queries on the receive side.
If there are no active IGMP receivers on the LAN, it will stop forwarding the multicast traffic
(received from the satellite) to the LAN.
14.3.8 CDM-570L Emulation Mode
With the IP module installed, the CDM-570L can be made to operate in CDM-570L emulation mode, allowing any traffic to be sent and received using any serial port . The emulation mode is selected from the front panel by selecting Configuration/Interface and then selecting either RS-
422, V.35, RS-232, or G.703 as the interface rather than IP. The CDM-570L will then pass standard serial traffic, but will not pass IP traffic. The IP Module can still be accessed via the ethernet port using Telnet, HTTP, or SNMP for configuring or monitoring the CDM-570L.
14.3.9 Static IP routing for unicast and multicast
Up to 256 static routes can be entered into the IP Module to direct IP traffic over the satellite or to another device on the local LAN.
159
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
14.3.10 easyConnect
Mode
easyConnect is the new Comtech EF Data IP modem intelligent networking solution that allows a link to be setup with minimal configuration (no specific routes need to be configured).
The IP Module also supports non-IP traffic with easyConnect . All IP traffic will be subject to user configured QoS restrictions.
14.3.10.1 easyConnect
Operation
The following is a detailed description of how an easyConnect pair should be setup and configured as well as information about how easyConnect functions.
• Because easyConnect is a “smart wire,” the devices attached to it on either side of the satellite should be on the same subnet and should not configure a next hop address to be the CDM-570L IP address (as should be done with router mode). For purposes of configuration, easyConnect mode should be viewed to function in much the same way as a bridge (however, without spanning tree protocol).
• All of the features that groom and optimize the satellite link in router mode are also available in easyConnect mode.
• easyConnect Multicast Option – Multicast packets in easyConnect mode are identified using multicast MAC address. These identified multicast packets are either routed or dropped based on the easyConnect multicast option.
• easyConnect uses MAC (layer 2) addresses to learn where to send packets. In comparison, router mode uses the destination IP address in the packet in conjunction with the route table to determine where to forward the packets.
• The IP Module Ethernet interface in easyConnect mode is configured to be in promiscuous mode with a data rate of 10BaseT Half Duplex. The line speed for easyConnect mode must be 10BaseT, but can be either Half or Full Duplex The IP
Module needs to be in promiscuous mode in order to learn the attached networking devices.
• Since easyConnect does not use a routing table, the determination of where to send a packet is made by a learning process. When the system is powered-up, all packets from each subnet (local and remote) will be sent over the satellite interface. However, as each IP Module learns which devices are attached to their local Ethernet interfaces, the IP Module begins to filter packets which it has learned are locally attached to its
Ethernet interface.
• The easyConnect learning/forwarding algorithm is as follows:
• If the packet is destined for the IP Module, then process it locally.
• If the packet is from the Ethernet interface, then send it to the Satellite interface;
OR if the destination layer 2 (MAC address) of the packets matches the source layer 2 address for a packet we have already seen, then the destination MAC address of this packet is on our local subnet; so why send it over the satellite interface. In this case, the IP Module will drop the packet.
• If the packet is from the satellite interface, then send it out the Ethernet interface.
160
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
IMPORTANT easyConnect mode will automatically use Header Compression (even if Header
Compression option has not been purchased). Because of this, some of the initial traffic sent between two devices will not be received over the satellite until a full
Header is transmitted. For example, the default Header Compression Refresh
Rate is 50 packets. If a ping is sent over the satellite, then it will time out until the full Header packet is sent. The Header Compression Refresh Rate on the
Administration Menu can be reduced to minimize the amount of traffic lost when traffic is first sent between two devices. Once communication between two devices has been established, both IP modems will be able to receive all traffic, unless one IP modem is power cycled or reset.
•
IMPORTANT
Do not enable IF Loopback (or link the TX to RX by a BNC cable or satellite) on a IP modem operating in easyConnect mode when connected to a LAN. In this configuration, easyConnect will resend all layer 2 broadcast packets and cause a
“broadcast storm” on the LAN. To perform a loop test to verify the modem or satellite link, do one of the following:
OR
1. Reconfigure the CDM-570L interface selection by selecting
Configuration/Interface and then selecting EIA-422/530, V.35, or EIA-232.
IP M odule to Router Mode.
14.4 IP MODULE Optional Features
Enhancing the IP Module performance is easy. Additional features can be added quickly on site, using the FAST access code purchased from Comtech EF Data. To enable these features, simply enter the code at the front panel.
3xDES Data Encryption
IP Header Compression
Payload Compression
Quality of Service (QoS) – supports 3 different modes of QoS
• Minimum/Maximum Bandwidth
• Maximum Bandwidth/Priority
• DiffServe
IMPORTANT
Note: Enabling the Demo Mode from the front panel can temporarily enable all IP
FAST Options (except 3xDES Encryption) for evaluation. Once enabled, the IP
FAST Options will be available for a total time period of seven (7) days (168 hours). The 7-day Demo Mode is a cumulative counter (can be stopped and started at any time).
•
161
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
14.4.1 3xDES Encryption with Ability to Change Keys
The IP Module optionally supports 3xDES-128 (using NIST certified 3x core) encryption and decryption, for the highest level security for link encryption. Each unit supports eight encryption keys and eight decryption keys. The keys are user configurable. Each route can be assigned to be encrypted by any of the eight available keys, random key method, or transmitted in clear.
14.4.2 IP Header Compression
Header Compression is also an optional feature of the IP Module. The IP Module supports Header
Compression for the following Ethernet and Layer 3 & 4 Headers:
Supported Ethernet Headers
Ethernet 2.0
Ethernet 2.0 + VLAN-tag
Ethernet 2.0 + MPLS
802.3-raw
802.3-raw + VLAN-tag
802.3 + 802.2
802.3 + 802.2 + VLAN-tag
802.3 + 802.2 + SNAP
802.3 + 802.2 + SNAP + VLAN-tag
802.3 + 802.2 + SNAP + MPLS
Supported Layer 3&4 Headers
IP
TCP
UDP
RTP (Codec Independent)
Header Compression reduces the required VoIP bandwidth by 60 percent. Example: A G.729a voice codec, operating at 8 kbps, will occupy 32 kbps once encapsulated into IP framing on a LAN. Using
IP/UDP/RTP Header Compression, the same traffic only needs 10.8 kbps total WAN satellite bandwidth to cross the link. A total maximum of 64 simultaneous VoIP calls can be compressed. Normal Web/HTTP traffic can be reduced an additional 10% via IP/TCP header compression.
Header Compression Configuration – Header Compression is completely independent from QoS, and there is no configuration required except enabling the Header Compression feature on both the sending and receiving Comtech EF Data IP modem. Packets with a Header Compression supported header will
162
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM automatically be identified for compression. The only configuration consideration is the Header
Compression Refresh Rate. This is how many compressed header packets will be sent before a single full header packet is sent. Some compressed header traffic could be lost during deteriorated satellite link conditions. Sending a full header packet will allow the return of the traffic stream. The Refresh Rate can be increased for poor satellite link conditions or decreased to further reduce overhead.
Header Compression Statistics - These statistics will display the total bytes of the pre-compressed and post-compressed traffic and effective compression ratio.
14.4.3 Payload Compression
Traffic optimization through Payload Compression is another optional feature of the CDM-570L/IP
Module modem.
- FAST feature to upgrade
- Uses AHA chip
- Compression algorithm applied to all data (HDLC header excluded).
- Compression statistics are fed back to QoS in order to maximize WAN utilization while maintaining priority, jitter and latency.
- 1024 simultaneous compression sessions to maximize compression across multiple distinct traffic flows.
- Compression algorithm not applied to RTP streams because this traffic is already compressed and would only INCREASE the sat bandwidth if compressed again.
- Additional statistics have been added to the compression statistics menu in order to provide feedback on the compression efficiency that has been achieved.
- Payload Compression is selectable on a per route basis.
ADLC vs LZS compression comparison
Note: These numbers have been generated by using an internally created test program. This program takes the target benchmark files and splits the files into payload size chunks and compresses each chunk in a separate invocation of the compression algorithm. This is important to note because most compression algorithms are applied to the entire file data set as a single invocation of the compression algorithm which is easier for other types of compression algorithms (LZS, GZIP in specific). This, of course, does not apply to streamed packet data across an IP network (ftp transfer, for example).
Algorithm Payload size File Set Ratio
ADLC 1472 Calgary 1.76
ADLC 1000
ADLC 500
ADLC 100
ADLC 1472
ADLC 1000
ADLC 500
Calgary 1.76
Calgary 1.77
Calgary 2.09
Canterbury 1.71
Canterbury 1.72
Canterbury 1.74
163
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
ADLC 100
LZS 1472
LZS 1000
Canterbury 2.04
Calgary 1.66
Calgary 1.66
LZS 500
LZS 100
Calgary 1.68
Calgary 1.97
LZS 1472 Canterbury 1.61
LZS 1000 Canterbury 1.62
LZS 500 Canterbury 1.63
LZS 100 Canterbury 1.91
14.4.4 Quality of Service
Quality of Service (QoS) is an optional feature of the IP Module. The user may select one of three modes of QoS operation:
• Mode 1 – QoS Rules based on Maximum Bandwidth and Priority
• Mode 2 – QoS Rules based on Minimum and Maximum Bandwidth
• Mode 3 – DiffServ
QoS Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) - Packet Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) is enabled automatically while QoS is enabled. However, SAR is an adaptive process; it will trigger only if the packet latency exceeds the threshold value (default to 20 msec). Latency value is calculated based on the satellite transmission bandwidth. The minimum segment size was limited to 480 bytes excluding satellite
HDLC header in order to avoid satellite overhead and consumption of CPU cycles.
14.4.4.1 Maximum Bandwidth/Priority QoS Mode Maximum
Bandwidth/Priority Mode
QoS Rules can be assigned to up to 32 different types of flows to be defined by the user. Flows can be defined by any combination of Protocol (FTP, UDP, RTP, etc.), Source/Destination IP (specific or range), and/or Layer 3 Source/Destination Port.
Priority - A Priority level from 1 to 8 is assigned for each flow. The IP Module classifies each packet that is to be forwarded over the satellite. The packet will then have a Priority assigned according to the defined QoS Rules. Any packet that does not meet a QoS Rule is assigned to the
Default Rule and will be assigned a Priority of 8. Priority 1 packets will be forwarded immediately, Priority 2 packets will be forwarded as soon as there are no Priority 1 packets in the
Queue, and so on. Any latency critical traffic, such as VoIP/RTP should always be assigned
Priority 1.
Maximum Bandwidth - This can also be assigned to a flow to restrict the Maximum Bandwidth that any particular flow will utilize, or the default of no bandwidth restriction can be selected.
164
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Filtering - QoS also allows specific flows to be designated as “filtered,” so the IP Module will discard traffic that the user does not want to forward over a satellite link.
QoS Rule Hierarchy - It is quite possible to have traffic that meets the definitions of several QoS
Rules. All traffic will be classified into the first QoS Rule that is a match, or fall into the Default
Rule. The most specific QoS Rule will always be first. For example, a QoS Rule that identified a
Source and Destination IP Address would be assigned ahead of a rule that just defined RTP protocol. QoS Rules that have the same amount of variables defined are sorted as follows:
1. Having a Protocol defined.
Protocol Priority: a. VOCE d. RTP e. FTP
– b. VDEO – c. RTPS f. HTTP
–
–
Voice Real Time Protocol
Video Real Time Protocol
Real Time Protocol Signalling
All Real Time Protocol
– File
– Hypertext Transfer Protocol g. TELN – Protocol h. SMTP i. SNMP j. SQL
–
–
–
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
Simple Network Management Protocol
Structured Query Language Protocol k. ORCL – Protocol l. CTRX – Protocol m. SAP n. UDP o. TCP p. IP
–
–
–
–
–
Service Announcement Protocol
User Datagram Protocol
Transmission Control Protocol
All Internet Protocol
All Non-Internet Protocol q. N-IP
2. Source IP Address or subnet defined.
3. Destination IP Address or subnet defined.
4. Source Port defined (lowest Port number first).
5. Destination Port defined (lowest Port number first).
The IP Module will sort each QoS rule as they are added and the QoS Configuration display will be updated to reflect the order with which rules are matched.
QoS Statistics - Every QoS Rule defined can be monitored to see the traffic flow for each Queue.
These statistics will display the traffic sent in each Queue, the amount of dropped traffic, and the number of Active Flows.
Protocol and Port Number Considerations - When defining QoS Rules, it is important to be aware of specifics of the traffic for which the rule is intended.
When selecting a protocol for a QoS Rule, be aware that the IP Module allows for a very broad selection (such as IP) or a very specific protocol. For example, RTP traffic can consist of UDP portion (for voice or video) and a TCP portion (for RTP signaling). These could have separate
165
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
QoS Rules created or all be included in a single Rule by selecting RTP as the protocol. The following diagram illustrates where each protocol selection resides.
IP
UDP
TCP
RTP
VOCE
VDEO
RTPS
TELN
ORCL
SNMP
FTP
SMTP
CTRX
HTTP
SAP
SQL
Non IP
Selection of Source/Destination Ports should only be done if the user is aware of the port usage of the desired protocol or application. There are well known ports for various protocols, but often only the ‘command’ messaging is transacted on these ports and the ‘data’ is transferred through a negotiated port.
166
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The following table can be used as a reference for some well known Port numbers:
1
Port Description Port Description
TCP Port Service Multiplexer (TCPMUX) 118 SQL Services
7 ECHO
20
21
22
FTP - Data
FTP - Control
SSH Remote Login Protocol
23 Telnet
25 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
42 Host Name Server (Nameserv)
53
69
70
Domain Name System (DNS)
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
Gopher Services
80 HTTP
108 SNA Gateway Access Server
137 NetBIOS Name Service
139 NetBIOS Datagram Service
150 NetBIOS Session Service
161 SNMP
179 Border Gateway Protocol (BGP)
190 Gateway Access Control Protocol (GACP)
197 Directory Location Service (DLS)
396 Novell Netware over IP
443 HTTPS
444 Simple Network Paging Protocol (SNPP)
109 POP2
110 POP3
115 Simple File Transfer Protocol (SFTP)
IMPORTANT
1080 Socks
Once the QoS Rules are defined, each type of traffic flow should be isolated and sent to verify that it is being sent in the intended QoS Rule.
14.4.4.2 Minimum/Maximum Bandwidth QoS Mode
QoS Rules can be assigned to up to 32 different types of flows to be defined by the user. Flows can be defined by any combination of Protocol (FTP, UDP, RTP, etc.), Source/Destination IP (specific or range), and/or Layer 3 Source/Destination Port.
Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) – The Min/Max BW QoS mode allows the user to select Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED). Without WRED, output buffers fill during periods of congestion. When the buffers are full, tail drop occurs; all additional packets are dropped. Since the packets are dropped all at once, global synchronization of TCP hosts can occur as multiple TCP hosts reduce their transmission rates. As the congestion clears, the TCP hosts increase their transmission rates, resulting in waves of congestion followed by periods where the transmission link is not fully used.
167
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
WRED allows for more graceful dropping of packets, as QoS queues get full. Without WRED, typically packets are dropped based upon a simple tail drop algorithm which was applied to packets as they were being added to the QoS queues. This can result in large numbers of contiguous packets being dropped which causes many protocols such as RTP and TCP to ungracefully degrade performance in a over-consumed or bursty scenario. WRED applies a randomization which means that the percentage change to drop packets increases as the queue becomes full, and minimizes the chances of global synchronization. Thus, WRED allows the transmission line to be used fully at all times.
Maximum Bandwidth - This can be assigned to a flow to restrict the Maximum Bandwidth that any particular flow will utilize, or the default of no bandwidth restriction can be selected.
Minimum Bandwidth - Minimum specification that allows a committed information rate (CIR) to be applied to user defined classes of traffic, or the default of no minimum bandwidth can be selected.
Filtering – Any specific flow can be designated as filtered (see Maximum Bandwidth/Priority
QoS).
QoS Rule Hierarchy – The QoS Rule Hierarchy is the same as Maximum Bandwidth/Priority
QoS.
QoS Statistics - QoS Statistics are displayed as Maximum Bandwidth/Priority QoS.
14.4.4.3 DiffServ QoS Mode
The IP Module QoS can also be set to DiffServ Mode to make it fully compliant to the Differential
Services QoS standards.
Class Selector DiffServ Code Points (DSCP) – Some implementations of DiffServ will prioritize traffic by Class Selector assignment. This is defined in the DiffServ Code Points
(DSCP) within the IP header. The first 3 bits of the DSCP define the Class Selector Precedence
(or Priority):
Class Selector
Precedence 1
Precedence 2
Precedence 3
Precedence 4
Precedence 5
Precedence 6
DSCP
001 000
010 000
011 000
100 000
101 000
110 000
IP MODULE
Priority
1
4
5
2
3
6
Precedence 7 111 000 7
Default 000 9
The IP Module will prioritize the traffic based upon the DSCP Class Selector Precedence.
168
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Note: All traffic that does not have the DSCP Class Selector Precedence defined (000 000) will be placed in the Default Queue and have a Precedence of 9.
Expedited Forwarding and Assured Forwarding DSCP – Another implementation of
DiffServ uses all 6 bits of the DSCP to define Expedited and Assured Forwarding:
DiffServ Type
Expedited Forwarding
Class Selector
Precedence 1
Assured Forwarding – Class 1 Precedence 8
Assured Forwarding – Class 2 Precedence 8
Assured Forwarding – Class 3 Precedence 8
Assured Forwarding – Class 4 Precedence 8
DSCP
101 110
001 xx0
010 xx0
011 xx0
100 xx0
IP MODULE
Priority
1
8
8
8
8
Expedited Forwarding (EF) DSCP – This defines premium service and is recommended for real time traffic applications such as VoIP and video conferencing.
Assured Forwarding (AF) DSCP – This defines 4 service levels and also uses the last 3 bits of the DSCP to define the Drop Precedence (Low, Medium, or High). The Drop Precedence determines which packets will most likely be dropped during periods of over congestion, similar to Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED). As a result, each of the 4 AF service levels also have 3 Drop Precedence levels for which the IP Module provides 12 seperate queues.
Minimum Bandwidth (AF only) - Minimum specification that allows a committed information rate (CIR) to be applied to user defined classes of traffic, or the default of no minimum bandwidth can be selected.
Maximum Bandwidth (AF only) - This can be assigned to a flow to restrict the maximum bandwidth that any particular flow will utilize, or the default of no bandwidth restriction can be selected.
Note: Minimum and maximum bandwidth is only configurable for each of the 4 Assured
Forwarding classes.
Note: Typically, DiffServ is implemented using exclusively Class Selector DSCP or exclusively
Expedited and Assured Forwarding DSCP. The IP Module is fully DiffServ compliant and will work with either DiffServ implementation or with a combination of both.
169
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
14.4.5 CDM-570L IP MODULE Demo Mode
The Demo Mode allows all IP optional features (3xDES Encryption, IP Header Compression,
Payload Compression, Quality of Service, and IGMP) to be enabled for seven Days (168 hours).
To enable Demo Mode, use the CDM-570L Front Panel to select UTIL\DEMO\ON. The seven day Demo Mode Timer will start but can be stopped at any time by setting Demo Mode to OFF.
The Demo Mode enables the following IP optional features for seven days (168 hours):
IP Header Compression
Payload Compression
Quality of Service
14.5 IP MODULE Specifications
Table ?. RFC’s and Protocols
Supported RFC’s and PROTOCOLS
RFC 768 User Datagram Protocol
RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol
RFC 826 An Ethernet Address Resolution Protocol
RFC 862 Echo Protocol
RFC 791 Internet Protocol
RFC 793 Transmission Control Protocol
RFC 856 Telnet Binary Transmission
RFC 894 A Standard for the Transmission of
IP Datagrams over Ethernet Networks
RFC 959 File Transfer Protocol RFC 1112 Host Extensions for IP
Multicasting
RFC 1213 Management Information Base for Network
Management of TCP/IP-based internet: MIB-II
RFC 1812 Requirements for IP Version 4
Routers
RFC 2045 Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) RFC 2236 Internet Group Management
Protocol, Version 2
RFC 2474 Definition of the Differentiated Services Field
(DS Field) in the Ipv4 and Ipv6 Headers
RFC 2578 Structure of Management Information Version
2 (SMIv2)
RFC 2598 An Expedited Forwarding PHB
RFC 2475 An Architecture for Differentiated
Services
RFC 2597 Assured Forwarding PHB Group
RFC 2821 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
RFC 3416 Version 2 of the Protocol Operations for the
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 2616 Hypertext Transfer Protocol –
HTTP/1.1
RFC 3412 Message Processing and
Dispatching for the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP)
RFC 3418 Management Information Base
(MIB) for the Simple Network Management
Protocol (SNMP)
170
Chapter 15. Typical IP MODULE
Operational Setups
15.1 Overview
The CDM-570L with the IP Module has several modes of operation. This Chapter shows examples of typical setups for the CDM-570L / IP Module to determine the best mode of operation for the appropriate network topology and Ethernet traffic environment.
15.2 Modem Compatability
The CDM-570L/ IP Module is compatible with other Comtech EF Data IP modems (referred to hereafter as CDM-IP) provided the modems have similar operating modes and IP options. The following is a list of compatible CDM-IP modems:
Comtech EF
Data IP Modem IP Module Version Additional Notes
CDM-IP 550 Version 1.1.0 or later
Must have Framer II Module (PL/9956-1) and
Version 1.3.0 or later to support Data
Compression IP option
CDM-IP 300L Version 1.1.0 or later
Must have Framer II Module (PL/9956-1) and
Version 1.3.0 or later to support Data
Compression IP option
SMR5000 compatibilty is provided when the
Vipersat network with existing SMR5000’s
171
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
15.3 IP MODULE Working Modes
Two Working Modes of the IP Module are available: easyConnect and Router Mode. There are also three HDLC Addressing Modes: Point-to-Point, Small Network, and Large Network.
Separate HDLC Modes allows the user to minimize the HDLC overhead transmitted over the satellite based upon the size of their network. In Router/Point-to-Point Mode, no HDLC address is transmitted; Router/Small Network transmits 1 byte and Router/Large Network transmits 2 bytes as part of HDLC header for each packet. Non-IP traffic is not supported in Router Mode.
This section describes the functionality of these modes in order to optimize the Comtech EF Data
IP modems in the network, based upon Network Topology and Ethernet Traffic requirements.
The Working Mode and HDLC Address Mode of the Comtech EF Data IP modems must be identical to pass traffic between modems.
IMPORTANT
Changing the Working Mode or HDLC address Mode of the IP modem requires the IP
Module to be rebooted. Before the user can select a different mode, the IP Module will notify the user that changing the mode will require a reboot.
Working Mode
Network Topology Ethernet Traffic
HDLC Address Mode easyConnect Mode
Point-to-Point
Point-to-Point only
Both sites on same LAN subnet
IP v4 and/or non-IP
Router Mode
Point-to-Point
Router Mode
Small Network
Router Mode
Large Network
Point-to-Point only
Both sites on different LAN subnet
IP v4 only
Point-to-Point or Point-to-Multipoint
(up to 254 sites)
All sites on different LAN subnet
IP v4 only
Point-to-Point or Point-to-Multipoint
(up to 32766 sites)
All sites on different LAN subnet
IP v4 only
172
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Feature Support - The IP Module also has several standard and optional features to further optimize security, performance and efficiency. The following table defines how these features are supported in the two different Working Modes:
Feature
HDLC Address
Mode
10/100 BaseT
Operation
Access Lists
3xDES
Encryption
Quality of
Service
Header
Compression
Payload
Compression
Multicast
IGMP
Remote upgrade by
FTP easyConnect
Point-to-Point Only
Mode
10 BaseT Only
Half (default) or Full Duplex
None
1 Encrypt Decrypt Key
All traffic encrypted when enabled
Min/Max; Max/Priority; DiffServ
Router Mode
Point-to-Point, Small Network, Large
Network (can be Point-to-Multipoint)
10 or 100 BaseT
Half or Full Duplex
4 Clients by IP or IP Subnet
Up to 8 Encrypt Decrypt Keys or random
Traffic encrypted on a per route basis
Min/Max; Max/Priority; DiffServ
Yes - applied to all traffic when enabled
Yes - applied to all traffic when enabled
Yes – applied on a per route basis
Yes – applied on a per route basis
Select either all or no Multicast,
Uplink or Downlink
All or specific Multicast streams, Uplink or Downlink
No Yes
Yes Yes
173
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
15.3.1 easyConnect
Working Mode
This is the default Working Mode of the IP Module. easyConnect only operates in Point-to-
Point Mode, meaning that it is only communicating with one other Comtech EF Data IP modem.
This mode allows the modem to be setup with minimal configuration (no specific routes need to be configured). In this mode, the IP Module is acting as a “smart wire” over a satellite link between two Comtech EF Data IP modems. This allows the IP Module to simultaneously forward IP traffic and non-IP traffic, such as IPX.
Satellite
25
6 kb ps
25
6 k bp s
PC
IP 10.10.1.100/16
PC
IP 10.10.2.100/16
Satellite dish
TX
RX
Satellite dish
TX RX
Hub CDM-IP 1
(efi0) 10.10.1.1/16
Remote CDM-IP 2
(efi0) 10.10.2.1/16
Figure ?. easyConnect Diagram
This diagram shows a 256 kbps Point-to-Point duplex link in easyConnect Mode. Note that both sides of the link are on the same IP subnet - 10.10.0.0/16. There are no routes or
HDLC addresses to configure. When the system is powered-up, all packets from each subnet (local and remote) will be sent over the satellite interface. Each Comtech EF Data
IP Modem learns which devices are attached to their local Ethernet interfaces and will only send packets over the satellite that are not destined for the locally attached devices.
IMPORTANT
The default setting in easyConnect Mode is 10BaseT/Half Duplex. Only 10BaseT operation is allowed in easyConnect , but Half or Full Duplex can be selected.
In Router Mode, the default setting allows the Ethernet port to auto-negotiate its link speed on power-up.
174
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
15.3.2
IMPORTANT easyConnect mode will automatically use Header Compression (even if Header
Compression option has not been purchased). Because of this, some of the initial traffic sent between two devices will not be received over the satellite until a full
Header is transmitted. For example, the default Header Compression Refresh
Rate is 50 packets. If a ping is sent over the satellite, then it will time out until the full Header packet is sent. The Header Compression Refresh Rate on the
Administration Menu can be reduced to minimize the amount of traffic lost when traffic is first sent between two devices. Once communication between two devices has been established, both CDM-IP modems will be able to receive all traffic, unless one CDM-IP is power cycled or reset.
Router Working Mode – Point-to-Point
Satellite
25
6 kb ps
25
6 kb ps
PC
IP 10.10.1.100/16
GW 10.10.1.1
PC
IP 10.20.1.100/16
GW 10.20.1.1
Satellite dish
TX
RX
Satellite dish
TX RX
Hub CDM-IP 1
(efi0) 10.10.1.1/16
IP Dest
Static Routes
Next Hop Type
10.20.0.0/16 Point-to-Point ToSat
Remote CDM-IP 2
(efi0) 10.20.1.1/16
IP Dest
Static Routes
Next Hop Type
10.10.0.0/16 Point-to-Point ToSat
Figure ?. Router Mode, Point-to-Point Diagram
This diagram shows a 256 kbps Point-to-Point duplex link in Router Mode. Note that each side of the link has different IP subnets – 10.10.0.0/16 and 10.20.0.0/16. Each
CDM-IP modem has a static route defined for the distant CDM-IP modem subnet. The
Next Hop is automatically defined as Point-to-Point and there are no HDLC addresses to configure. All that would be required to send traffic between the PCs on each subnet would be to define the local CDM-IP modem as the PC default gateway. The CDM-IP modems will only pass traffic over the satellite link by the ToSat routes configured in the
Route Table.
175
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
15.3.3 Router Working Mode – Point-to-MultiPoint
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
PC
IP 10.10.1.100/16
GW 10.10.1.1
20
48
k bp sto
a ll R em ot e
CD
M
-IP
's
Satellite
256
kbp s to
Hu b C
DM
-IP 1
25
6 k bp s t o H ub
C
D
M
-IP
2
Satellite dish
RX
TX
Remote A, CDM-IP 3
(efi0) 10.20.1.1/16
Static Routes
IP Dest
10.10.0.0/16
Next Hop Type
0x01 ToSat
239.255.30.10 N/A Sat-to-LAN
RX HDLC Addresses - 0x02, 0x10
Satellite dish
TX RX
Hub CDM-IP 1
(efi0) 10.10.1.1/16
Static Routes
IP Dest
10.20.0.0/16
Next Hop Type
0x02 ToSat
10.30.0.0/16 0x03 ToSat
239.255.30.10 0x10 ToSat
239.255.30.11 0x11 ToSat
RX HDLC Addresses - 0x01
RX
Satellite dish
PC
IP 10.20.1.100/16
GW 10.20.1.1
PC
IP 10.30.1.100/16
GW 10.30.1.1
Hub CDM-IP 2 (RX Only)
(efi0) 10.10.1.2/16
Static Routes
IP Dest
0.0.0.0/0
Next Hop
10.10.1.1
RX HDLC Addresses - 0x01
Type
ToEth
RX
TX
Remote B, CDM-IP 4
(efi0) 10.30.1.1/16
Static Routes
IP Dest
10.10.0.0/16
Next Hop Type
0x01 ToSat
239.255.30.10 N/A Sat-to-LAN
239.255.30.11 N/A Sat-to-LAN
RX HDLC Addresses - 0x03, 0x10, 0x11
Figure ?. Router Mode, Point-to-Multipoint Diagram
“Star Network” Point-to-MultiPoint Configuration - Here, Hub CDM-IP 1 is transmitting a common 2.048 Mbps link to 2 remote CDM-IPs. In turn, Remote CDM-IP
3 is transmitting a 256 kbps link back to Hub CDM-IP 1. Remote CDM-IP 4 is also transmitting a 256 kbps link back to the Hub, but it is a separate link to Hub CDM-IP 2.
Since this is a Point-to-MultiPoint configuration, HDLC addressing is used so that the traffic not intended for a particular destination can be filtered. For unicast traffic, it is best to associate a unique HDLC address for each site in the network. For this case, the Hub
Site is HDLC 0x01, Remote A is HDLC 0x02 and Remote B is 0x03. Each CDM-IP modem would select the HDLC address associated with its site as a RX HDLC Address, so both CDM-IP modems at the Hub would have 0x01 as the first RX HDLC Address,
CDM-IP 3 would have 0x02 and CDM-IP 4 would have 0x03.
Hub CDM-IP 1 has static routes defined for both remote CDM-IP subnets with the Next
Hop HDLC address being the HDLC address associated with the remote site. Both
176
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM remote CDM-IPs have static routes to the hub with the next Hop being HDLC 0x01. The
Hub RX only CDM-IP 2 has a default route (ToEth) to Hub CDM-IP 1 because all outbound traffic will go through CDM-IP 1.
Additionally, HDLC addresses can be used to select or filter multicast traffic on the hub outbound common carrier. Hub CDM-IP 1 has two multicast routes defined with two
Next Hop HDLC addresses, 0x10 and 0x11. Remote CDM-IP 2 has RX HDLC Address
0x10 enabled to receive one of the multicast streams. Remote CDM-IP 3 has RX HDLC
Addresses 0x10 and 0x11 enabled to receive both of the multicast streams.
Additonal remote sites can be added through a dedicated RX Only CDM-IP at the hub for each remote.
PC
IP 10.10.1.100/16
GW 10.10.1.1
20
48
kb ps
to
al l R em ote
C
DM
-IP
's
Satellite
256 kbps t o Hub CD
Rx Only
25
6 k bp s t o H ub
C
D
M
-IP
2
Satellite dish
RX TX
PC
IP 10.20.1.100/16
GW 10.20.1.1
Remote A, CDM-IP 3
(efi0) 10.20.1.1/16
Static Routes
IP Dest
10.10.0.0/16
10.30.0.0/16
Next Hop Type
0x01 ToSat
0x03 ToSat
RX HDLC Addresses - 0x02
Satellite dish
TX RX
Hub CDM-IP 1
(efi0) 10.10.1.1/16
Static Routes
IP Dest Next Hop Type
10.20.0.0/16
10.30.0.0/16
0x02 ToSat
0x03 ToSat
RX HDLC Addresses - 0x01
RX
Hub CDM-IP 2 (RX Only)
(efi0) 10.10.1.2/16
IP Dest
0.0.0.0/0
Static Routes
Next Hop
10.10.1.1
RX HDLC Addresses - 0x01
Type
ToEth
Satellite dish
RX
TX
Remote B, CDM-IP 4
(efi0) 10.30.1.1/16
Static Routes
IP Dest Next Hop Type
10.10.0.0/16 0x01 ToSat
10.20.0.0/16 0x01 ToSat
RX HDLC Addresses - 0x03
RX
Remote B, CDM-IP 5 (RX Only)
(efi0) 10.30.1.2/16
IP Dest
0.0.0.0/0
Static Routes
Next Hop
10.30.1.1
RX HDLC Addresses - 0x03
Type
ToEth
PC
IP 10.30.1.100/16
GW 10.30.1.1
Figure ?. Router Mode, Partial Mesh, 1½ Hop Diagram
Full or partial “Mesh Network” Configuration – The “Star Network” configuration works for a “hub-centric” network, where all traffic is either coming to, or from, one central hub. There are several ways to send traffic between remote sites.
177
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The first method does not require any additional CDM-IP modems than is described in
Figure 1, Router Mode, Point-to-Multipoint Diagram. Just by adding static routes, traffic could be sent between Remote Site A and B. Remote site A and B would add a static route for remote destination subnet, but since the path to the remotes must go through the
Hub, the Next Hop HDLC Address would be 0x01, not the HDLC address of the Remote.
Traffic from Remote B would be transmitted to Hub RX Only CDM-IP 2, forwarded to
Hub CDM-IP 1 and retransmitted to Remote A. With this method, all traffic must go through a “double hop” in order to arrive at the destination.
To avoid the additional delay of the “double hop” method, an alternative method would require an additional RX Only CDM-IP modem at remote site for every other remote site connection needed. In the Figure above, Router Mode, Partial Mesh, 1½ Hop Diagram,
Remote Site B has added a RX Only CDM-IP and a static route to 10.20.0.0/16, Next
Hop 0x01 (through the Hub). Remote Site A has added a static route for 10.30.0.0/16,
Next Hop 0x03. To establish a connection between Remote A and B, Remote A would reconfigure the TX frequency and data rate to set up a link with the Remote B RX Only modem. The return path still must go from B to the Hub and then to A, but A has a direct link to B, thus this is considered a 1½ hop link.
Additional RX Only or full duplex CDM-IP modems can be added at Remotes based upon what 1½ hop link or single hop connections are required. Always use the following guidelines:
1) All CDM-IP modems will list the Site HDLC as their first RX HDLC Address.
2) For Satellite routes, the Next Hop is the destination Site HDLC (unless there is not a direct satellite link, whereas the Next Hop must be the Hub Site).
3) RX Only CDM-IP modems will need a default To Ethernet route to a duplex CDM-IP
Modem at the site in order to forward traffic.
178
Chapter 16. IP MODULE CLI and
Telnet Operation
16.1 Overview
This section defines the user menu system connected to the IP Module via a Terminal Emulator or Telnet. In the process of configuring each parameter, an overview of the parameter and its impact on the configuration of the IP Module is provided.
When connecting via a Terminal Emulator, the user should be physically attached to the Console
Port of the IP Module. The terminal emulator should be configured to match the console port setting. The default console port setting is 38,400 bps, 8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit and no flow control.
When connecting via telnet, the user must have network connectivity to the Traffic Ethernet Port of the IP Module. This connectivity can be via a local LAN, a remote LAN, or via a satellite link from another IP modem. The Ethernet Speed Mode is a configurable parameter of the IP Module and thus its exact setting can vary between specific installations.
IMPORTANT
The IP MODULE does not allow concurrent access to the menu via telnet and the console port . If a user connects via telnet, IP MODULE automatically disables the console port for the duration of the Telnet session. All menu pages allow a Telnet logout to end a Telnet session. Also, the IP MODULE will automatically end a Telnet session after a period of inactivity (configurable from 1 to 60 minutes).
IMPORTANT
Any changes made to the IP MODULE will be lost if the IP MODULE is reset or loses power unless the changes are saved to permanent storage . This applies to all of the IP MODULE parameters. The IP MODULE parameters can be saved by selecting “ S ”, available on any CLI/Telnet Menu page.
All base modem parameters configured via the IP MODULE (i.e., TX Frequency, data rate, etc.) and the Ethernet Port Address/Mask will be automatically stored in the CDM-570L base modem non-volatile RAM and will be retained if there is a power loss.
179
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
The CLI and Telnet Access Levels are defined as follows:
User Interface
User Login Access Level
Admin User Read/Write User
CLI
(direct to console port)
Telnet
Full Access – no Login
Full Access all Menus
Default Name/Passwords are:
No Access to Admin Menu
Full Access all other Menus
• Admin comtech/comtech
• Read/Write opcenter/1234
• Read Only monitor/1234
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Read Only User
No Access
180
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2 Main Menu Page
Menu pages are followed by a table listing the Menu Options/Fields, required Entry, and
Descriptions.
The Main Menu page has the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Administration
Interface Configuration
QoS Configuration
Route Table
Protocol Configuration
Vipersat Configuration
Entry Description
A The Administration menu provides a basic set of standard admin functions to the IP M odule. When connected via telnet, navigation to this menu will be restricted to the admin user.
I Allows the user to configure the Ethernet and Satellite interfaces.
Q Allows the user to define QoS rules for up to 32 different types of flows.
R Allows a user to define how the IP M odule will route packets that it receives on its Ethernet and Satellite interfaces.
P The Protocol Settings option allows the user to configure various protocols used by the IP M odule.
These protocols currently include ARP and IGMP.
V Only used when the CDM-570L is used in a Vipersat system.
181
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Menu Options/Fields
Satellite Modem
Configuration
Operations and
Maintenance
Save Parameters
Exit
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Entry Description
M The Modem Parameters option displays a set of menus that allows a user to configure and monitor the satellite base modem.
O The Operations & Maintenance Menu allows a user to configure various options used to control and maintain the system. Also has diagnostic tools for troubleshooting and Statistics.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the power cycle.
IP M odule to permanent storage.
This configuration will be restored on each successive
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
182
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
The Administration page is activated from the Main Menu page .
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Access to the Administration page is restricted to the Admin user when connecting via the Telnet, SNMP, or HTTP interface. The Administration page is available when connected via the Terminal Emulator (serial) connection because there is no log in.
IMPORTANT
The Administration page contains the following options/fields.
Menu Options/Fields
Name/Password
Configuration
Access Lists
Feature Configuration
Entry Description
P Activates Name/Password Configuration page. Allows the user to define the user name and passwords that are required in order to access the management interfaces.
A Activates Access Lists page. Allows the user to restrict access to the management interfaces based upon the requester’s IP address.
F Activates Feature Configuration page.
183
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Menu Options/Fields
3xDES Configuration
SMTP Configuration
SNMP Configuration
Working Mode
WAN TX Framing Mode easyConnect
Option
Header comp refresh rate
(in pkts) for all others
Exit
Multicast
Header comp refresh rate
(in pkts) for UDP/RTP1
Header comp refresh rate
(in pkts) for UDP
Payload comp refresh rate
(in pkts)
Telnet Timeout
Save Parameters
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Entry Description
D The 3xDES Configuration Page allows the user to determine if 3xDES encryption is enabled on a device and if so, the 3xDES keys that are used to decrypt traffic. The keys specified for the transmit function are completely independent for the 3xDES keys specified for the receiver function.
M The SMTP configuration page allows the user to specify appropriate settings for SMTP email server.
N The SNMP configuration page allows the user to specify management parameters for SNMP.
C Used to set the Working Mode easyConnect or
Router. See Chapter 16 for additional information.
W Comtech Native – CEFD Proprietary Framing
SMR5000 Compatibility – only used if unit is integrated into a Vipersat network with existing SMR5000’s
E When unit is running in easyConnect mode, multicast is only forwarded across link if both units have this feature enabled.
R This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a full header of this type of traffic when Header
Compression is enabled.
U This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a full header of this type of traffic when Header
Compression is enabled.
O This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a full header of this type of traffic when Header
Compression is enabled.
Q This setting allows for the adjustment of how often to send a full payload when Payload Compression is enabled.
T The Telnet timeout determines how many minutes (1-
60) of Telnet inactivity before the Telnet session is automatically terminated.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
184
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.1.1 Name/Password Configuration Page
The Name/Password Configuration page is activated from the Administration page . This option allows a user to define the passwords required to access via HTTP, FTP, SNMP, and TELNET.
IMPORTANT
All Usernames and Passwords are case sensitive.
There is a minimum of 1 and maximum of 11 characters.
Any or all of the Usernames and Passwords can be removed by entering “NONE
NONE” from the CLI or Telnet.
Removing all Usernames and Passwords would only allow access to the IP functions when connected via the Terminal Emulator (serial) connection (because there is no log in).
FTP access is restricted to Admin Username/Password only. FTP is only used to upgrade the IP SOFTWARE or to load or retrieve the IP Parameter file.
The Name/Password Configuration Page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Admin User/Password
Entry Description
A Enter the user name and password with a space delimiter.
Ex: <user> <passwd>
Enter NONE NONE to erase
Read/Write User/Password W Enter the user name and password with a space delimiter.
Read Only User/Password
Ex: <user> <passwd>
Enter NONE NONE to erase
R Enter the user name and password with a space delimiter.
Ex: <user> <passwd>
Enter NONE NONE to erase
185
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Menu Options/Fields
Save Parameters
Exit
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Entry Description
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
16.2.1.2 Access Lists Page
The Access Lists page is activated from the Administration page . This page allows the user to limit monitor and control access to the unit from a specified list of authorized clients.
If connecting to the IP modem remotely, the IP address of the machine used to manage the IP modem should be included in the Access List.
IMPORTANT
The Access Lists page contains the following options/fields:
186
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields Entry
AccessClient1 - 4 1 - 4
Description
The Access Client list allows a user to define which remote clients can connect when the Access List Enforcement is enabled. Each entry allows a user to specify an IP Address or a subnet mask to define a unique class of machines that are allowed access.
For example, if a user wanted to grant access to a PC with an IP Address of 10.10.10.1 and any PC on a subnet of
192.168.10.xxx, then the Access List would be defined as:
AccessClient1 …[10.10.10.1/32]
AccessClient2…. [192.168.10.0/24]
Access List
Enforcement
E The Access List Enforcement allows a user to grant access via ping, telnet, HTTP, FTP, and SNMP to a well-defined list of client machines.
Access List Enforcement toggles between [Enabled] and
[Disabled]. If disabled, then any client machine will be able to connect via ping, telnet, HTTP, FTP, and SNMP.
If enabled, then only those machines specified in the Access
Client List will be allowed to connect via ping, telnet, HTTP, and
SNMP.
Save Parameters S
Exit X
This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
187
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.1.3 Feature Configuration Page
The Feature Configuration page is activated from the Administration page .
The Feature Configuration menu communicates to the user the current availability for each of the features. If a feature is marked “Unavailable” then the feature is a FAST feature. FAST features must be purchased from Comtech EF Data.
The Feature Configuration menu contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Ping Reply
Telnet
Entry Description
P Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]
Enabled tells the IP M odule to respond to ping requests directed to the IP M odule Ethernet Interface.
Disabled tells the IP M odule not to respond to ping requests. This is used as a security feature to prevent unauthorized parities from determining if a device exists via the ping utility.
E Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]
Enabled allows access via Telnet.
Disabled denies access via Telnet.
188
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields
SNMP
IGMP
Downlink Route All
Available Multicast
Quality of Service (QoS)
Transmit 3xDES Encryption
Entry Description
N Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]
Enabled tells the IP M odule to respond to SNMP requests against the private and public MIB.
Disabled tells the IP M odule not to respond to SNMP requests against the private and public MIB.
I Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]
The receive portion of a IP M odule will utilize the IP
M odule as an IGMP server. The transmit portion of a IP
M odule will utilize the IP M odule as an IGMP client.
The IGMP Information Page configures the IP M odule to report an interest to join a Multicast group on an
IGMP server. The IGMP protocol is used to regulate
Multicast traffic on a LAN segment to prevent information of no interest from consuming bandwidth on the LAN.
M Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]
Enabled tells the IP M odule to route all Multicast packets coming from the Satellite interface to the
Ethernet LAN regardless of the Route Table entries.
Disabled tells the IP M odule not to automatically forward all Multicast packets. This IP M odule will only forward multicast traffic received from the satellite to the
Ethernet port if the multicast route exists in the Route
Table.
Q Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled].
This feature must be purchased.
Enabled tells the IP M odule to apply configured QoS rules on all packets going out the Satellite Interface.
When Disabled the IP M odule does not apply QoS rules for outgoing packets.
T Toggles [Enabled] and [Disabled]
This feature must be purchased.
Enabled allows the
Satellite Interface.
IP M odule to assign a TX key to encrypt packets for a specific route being sent over the
When Disabled the IP M odule cannot encrypt packets being sent over the Satellite interface.
189
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields Entry
Receive 3XDES Decryption Read
Only
Description
This feature must be purchased.
Available allows the IP M odule to decrypt packets being received from the Satellite Interface.
When Unavailable the IP M odule cannot decrypt packets received from the Satellite Interface. This option is auto-sensed by a bit carried in packet headers. This option is always available if the option is purchased.
Tx Header Compression
Rx Header Compression
Tx Payload Compression
Rx Payload Compression
H This option will compress headers. Headers available for compression can be referenced in Section 1.4.3 IP
Header Compression. Note that in easyConnect mode all Ethernet Headers will be compressed whether or not this feature is enabled. In Router mode, this screen will show Available, and the option must be enabled per route in Route table.
K This option tells the system to expect received streams to be Header compressed. Note a CDM-IP modem must receive all streams compressed or not compressed. The modem has no way to distinguish between compressed or not compressed.
C This option allows a stream of traffic to be payload compressed. Payload is considered everything inside the HDLC satellite frame. Therefore, IP headers could be compressed as well. Note that in easyConnect mode, the option is enabled/disabled for all traffic. In
Router mode, Payload compression will show Available, and one must set the option Per Route in Routing table.
Read
Only
Receive payload compression option allows a unit receiving a stream of data that has been payload compressed to be correctly uncompressed. This option is auto-sensed by a bit carried in packet headers. This option is always available if the option is purchased.
Vipersat Feature Codes
Save Parameters
Exit
F This option allows a user to enter a Vipersat featues enable code that has been provided by Comtech
Vipersat for modem configured to operate under VMS control.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
190
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.1.4 3xDES Encrypt Configuration Page
The 3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration page is activated from the Administration page .
Note: This menu will only be accessible if the 3xDES FAST feature has been purchased and the license key has been entered through the modem front panel.
The 3xDES Encrypt Configuration contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
3xDES Status
Entry
Read
Only
Description
Displays status, [Available] or [Unavailable].
Available is displayed when the 3xDES feature has been installed.
Unavailable is displayed when the 3xDES feature has not been installed.
191
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Transmit Encrypt Enabled
Receive Decrypt Enabled
Transmit Key 1 - 8
Receive Key 1 - 8
Save Parameters
Exit
Read
Only
Read
Only
1 through
8
A through
H
S
X
Displays feature status. This field is updated via the
Features Configuration menu.
If Transmit Encrypt is disabled, then all traffic processed by the IP M odule will be transmitted in the clear regardless of the 3xDES encryption key specified in the Route table.
Displays feature status. This field updates via the
Features Configuration menu.
These 3xDES keys are used to encrypt traffic being sent over the Satellite Interface.
The key is entered in HEX (48 digits max)
These 3xDES keys are used to decrypt traffic being received from the Satellite Interface.
The key is entered in HEX (48 digits max)
This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
IMPORTANT
A 24 Byte [192-bit] 3xDES key is actually a combination of 3 single DES keys of 8
Bytes [64-bits]. The CLI will display the Key with a space separating the Key into 3 sections. In the screen capture above, Transmit Key 1 is displayed as:
2222222222222222 4444444444444444 6666666666666666
Consider the first section as Key1A, the second as Key1B, and the third as Key1C.
Data is first encrypted with Key1A and then decrypted with Key1B and again encrypted with Key1C. So if a user specifies all the three Keys the same, (like 48
‘1's OR all the characters in DES key the same) the cumulative effect of 3xDES is just a single DES. When data is first encrypted with Key1A and decrypted with Key1B we get back the original data and then when encrypted with Key1C results in a total effect of single DES key.
Because of this, the user is required to enter unique 64-bit keys . If any 2 sections of the Key match, the IP M odule will respond Invalid Key - Please Reenter
Also, The Least Significant bit of each byte in a 24 Byte [192-bit] 3xDES key is reserved for the DES Algorithm for parity. Entries of 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, B, D, or F will have all the corresponding bit positions masked. So a Key entry of:
1111111133333333 5555555577777777 99999999BBBBBBBB becomes
1010101032323232 5454545476767676 98989898BABABABA
192
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.1.5 SMTP Configuration Page
The SMTP Configuration page is activated from the Administration page .
Exit
The SMTP Configuration contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
SMTP Server IP Address
SMTP Domain
SMTP Destination Name
Save Parameters
Entry
I
Description
The mail server address from where you want to send the email.
D Set to the domain of the email server (usually found to the right of the @ symbol in an email address).
N Set the email recipient names (usually found to the left of the @ symbol in an email address).
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Note: SMTP can be used to send an email to Comtech EF Data IP Modem Support [email protected]
using the Support Web Page by connecting to the
IP M odule with a Web Browser. The Support Web Page allows you to compose an email message for questions or problems with the IP M odule. The user can also select to automatically attach the IP M odule parameter file in order to facilitate troubleshooting or to resolve configuration issues.
193
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.1.6 SNMP Configuration Page
The SNMP Configuration page is activated from the Administration page .
The SNMP Configuration contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
SNMP Read Community
SNMP Write Community
SNMP Trap Community
SNMP Trap Destination
SNMP Trap Version
Entry Description
R GET community - allows GET operations to all portions of the IP M odule Controller and CDM-
570L modem MIBs.
W SET community string - allows SET operations to all portions of the IP M odule Controller and
CDM-570L modem MIBs.
T Community String that will be set in the
Community field of all outgoing traps. This field on the trap PDU may be checked by the network manager application to determine if the trap came from a “trusted” agent.
D
V
IP address where all traps/notifications will be sent. If a network management application is running in the network, it should be configured to receive traps and its IP address should be entered here.
Determines whether an SNMPv1 trap or
SNMPv2 notification is sent.
194
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields
SNMP Enable
Authentication Trap
SNMP System Contact
SNMP System Name
SNMP System Location
SNMP Stats
Save Parameters
Exit
Entry Description
A Determines whether a MIB2 authentication trap will be sent when a PDU with an invalid community string is encountered. A community string is invalid when it does not match the
Admin, the Read Write, or the Read Only community strings.
C
N
O
N
User defined SNMP Contact information.
User defined SNMP Name information.
User defined SNMP Location information.
S
X
Displays statistics concerning the operation of the SNMP agent (number of IN SNMP packets, number of OUT SNMP packets, number of OUT
Traps, etc.)
This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
195
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
16.2.1.7 Working Mode
The Working Mode page is activated from the Administration page .
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Changing the Working Mode (easyConnect or Router Mode) will require a system reboot.
IMPORTANT
The Working Mode contains the following option/field:
Menu Options/Fields
IP M odule Working Mode
Entry Description
C Select 1 [Easy Connect Mode] or 2 [Router Mode]. easyConnect Mode – default operating mode, and operates at 10 baseT only. In this mode the IP M odule will forward both IP and non-IP datagrams over satellite without any defined routes.
Router Mode - IP packets are routed based on the
Route table information input by the user. Non-IP packets are discarded. Operates at 10 and 100 baseT.
See Chapter 16 for a more detailed description of the
Working Modes.
16.2.1.8 WAN Framing Mode
The WAN Framing Mode page is activated from the Administration page .
The WAN Framing Mode contains the following option/field:
Menu Options/Fields
WAN Framing Mode
Entry Description
C Select 1 [Comtech Native] or
2 [SMR5000 Compatibility].
Comtech Native – default operating mode. In this mode the IP M odule will communicate with another CDM-
570L, or a compatible CDM-IP 550 or CDM-IP 300L.
See Section 16.3 Modem Compatibility for compatibility requirements.
SMR5000 Compatibility – only used when the CDM-
570L/ IP M odule is integrated into a Vipersat network with existing SMR5000’s. Refer to Vipersat Operator’s
Manual for more information.
196
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.1.9 easyConnect
Multicast Option
The e asyConnect Multicast Option allows multicast to be either transmitted or received through the modem. This applies to easyConnect mode only. easyConnect mode will normally filter multicast traffic.
IMPORTANT
If the Working Mode is easyConnect and multicast traffic is intended to pass across a pair of modems, this option must be enabled on both modems.
The Header Compression Refresh Rates are configured from the Administration page.
Menu Options/Fields
Header comp refresh rate (in pkts) for UDP/RTP1
Entry Description
H Selects how often a single, full header
UDP/RTP1 packet is transmitted with Header
Compression enabled.
Header comp refresh rate (in pkts) for UDP
Header comp refresh rate (in pkts) for all others
U Selects how often a single, full header UDP packet is transmitted with Header Compression enabled.
O Selects how often a single, full header packet is transmitted with Header Compression enabled
(for all other types of IP headers).
The Header Compression Refresh Rates determines how many compressed header packets will be sent before a single full header packet is sent. Some compressed header traffic could be lost during deteriorated satellite link conditions. Sending a full header packet will allow the return of the traffic stream. Refresh rates from 1 to 600 can be individually selected for
UDP/RTP1, UDP and all other IP headers. The Refresh Rate can be decreased for poor satellite link conditions or increased to further reduce overhead.
IMPORTANT easyConnect mode will automatically use Header Compression (even if Header
Compression option has not been purchased). Because of this, some of the initial traffic sent between two devices will not be received over the satellite until a full
Header is transmitted. For example, the default Header Compression Refresh
Rate is 50 packets. If a ping is sent over the satellite it will time out until the full
Header packet is sent. The Header Compression Refresh Rate on the
Administration Menu can be reduced to minimize the amount of traffic lost when traffic is first sent between two devices. Once communication between two devices has been established, both CDM-IP modems will be able to receive all traffic, unless one CDM-IP is power cycled or reset.
197
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The Payload Compression Refresh Rates determines how many compressed payload packets will be sent before a single full payload packet is sent. Some compressed payload traffic could be lost during deteriorated satellite link conditions. Sending a full payload packet will allow the return of the traffic stream. Refresh rates from 1 to 600 can be individually selected. The Refresh Rate can be decreased for poor satellite link conditions or increased to further reduce overhead.
The Telnet timeout determines how many minutes (1-60) of Telnet inactivity before the Telnet session is automatically terminated by the IP Module.
IMPORTANT
The IP M odule does not allow concurrent access to the menu via telnet and the console port. If a user connects via telnet, IP M odule automatically disables the console port for the duration of the Telnet session. All menu pages allow a Telnet logout to end a Telnet session. Also, the IP M odule will automatically end a
Telnet session after a period of inactivity (configurable from 1 to 60 minutes).
198
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
The Interface Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page .
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The Interface Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Ethernet Interface (fei0)
Satellite/HDLC Interface
(hdl0)
Save Parameters
Entry Description
E Activates Fast Ethernet page.
H Activates Satellite/HDLC Interface page.
Exit
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
199
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.2.1 Fast Ethernet Interface (fei0) Page
The Fast Ethernet Interface page is activated from the Interface Configuration page .
The Fast Ethernet Interface page contains the following options/fields:
Menu
Options/Fields
MAC Address
Entry Description
Speed/Mode
IP Address
Subnet Prefix
Length
Save
Parameters
Exit
Read Only The MAC Address defines the hardware destination MAC
Address that is used when an Ethernet packet is destined for the IP M odule Traffic Ethernet Interface. This address is unique and has been assigned permanently at the factory.
E The Ethernet Speed Mode is a configurable parameter and thus its exact setting can vary between specific installations.
The default setting allows the Ethernet port to auto negotiate its link speed on power-up. Selections are:
1 -- Auto
2 -- 10 MB/sec Half Duplex
3 -- 100 MB/sec Half Duplex
4 -- 10 MB/sec Full Duplex
5 -- 100 MB/sec Full Duplex
I
M
S
X
This is the IP Address assigned the Ethernet Traffic Interface.
Enter the IP address in aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format
Specifies the Subnet Mask assigned to the Ethernet Traffic
Interface.
Enter the subnet mask prefix length (8...30)
This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
200
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.2.2 Satellite/HDLC Interface (HDL0) Page
The Satellite/HDLC Interface (HDL0) page is activated from the Interface Configuration page .
The Satellite/HDLC Interface page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
HDLC Addr Mode
Entry Description
M Toggles [Point-To-Point Mode], [Small Network Mode], and [Large Network Mode]
Point-To-Point Mode – In this mode of operation, no
HDLC address is transmitted over the satellite link.
The restrictions on using this mode are that it can only be used for pure Point-to-Point configurations.
Small Network Mode (up to 254 addresses) - In this mode of operation a single byte HDLC address will be transmitted over the satellite link (0x1 – 0xFE).
Large Network Mode (up to to 32766 addresses) - In this mode of operation a two byte HDLC address will be transmitted over the satellite link (0x1 – 0xFFFE).
See Chapter 6 for a more detailed description of the
Working Modes.
H Activates Receiver HDLC Addresses page. Receive HDLC Channel
Addresses
Save Parameters
Exit
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
201
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.2.3 Receiver HDLC Addresses Page
The Receiver HDLC Addresses page is activated from the Satellite/HDLC Interface page.
This page allows the user to define up to four HDLC addresses that can carry user information on the Satellite Interface.
Delete HDLC Addr
Save Parameters
Exit
The Satellite/HDLC Interface page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
HDLC Addr 1 - 4
Entry Description
1 - 4 HDLC address in hex <1 - FFFE, enter = 0001>
Note: HDLC addresses are not used in Point-To-
Point Mode.
Small Network Mode (up to 254 addresses) - The user is limited to valid addresses between the values of
0x01 and 0xFE.
Large Network Mode (up to 32766 addresses) - The user is limited to valid addresses between the values of
0x0001 and 0x7FFF.
See Chapter 6 for a more detailed description of the use of HDLC Addresses.
D Enter the HDLC entry to delete <1...4>
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
202
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
16.2.3 QoS (Quality of Service) Configuration Page
The QoS Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page .
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
DiffServ Rules Configuration
Save Parameters
Exit
The QoS Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
QoS Mode
QoS Rules Configuration
Entry
M Select;
Description
1 - Rule-Max/Pri Mode
2 - Rule-Min/Max Mode
3 - DiffServ Mode
Q Select to define QoS rules for Max/Pri Mode or
Min/Max Mode
D Select to define QoS rules for DiffServ Mode
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
203
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
16.2.3.1 QoS Configuration Page – Max/Priority Mode
The QoS Rules Configuration page is activated from the QoS Configuration page.
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The QoS Rules Configuration page contains the following options/fields when in Max/Pri Mode:
Menu Options/Fields
Rule 01 – 08 (32)
(The 8 currently displayed
QoS Rules, up to 32 can be defined).
By selecting a QoS Rule, the user will be asked to define the following:
Entry
1 - 08
Description
Max/Pri QoS can be assigned to up to 32 different types of flows to be defined by the user. Flows can be defined by any combination of Protocol (FTP, UDP, RTP, etc.),
Source/Destination IP (specific or range), and/or Layer 3
Source/Destination Port.
See Section 15.4.5 Quality of Service for a more detailed description of this QoS option.
204
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Specify priority for the rule
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
1
2
3
15
16
17
11
12
13
14
8
9
10
6
7
4
5
UDP - User Datagram Protocol
TCP - Transmission Control Protocol
RTP - Real Time Protocol (includes all RTP – VOCE,
VDEO, and RTPS)
VOCE – Voice RTP
VDEO - Video RTP
RTPS – RTP Signaling
FTP - File Transfer Protocol only
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
TELN - Telnet
SMTP - Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol
SAP – Service Announcement Protocol
ORCL - Oracle application traffic
CTRX - Citrix application traffic
SQL – Structured Query Language
IP – Internet Protocol (all inclusive)
N-IP - Non-Internet Protocol (all inclusive)
1 - 8 Priority 1 - Highest
Priority 8 - Lowest
1 for QoS Priority-1
2 for QoS Priority-2
3 for QoS Priority-3
4 for QoS Priority-4
5 for QoS Priority-5
6 for QoS Priority-6
7 for QoS Priority-7
8 for QoS Priority-8
205
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Maximum bandwidth in kbps <0 -
99999, enter = 99999
0 -
99999
Source IP address <enter = 0.0.0.0>: x.x.x.x Enter desired Source IP Address or subnet.
If no Source IP is desired, select enter, Source IP will be displayed as ‘***’
0,8-32 Enter desired Source subnet bits. Number of source subnet bits <0,8-
32, enter = 0>:
If no Source subnet is desired, select enter, Source subnet will be displayed as ‘/*’
Destination IP address <enter =
0.0.0.0>:
Enter desired Maximum Bandwidth in kbps.
If no Maximum is desired, select enter, Bandwidth will be displayed as ‘99999’
Number of Destination subnet bits
<0,8-32, enter = 0>:
Specify TCP/UDP source port [MIN]
(1 - 65535)<Enter: ***> x.x.x.x Enter desired Destination IP Address or subnet.
If no Destination IP is desired, select enter, Destination IP will be displayed as ‘***’
0,8-32 Enter desired Destination subnet bits.
If no Destination subnet is desired, select enter, Destination subnet will be displayed as ‘/*’
1 -
65535
Enter desired TCP/UDP source port (or Min port of a range).
If no TCP/UDP source port is desired, select enter, Source port will be displayed as ‘***’
Specify TCP/UDP source port [MAX]
(1 - 65535)<Enter: ***>
1 -
65535
Specify TCP/UDP destination port
[MIN] (1 - 65535)<Enter: ***>
Specify TCP/UDP destination port
[MAX] (1 - 65535)<Enter: ***>
1 -
65535
1 -
65535
Enter desired TCP/UDP source port (or Max port of a range).
Will not display if no MIN TCP/UDP source port was selected.
Enter desired TCP/UDP destination port (or Min port of a range).
If no TCP/UDP destination port is desired, select enter,
Destination port will be displayed as ‘***’.
Enter desired TCP/UDP destination port (or Max port of a range).
Will not display if no MIN TCP/UDP destination port was selected.
Set WRED (Weighted Random Early
Discard) <Y or N><Enter : Y>
Specify Filtering for the rule <Y or
N><Enter : N>
Y or N Select to enable Weighted Random Early Detect.
Delete
Base [1]
QoS [ ]
Save Parameters
Exit
Y or N Select to prevent traffic defined in rule to be forwarded.
Default N = not filtered
D Enter the QoS Rule to delete <1..32>
B Select Base to view, edit, or display a different set of 8 QoS
Rules. For example, if 8 QoS Rules have been defined, add a new rule by selecting B 9. The QoS Configuration page will refresh and now display QoS Rules 9 – 16.
Read
Only
S
Displays state of QoS option – Unavailable, Enabled Disabled. If available, QoS is Enabled or Disabled from the Administrator
Features Page.
This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
206
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.4.1 QoS Configuration Page – Min/Max Mode
The QoS Rules Configuration page is activated from the QoS Configuration page .
In Minimum/Maximum Mode, the QoS Rules Configuration page contains the same options/fields as in Max/Pri Mode with the following exceptions:
Priority is not assigned.
A Minimum Bandwidth can be assigned, or select enter to assign no Min Bandwidth
(displayed as ‘0’).
See Section 15.4.5 Quality of Service for a more detailed description of this QoS option.
207
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.4.2 QoS Configuration Page – DiffServ Mode
The QoS Rules Configuration page is activated from the QoS Configuration page .
In DiffServ Mode, the IP Module will prioritize all traffic by the DSCP value contained within the IP header of each packet. All packets that do not have a DSCP value will be placed in the Default Queue and have a Priority of 9.
Configuration of DiffServe Rules is only allowed for Assured Forwarding Classes 1-4
(Rule 9-12), where a Minimum and Maximum Bandwidth can be assigned.
See Section 15.4.5 Quality of Service for a more detailed description of this QoS option.
208
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The Route Table Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page .
IMPORTANT
Do not operate a CDM-IP modem satellite link where both IP modems have a
Default Route to the satellite. For example, if both IP modems had this Route Table entry:
IP Dest Next Hop Type
0.0.0.0/0 Point-to-Point ToSat
In this setup, any traffic forwarded by an IP modem that did not have a valid IP host at the remote LAN would then be resent by the remote IP modem. This traffic would continue to be forwarded until the TTL expired. This “routing loop” will limit the performance of the IP modem by wasting satellite bandwidth.
209
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The Route Table Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry
Route001-Route008
(256)
(The 8 currently displayed routes, up to
256 can be defined)
1-8
Description
Route Table allows user to define how packets the IP
M odule receives are routed. Defining an entry in this table is similar to using 'route add' command of machines that support that command. For each route, the user must define:
1. A name assigned by the user to reference the route.
The assigned name cannot contain any whitespace and must be unique.
2. The destination address of an IP packet of interest.
The number of network addresses that are governed by the selected destination entry, i.e., subnet mask.
The Next Hop IP address. This is the IP where the packet will be routed for further processing. The Next Hop IP Address for traffic to be sent over the satellite will be the desired
HDLC address.
Point-to-Point – no HDLC address
Small Network - 0x1 – 0xFE
Large Network – 0x1 – 0xFFFE
Also, a route can be defined to have IP M odule send traffic to another IP address on the same subnet as the Ethernet interface.
Optionally : If the user enters a multicast address (224.0.0.0-
239.255.255.255) as the destination IP address, then the following parameters will be requested:
Route MultiCast packets from Ethernet to Satellite? [y/n]
The option allows the user to specify if multicast packets that match the provided IP address will be routed from the
Ethernet to Satellite. “No” means that the packets will be discarded.
Route MultiCast packets from Satellite to Ethernet? [y/n]
The option allows the user to specify if multicast packets that match the provided IP address will be routed from the
Satellite to Ethernet. “No” means that the packets will be discarded.
Multicast Routes always have a subnet length of 32 and the next hop is 0.0.0.0 because it is not applicable.
Note: IP M odule does allow the specification of one and only one default route. Destination IP = 0.0.0.0
Subnet Length = 0. The default route can be defined to send traffic to either the Satellite or Ethernet interface.
This will cause all packets that do not match any other route to be sent to the destination you have defined for further processing.
210
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields Entry
Base B
Description
The Route Table menu allows the user to view up to 8 different routes per screen. To allow editing on any of the 256 entries that can be defined, the user can select a base address to control which 8 routes are displayed. For example, if the user wants to edit Routes 32-40, then a Base value of 32 should be defined.
Delete Route
Display
D Route Name to delete.
P Displays all of the routes that are currently defined in the system. This will include automatically generated routes that are provided to simplify provisioning of the system. The information displayed is: Route Name, DestIP/SnetBits, Next
Hop, HDLC, and Flags.
PerRoute
Downlink Mcast
Save Parameters
Exit
E Enter to enable Header Compression, Payload Compression or 3xDES Encryption on a Per Route basis.
Read
Only
Read only status of Downlink Multicast (Enabled or
Disabled). This feature is enabled or disabled on the
Administrator Feature page.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
Selecting Per Route will display the following menu:
211
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Header Compression, Payload Compression or 3xDES Encryption can be configured on a per
Route basis by selecting the route number.
DES key select <Choose [1-8] for [key1-key8] 0=Clear 9=Random Enter= Clear>:
The value of 0 [CLEAR] will force the IP Module to not encrypt any traffic destined for the route.
The value of Key[1-8] will use the key specified in the 3xDES Encrypt/Decrypt Configuration
Page to encrypt the traffic destined for the route.
The value of Random will cause the IP Module to randomly use any of the 8 TX Keys to encrypt the traffic destined for the route.
IMPORTANT
3xDES Encryption: easyConnect Mode – By definition, there are no routes in easyConnect operation, so there is no way to assign different keys to traffic. When TX 3xDES encryption is enabled in easyConnect , all traffic (IP and non-IP) is encrypted and
TX Key1 is always used.
Router Mode – Different TX keys can be assigned to different routes and some routes can be sent unencrypted [Clear]. If Random is selected, then all TX Keys must be configured with different keys and the receiving IP modem must have identical corresponding RX Keys. The encryption.
IP M odule will randomly utilize all 8 Keys for
212
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
16.2.6 Protocol Configuration Page
The Protocol Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page .
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Exit
The Protocol Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
IGMP
ARP
Save Parameters
Entry
I Activates IGMP
Description page.
A Activates ARP Table Utilities page.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
213
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.6.1 IGMP Information Page
The IGMP information page is activated from the Protocol Configuration page .
The IGMP Information page allows a user to view the IGMP clients that are actively listening to content being provided by the IP Module. It also allows the user to determine how the Ethernet Interface is configured either to receive requests to join IGMP groups or announce groups for others to join.
The IGMP Information page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
IGMP
View IGMP Table
CDM-IP as Server:
IGMP query period
CDM-IP as Server:
IGMP max. response time
Entry
Read
Only
Description
Read only showing IGMP status (Enabled or Disabled).
V This table reports the content that clients have subscribed to the IP M odule using the IGMP protocol.
This allows a user to determine which services are being used and the minimum time before a service will be terminated.
Q The IGMP protocol requests that a server periodically publish to users on the LAN the Multicast IP Addresses that it can service. The IGMP query period defines the time interval (in seconds) between each of these queries for membership.
R The IGMP max response time defines the time interval
(in seconds) that the IP M odule should wait before it assumes that no parties are interested in the content published via an IGMP query. This option is expressed in seconds, and the max response time that is accepted by the IP M odule is 25 seconds.
214
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields
CDM-IP as Server:
Number of missed responses before leaving
IGMP group
CDM-IP as Client:
Recognized IGMP queries
Entry Description
M Defines the number of membership queries that go unanswered from LAN clients before the Ethernet
Interface will no longer forward data for that IGMP group.
Consider a IP M odule that has the IGMP query period set to 60 seconds and the number of missed responses set to 3. If a client joins an IGMP group, then the service to that group will not be discontinued until no clients respond to a query from the IP M odule for a period of 60*3 = 180 seconds.
C The Recognize IGMP Queries parameters determines if the IP M odule should respond to periodic queries from an IGMP server that publishes a request to join a specified multicast group. This parameter can assume one of (2) values:
1. Yes
2. No
If set to YES, the IP M odule will respond to an IGMP query by requesting to join a Multicast Group published by the server that is defined in the IP M odule’s route table.
If set to NO, the IP M odule will not respond to IGMP queries from a server. In this type of configuration, the
IP M odule may be configured to unconditionally request to join an IGMP group at an interval specified by the “Unsolicited Report Interval” option in the
Transmitter IGMP Client Configuration Page.
215
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Menu Options/Fields
CDM-IP as Client:
IGMP Version used for
Unsolicited Reports
CDM-IP as Client:
Force Cisco Router Alert
Option sending V1 reports
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Entry Description
U This parameter defines which version of the IGMP protocol should be followed when attempting to join a group on a Multicast Server via an unsolicited report.
When the IP M odule is configured to Recognize IGMP
Queries, the IP M odule will respond to a query in the same version that the server used to initiate the query.
This parameter will assume one of (2) values:
1. V1
2. V2
The value of V1 will configure the IP M odule to use the
IGMP Version 1 protocol to join a Multicast Group available on an IGMP Server in response to an IGMP
Query.
The value of V2 will configure the IP M odule to use the
IGMP Version 2 protocol to join a Multicast Group available on an IGMP Server in response to an IGMP
Query.
The user can toggle the value of the IGMP Version used for Unsolicited Reports from ‘V1’ and ‘V2’ with each selection.
A Some Cisco Routers may require the definition of a
Router Alert Option to recognize a report from a Client to join a Multicast group. The IP Router Alert Option is defined in RFC2113 and was introduced by Cisco.
While this option is not part of the IGMP standard, most
IGMP V2 implementations contain this option.
However, most implementations of IGMP V1 do not contain this option. This parameter is defined to prevent possible conflicts in networks in which a Cisco
Router is configured as an IGMP V1 server.
This parameter can assume one of the following (2) values:
1. YES
2. NO
If set to YES, the IP M odule will generate IGMP reports to join Multicast groups as specifically required by some Cisco Router configurations.
If set to NO, the IP M odule will generate IGMP reports to join Multicast groups as defined and implemented by most IGMP servers.
216
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields
CDM-IP as Client:
Unsolicited Report Interval, sec
Save Parameters
Exit
Entry
I
Description
The Unsolicited Report Interval configures the IP
M odule to generate unsolicited reports to join a
Multicast Group at specified time intervals. Each unsolicited report to join a Multicast group will use the version of the IGMP protocol as specified by the IGMP
Version used for Unsolicited Reports option.
The value of the Unsolicited Report Interval specifies the number of seconds between unsolicited reports. A value of zero implies that no unsolicited reports to join a Multicast group should be generated by the IP
M odule.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
217
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
16.2.6.2 ARP Table Utilities Page
The ARP Table Utilities page is activated from the Protocol page.
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The ARP Table Utilities page allows the user to view and edit the ARP table defined by the IP Module. It allows up to 256 static IP->MAC ARP entries.
The ARP Table Utilities page contains the following options/fields:
218
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields
Entry001 - 008
Add IP to MAC ARP entry
Delete ARP Entry
Display ARP Tbl
Flush ARP Table
Base
Save Parameters
Exit
Entry Description
1 - 8 The user can define up to 256 static ARP definitions on the IP M odule. This table allows the user to operate/view up to 8 of these definitions. An ARP definition is defined as:
1. Unicast IP Address
This IP Address is used as a lookup into the ARP table when the
Address.
IP M odule needs to resolve a MAC or HDLC
Restrictions :
IP Address must be on the same subnet as the
Ethernet Interface.
IP Address must be a valid Unicast address (Not
Multicast, broadcast, etc.)
The MAC Address defines the hardware destination
MAC Address that is used when an Ethernet packet is destined for an IP machine from the IP M odule.
M Adds an IP to MAC ARP entry.
D Allows the user to delete a Static ARP entry. Queries the user for the IP address of the ARP entry to delete.
A Displays the entire IP to MAC ARP table. Includes the
Static as well as dynamic ARP entries. Displays blocks of 10 ARP entries. Hit ‘Enter’ key to display next 10 entries or ‘Escape’ to return to ARP Table Utilities page.
F This option allows the entire ARP table to be removed.
This is equivalent to performing the standard UNIX command “arp –d” on each address reported in an “arp
–a” command. The command only flushes the dynamic
ARP entries. The static ARP entries will not be removed.
B The ARP Table menu allows the user to view up to 8 different ARP definitions per screen. To allow editing on any of the 256 entries that can be defined, the user can select a base address to control which 8 ARP entries are displayed. For example, if the user wants to edit static ARP Entries 32-40, then a Base value of 32 should be defined.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
219
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
The Vipersat Configuration page is activated from the Main Menu page .
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Exit
The Vipersat Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
STDMA Mode
Automatic Switching
Unit Role
Expansion Unit
Bandwidth Group ID
Unit Name
Multicast Management IP Address
Multicast VMS Management IP
Address
Managing IP Address
Path Loss Data Multicast (PLDM)
Dynamic Power Config
Set Home State Parameters
Save Parameters
Entry Description
T
A
R
E
B
N
M
V
Only used when CDM-570L is used in a Vipersat system.
Refer to Vipersat Operators Manual for more information.
I
P
C
H
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
220
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
16.2.8
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Modem Parameters Page
The Modem Parameters page is activated by selecting Satellite Modem Configuration from the Main Menu page .
The Modem Parameters page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Modem Type
Entry Description
Read
Only
Modem type – CDM-570L.
T Activates Transmit Modem Configuration page. Transmit Modem
Configuration
Receive Modem
Configuration
AUPC
Utilities
Save Parameters
Exit
R Activates Receive Modem Configuration page.
P Activates AUPC page.
U Activates Utilities page.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
221
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.8.1 Transmit Modem Configuration Page
The Transmit Modem Configuration page is activated from the Modem Parameters page .
The Transmit Modem Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Note: Turbo FEC selections only displayed if Turbo card is installed.
Menu Options/Fields
Transmit Frequency
Transmit Data Rate
Encoder Type
Entry Description
Q Valid ranges are from 950 to 1950 MHz
D The rate at which the Modem will send traffic over the
Satellite Interface.
Valid ranges are from 2.4 to 5000 kbps
T 1 - NONE
2 - VIT
3 - TURBO
4 – VIT+RS
5 – TCM-RS
6 – LDPC
222
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Menu Options/Fields
Encoder Rate
Modulation Type
Spectrum
Scrambler
Tx Output Power
Carrier
Save Parameters
Exit
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Entry Description
R 1 – 5/16
2 – 21/44
3 – 1/2
4 – 2/3
5 – 3/4
6 – 7/8
7 – 0.95
9 – 1/1
M Sets transmit modulation type
1 -- BPSK
2 -- QPSK
3 -- OQPSK
4 -- 8PSK
5 -- 16-QAM
U 1 - NRM
2 - INV
B 1 - OFF
2 - ON
P Valid ranges are from 0.0 to 40.0 dBm
(minus sign assumed)
C 1 - OFF
2 - ON
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
223
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.8.2 Receive Modem Configuration Page
The Receive Modem Configuration page is activated from the Modem Parameters page .
The Receive Modem Configuration Page contains the following options/fields:
Note: Turbo FEC selections only diplayed if Turbo card is installed
Menu Options/Fields
Receive Frequency
Receive Data Rate
Decoder Type
Entry Description
Q Valid ranges are from 950 to 1950 MHz.
D Valid ranges are from 2.4 to 5000 kbps.
T 1 - NONE
2 - VIT
3 - TURBO
4 – VIT+RS
5 – TCM-RS
6 – LDPC
224
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Menu Options/Fields
Decoder Rate
Modulation Type
Spectrum
De-scrambler
Sweep Width
Eb/No Alarm Point
Save Parameters
Exit
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Entry Description
R 1 – 5/16
2 – 21/44
3 – 1/2
4 – 2/3
5 – 3/4
6 – 7/8
7 – 0.95
9 – 1/1
M Sets receive demodulation type
1 -- BPSK
2 -- QPSK
3 -- OQPSK
4 -- 8PSK
5 -- 16-QAM
U 1 - NRM
2 - INV
B 1 - OFF
2 - ON
W Valid ranges are from 0 to 200 kHz
(1 to 32HKz if symbol rate < 625Ksymbol)
P Valid ranges are from 0.1 to 16.0
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
225
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.8.3 AUPC Modem Configuration Page
The AUPC Modem Configuration page is activated from the Modem Parameters page .
The AUPC Modem Configuration page contains the following options/fields:
Note: AUPC Modem Configuration Page is only accessible if AUPC option is available.
Menu Options/Fields
Target Eb/No of Remote
Demod (dB)
Save Parameters
Entry Description
E Valid range are from 0.1 to 9.9 dB.
Exit
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
226
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The Operations and Maintenance page is activated from the Main Menu page .
The Operations and Maintenance page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry
Unit Information I
Boot From B
Upgrade To
PARAM Image
U
C
Description
Displays unit current operational Software information.
Determines which version of the IP M odule software package
(includes Application, FPGA, and FFPGA) will be loaded upon boot-up. The possible options are:
0. Latest - boot the newest software package based upon date.
1. Image1 - boot the software package loaded into the first slot in permanent storage.
2. Image2 - boot the software package loaded into the second slot in permanent storage.
Determines which installed software package (includes
Application, FPGA, and FFPGA) that the IP M odule will overwrite when upgrading with a new software package. The possible options are:
0. Oldest – overwrite the oldest software package based upon date.
1. Image1 – overwrite the software package loaded into the first slot in permanent storage.
2. Image2 – overwrite the software package loaded into the second slot in permanent storage.
Identifies the PARAM file that will be loaded on bootup. The options are:
227
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields Entry
Statistics
Event Log
Database Operations
Reset
Diagnostics
Save Parameters
Exit
T
E
D
R
G
S
X
Description
1. Last saved Parameter file
2. Factory – uses the internal, hard-coded factory default parameters.
Activates Statistics Menu page.
Activates Event Log page.
Activates Administrative Database Operations page.
Allows user to reboot the modem. It has the same logical effect of power-cycling the unit.
Activates Diagnostics page.
This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
228
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.9.1 Unit Information Page
The Unit Information page is activated by entering “ I ” from the Operations and
Maintenance page .
Current System time
Image # that the IP M odule is currently booted from
PARAM file that the IP M odule is currently configured from
Currently Loaded IP M odule SW
Boot
Bulk #1
Bulk #2
FPGA TX1
FPGA RX1
FPGA TX2
FPGA RX2
The Unit Information page contains the following informatiom:
DAY MONTH DATE hh:mm:ss YEAR
By default will be the Latest, unless “Boot From” is set to Image #1 or Image #2
Will be PARAM file from Flash or Factory Default
If no parameter file is found in flash memory.
Will display Build Date, CEFD FW#, Revision #, and size of each IP M odule SW file.
There will be a single Boot SW file.
The Bulk file contains all of the SW files for the IP
M odule and there are two slots available.
The FPGA TX/RX files are subsets of the Bulk SW.
229
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
EVENTLOG
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
PARAM
Will display the date/time that the EVENTLOG file was last updated.
Will display the date/time that the PARAM1 file was last updated. It will also show what user interface was used to last update the PARAM file.
From CLI will display ‘console’
From Web will display ‘http’
From Telnet will display the Telnet user login name
From SNMP will display ‘snmp
16.2.9.2 Statistics Page
The Statistics Menu page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance page .
The Statistics Menu page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
IP Statistics
QoS Statistics
Ethernet Statistics
WAN Statistics
Compression Statistics
Entry Description
R Displays Statistics for IP Routing and allows counters to be reset.
Q Displays Statistics for QoS and allows counters to be reset.
E Displays Statistics for the Ethernet Port and allows counters to be reset.
W Displays Statistics for the WAN (HDLC) Port and allows counters to be reset.
H Displays Statistics for Header & Payload Compression and allows counters to be reset.
230
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields
Clear all stats
Save Parameters
Exit
Entry Description
C Globally resets all statistics counters.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
IMPORTANT
All updates for Statistics information will occur once every 6 seconds.
231
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.9.2.1 IP Statistics Page
The IP Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page .
The IP Statistics page displays counts of the number of packets routed or dropped in the IP Module.
232
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The IP Statistics page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
From Ethernet - Total
To Ethernet - Total
To Ethernet - Unicast
To Ethernet - Multicast
To Ethernet - Broadcast
From Satellite - Total
To Sat - Total
To Sat - Unicast
To Sat - Multicast
To Sat - Broadcast
From Endstation - Total
To Endstation - Total
Received IGMP Packets
Received IP Options
Packets
Dropped - Total
Dropped - Bad IP Header
Checksum
Dropped - Bad Buffer
Length
Entry Description
Ethernet Statistics Page, Rx Good Frames
Ethernet Statistics Page, Tx Good Frames
Unicast packets to LAN
Multicast packets to LAN
Broadcast packets to LAN
WAN Statistics Page, Rx HDLC Packet Count
WAN Statistics Page, Tx HDLC Packet Count
Unicast packets to WAN
Multicast packets to WAN
Broadcast packets to WAN
Packets sent from IP M odule
Packets directed to IP M odule
Internet Group Management Packets received (used for management of multicast traffic).
Number of IP Options packets received.
Dropped - Bad IP Version
Dropped - TTL Expired
Dropped - No Route
Dropped - No ARP Entry
Dropped - QoS Filter Rule
Total Dropped Packets
Total Dropped Packets due to incorrect IP Header
Checksum.
IP length (as specified in packet header) was greater than payload received in the Ethernet packet. This would indicate the packet was truncated before arriving.
Total Dropped IP Version 6 Packets ( IP M odule only supports IP Version 4).
Total Dropped Packets due to Time To Live counter expired (TTL limits the number of hops, or seconds, before a packet reaches it’s destination).
Total Dropped Packets due to no Route for the destination in the IP M odule Route Table. These are packets that are directed to the IP M odule’s MAC address and the IP M odule will reply to the sender with a ICMP ‘Destination net unreachable’ message.
Total Dropped Packets due to no ARP entry in IP
M odule ARP Table. For example, if a IP M odule receives packets from the satellite for a host that is not in the ARP table, the IP M odule will send an ARP request. If there is no response, the packets will be dropped.
Total Dropped Packets due to a defined QoS filter rule.
233
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields
Dropped - Filtered Multicast
Dropped – Multicast Disable
Group
Dropped – EasyConnect
Multicast Option
Dropped - Filtered
Reset Packet Counters
(Clears WAN, Ether, IP stats)
Save Parameters
Entry Description
Total Dropped Multicast Packets received from the satellite due to no SAT → LAN or
Multicast packet was dropped because, although route existed, IGMP is being used, and there is no client requesting forwarding of this traffic or due to a IGMP
“leave group” message.
Total Dropped Multicast Packets received from the satellite due to the ‘easyConnect Multicast Option’ feature not being enabled in easyConnect Mode.
Indicates certain types of traffic that should not leak to
Satellite. For example, broadcasts destined for Satellite
LAN.
C Executing this menu option resets all WAN, Ethernet and IP Routing statistics gathered to zero.
Exit
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
234
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.9.2.2 QoS Statistics Page
The QoS Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page. The QoS Statistics page displays the statistics for the number of IP packets routed, based upon the defined
QoS Rules, by the IP Module.
NOTE: In DiffServ QoS Mode, statistics for the various DiffServe DSCP Classes will be in the following Queues:
Queue01 – Expedited Forwarding
Queue02 – Class 1 Precedence
Queue03 – Class 2 Precedence
Queue04 – Class 3 Precedence
Queue05 – Class 4 Precedence
Queue06 – Class 5 Precedence
Queue07 – Class 6 Precedence
Queue08 – Class 7 Precedence
Queue09 – Assured Forwarding Class 1
Queue10 – Assured Forwarding Class 2
235
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Queue11 – Assured Forwarding Class 3
Queue12 – Assured Forwarding Class 4
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The Ethernet Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page The Ethernet
Statistics page displays the statistics for the number of IP packets received from and sent to the Ethernet interface.
The Ethernet Statistics page contains the following options/fields
Menu Options/Fields Entry
Read
Only
Tx Bytes
Tx Good Frames
Description
The Ethernet Statistics presents the total packets transmitted and received for the Ethernet Port of the IP
M odule.
Number of bytes transmitted by this Ethernet interface.
Number of good frames transmitted by this Ethernet interface.
236
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields Entry
Tx Maximum Collision
Count
Tx DMA Underrun Error
Count
Tx Lost Carrier Sense
Count
Tx Deferred Count
Tx Single Collision Count
Tx Multiple Collision Count
Tx Total Collision Count
Rx Bytes
Rx Good Frames
Rx CRC Error Frame
Count
Rx Alignment Error Count
Description
Number of frames that are not transmitted because they encountered configured max collisions.
Number of frames not transmitted or re-transmitted due to transmit DMA underrun.
Number of frames transmitted by device despite the fact that it detected a deassertion of carrier sense.
Number of frames deferred before transmission due to activity on link.
Number of transmitted frames that encountered only one collision.
Number of transmitted frames that encountered more than one collision.
Total number of collisions encountered while attempting to transmit.
Number of bytes received by this Ethernet interface.
Count of good frames received by the Ethernet device.
Number of aligned frames discarded due to a CRC error.
Rx Resource Error Count
Rx FIFO Overrun Error
Count
Rx Collision Detect Error
Count (CDT)
Rx Runt Frames Count
Tx Flow Control Pause
Frames Transmitted
Rx Flow Control Pause
Frames Received
CLEAR
Save Parameters
Exit
C
Number of frames that are both misaligned and contain a
CRC error.
Count of good frames discarded due to unavailable resources.
Number of good frames discarded due to overflow of internal receive FIFO.
Number of frames encountered collisions during frame reception.
Count of undersize frames received by the Ethernet device.
Number of Flow Control frames transmitted by the device.
Number of Flow Control frames received by the device.
Resets all Ethernet Statistics
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
237
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The WAN Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page .
The WAN Statistics page displays counts of the number of packets routed or dropped in the IP Module
Satellite interface.
The WAN Statistics page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
WAN Rx Bad Addr Count
WAN Rx Pkt Proc CRC
Error Count
Entry
Read
Only
Description
The count of received frames that did not match any of the 4 HDLC addresses or the broadcast address.
Count of received frames that failed packet processor
CRC check.
238
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields
WAN Rx Abort/Octet Error
Count
WAN Rx Overrun Count
WAN HDLC CRC Error
Count
WAN Rx HDLC Payload
Count
WAN Rx HDLC Header
Count
WAN Rx HDLC Packet
Count
WAN Rx Err Invalid Flow Id
Entry Description
Count of aborted frames and octet error frames.
Count of received frames that exceeded max frame length of 2K bytes in length (Or) overflowed the HDLC buffer.
Number of received frames that failed HDLC CRC check.
The count of payload bytes that were received over satellite link excluding any frame overhead.
The count of HDLC header bytes received over satellite link including control, HDLC address, Flow ID, and CRC.
Number of packets received over satellite link.
WAN Rx Err SAR
Reassemble
WAN Rx Err Hdr Decomp
WAN Rx Err Mem Alignment
WAN Rx Err bad CRC
WAN TX Err - No Route
WAN TX Err - Pkt Start
WAN TX Err - Pkt Front
Length
WAN TX Err - Pkt End
Length
WAN TX Err - Pkt Invalid
Length
WAN TX Err - Pkt Dropped -
Sat overdriven
WAN Tx HDLC Header
Count
WAN Tx HDLC Payload
Count
WAN Tx HDLC Packet
Count
Ethernet traffic destined to go over WAN (kbps)
Number of packets which the flow identifier has been corrupted, does not fall into the range of acceptable values.
Number of packets unable to correctly reassemble a segmented packet.
Number of packets unable to correctly decompress the header information.
Number of packets discarded (caused by memory corruption).
Number of corrupted packets indicated by CRC check.
Internal Traffic Statistics used for Factory
Troubleshooting
This counter keeps track of number of HDLC header bytes transmitted over satellite link.
Number of payload bytes transmitted over satellite link.
Count of packets transmitted over satellite link.
Bandwidth required to forward Ethernet traffic before compression.
239
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields
Actual Satellite traffic (kbps)
Percentage of WAN
Bandwidth saved
Clear
Save Parameters
Exit
Entry Description
Current satellite bandwidth being used.
Displays percent of bandwidth being saved as a result of Header and/or Payload Compression, and optimized satellite framing.
C Resets all WAN statistics.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
240
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.9.2.5 Compression Statistics
The Compression Statistics page is activated from the Statistics Menu page .
The
Compression Statistics page displays counts of the number of bytes before and after for both Header and Payload Compression. For Header Compression, the percentage of bandwidth savings is displayed. For Payload Compression, the effective compression ratio is displayed.
The Compression Statistics page contains the following options/fields:
Note: Although the QoS option is not required to use Header or Payload Compression, the
Compression Statistics are displayed by QoS Rule flow Queues. If QoS is not enabled, all the Compression Statistics will fall within the Global Queue.
241
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Menu Options/Fields
Queue01…08
Global
CLEAR
ClrAll
Base [1]
Save Parameters
Exit
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Entry
Read
Only
Description
Statistics are displayed in a table format showing:
Pre-Header Comp Bytes
Post-Header Comp Bytes
Header Comp % Savings
Pre-Payload Comp Bytes
Read
Only
Post-Payload Comp Bytes
Payload Compression Ratio
All traffic that does not fall within a defined QoS Rule will be indicated in the ‘Global’ (Default Rule Queue).
C Allows a reset of the Statistics of a specific Queue.
A Resets all Compression Statistics.
B Allows the user to view up to 8 different Queues per screen. To allow editing on any of the 32 entries that can be defined, the user can select a base address to control which 8 QoS Queues are displayed. For example, if the user wants to view QoS Queues 16-24, then a Base value of 16 should be defined.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
242
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
16.2.9.3 Event Log Page
The Event Log page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance page.
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The Event Log page allows the user to capture all IP Module events to a log. The Event
Log Page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry
Logging Feature F
Description
Select to Enable/Disable Logging
Logging Level E Select
1 – Errors Only
2 – Errors and Warnings
3 – All Information
View log
Clear log
Save Parameters
V Select to view log. Will display most recent events.
Press any key to scroll through events or Escape to exit.
All events will display
Type – Error, Warning, or Information
Date/Time – NOTE: During Bootup, multiple Boot
Events will be created, but a Date/Time will only be seen when the Bootup has completed.
Category – Boot, Database, FTP logins, upgrade file transfers, Ethernet Link status change.
Description – Event details
C Select to clear log contents.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
Exit X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
243
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
NOTE: The full Event log file can be retrieved by FTP. Use Admin login and type command ‘get eventlog’. The entire Event log can then be viewed with a text viewer.
54
1041
Information
FTP
05/21/2004 10:12:04 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c
FTP Connected - 'User: comtech' logged in
53
520
52
534
51
364
Information
Database
Information
Boot
Information
Boot
05/21/2004 09:07:40 C:/Comtech/cimmib/cimMib.c
Set system clock to FRI MAY 21 09:07:40 2004
Unknown Unknown C:/Comtech/startup/usrAppInit.c
Configuring router using PARAM file
Unknown Unknown C:/Comtech/startup/usrAppInit.c
Detected Framer Module II.
Information
Database
Information
Boot
Information
Boot
Information
FTP
Information
FTP
Information
FTP
Information
FTP
Information
Telnet
Information
Telnet
Information
FTP
Information
FTP
Information
FTP
Information
FTP
42
385
41
180
40
540
39
863
38
1041
50
520
49
534
48
364
47
180
46
540
45
863
44
1041
43
421
05/21/2004 08:57:42 C:/Comtech/cimmib/cimMib.c
Set system clock to FRI MAY 21 08:57:42 2004
Unknown Unknown C:/Comtech/startup/usrAppInit.c
Configuring router using PARAM file
Unknown Unknown C:/Comtech/startup/usrAppInit.c
Detected Framer Module II.
05/21/2004 08:13:02 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c
Disconnected FTP
05/21/2004 07:58:06 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c
FTP Transfer complete
05/21/2004 07:58:04 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c
Image has been saved to FLASH
05/21/2004 07:57:40 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c
FTP Connected - 'User: comtech' logged in
05/21/2004 06:55:14 C:/Comtech/telnetd/telnetd.c
Telnet disconnected
05/21/2004 06:54:26 C:/Comtech/telnetd/telnetd.c
Connected host 10.6.6.94
05/21/2004 06:38:02 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c
Disconnected FTP
05/21/2004 06:23:07 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c
FTP Transfer complete
05/21/2004 06:23:06 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c
Image has been saved to FLASH
05/21/2004 06:22:43 C:/Comtech/ftp/ftpCallbacks.c
FTP Connected - 'User: comtech' logged in
244
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.9.4 Administrative Database Operations Page
Administrative Database Operations Page is activated from Operations and Maintenance Page .
Load Parameters from permanent storage
Exit
The Database Operations option allows the user to view, save, or erase an existing user configuration of the IP Module. An IP Module uses these types of configuration files to initialize itself on power-up.
The User Configuration File allows a User to over-write the values defined in the Factory
Configuration file. This allows full customization of a IP Module without erasing a set of parameters defined from the factory. The User configuration file can also be retrieved or overwritten via FTP by specifying the filename ‘param1’.
The Administrative Database Operations Page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields
Save Parameters to permanent storage
Restore Factory Default
Save Parameters
Entry Description
P This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the IP M odule to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
R Restores the IP M odule settings to “safe” values as defined by the factory.
F This option overwrites the current configuration of the IP
M odule with the configuration last saved to permanent storage.
It allows the user to perform an “Undo” type operation if the IP
M odule is put into an undesirable state by the user.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration of the IP M odule to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
245
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
16.2.9.5 Diagnostics Page
The Diagnostics Page is activated from the Operations and Maintenance Page .
IMPORTANT
Using Dump Packets Diagnostics Utilities
1. The Dump Packet Utilities will display a hexadecimal representation of each packet and should not be used when the the IP M odule is is on a “live” network.
2. Selecting the menu option a second time terminates the dump operation. Each selection toggles the value of the dump engine.
The Diagnostics Page contains the following options/fields:
Menu Options/Fields Entry
Dump Packets transmitted to Satellite Interface
Description
T Toggles [Yes] and [No]
Executing this menu option forces the IP M odule to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that it transmits over the Satellite Interface.
Dump Packets received from Satellite Interface
R Toggles [Yes] and [No]
Executing this menu option forces the it receives from the Satellite Interface.
IP M odule to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that
Dump Packets transmitted to Ethernet Interface
U Toggles [Yes] and [No]
Executing this menu option forces the IP M is transmitted to the Ethernet Interface. odule to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that
246
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Menu Options/Fields Entry
Dump Packets received from Ethernet Interface
Description
V Toggles [Yes] and [No]
Executing this menu option forces the IP M it receives from the Ethernet Interface. odule to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that
Dump Packets received by
Router
Dump Packets sent to
EndStation
Dump Packets received from EndStation
B Toggle [Yes] and [No]
Executing this menu option forces the IP M odule to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that is received by the routing engine. (Note: Does not apply when in easyConnect mode.)
G Toggle [Yes] and [No]
Executing this menu option forces the IP M odule to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that is received by and destined for this modem. This traffic would include Pings, SNMP, Telnet, HTTP, and FTP types of traffic.
H Toggle [Yes] and [No]
Executing this menu option forces the IP M odule to dump a hexadecimal representation of each packet that is sourced from this modem and destined for some other device. This allows a user to see what type of packets this modem is generating internally.
Ping
Traceroute
Command Line Debug
Prompt
Save Parameters
Exit
P Enter the ip address in aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format
A Enter the ip address in aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd format
D Enter the password to access the debug command line.
Note: This is reserved for Customer Service and engineering use.
S This option allows a user to save the current configuration to permanent storage. This configuration will be restored on each successive power cycle.
X This option allows a user to exit the current menu and return to its parent menu.
247
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
16.2.10 Telnet - Logout Option
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
When connecting to the IP Module through a Telnet session, the menus present another option to logout of the Telnet session. This logout option is in all the menus and when selected, logs the user out of the Telnet session, returning control of the CLI to the serial interface.
IMPORTANT
The IP M odule does not allow concurrent access to the menu via telnet and the console port. If a user connects via telnet, IP M odule automatically disables the console port for the duration of the Telnet session. All menu pages allow a Telnet logout to end a Telnet session. Also, the IP M odule will automatically end a
Telnet session after a period of inactivity (configurable from 1 to 60 minutes).
248
Chapter 17. Web Server Pages
17.1 Web Server Usage
The embedded Web Server application provides the user with an easy to use interface to configure and monitor all aspects of the CDM-570L/IP Module. These web pages have been designed for optimal performance when using Microsoft’s Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher. By typing http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” (where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx =IP Module IP address) on your browser, the Login prompt will appear.
249
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
HTTP Login Access Levels are defined as follows:
User Interface
Admin User
User Login Access Level
Read/Write User Read Only User
N O A CCESS TO A DMIN
OR E NCRYPTION W EB
PAGES
Web F
ULL A CCESS TO ALL W EB
P AGES
F ULL A CCESS FOR ALL
OTHER W EB P AGES
N O A CCESS TO A DMIN
OR E NCRYPTION W EB
PAGES
V IEW O NLY A CCESS FOR
ALL OTHER W EB P AGES ,
ABLE TO RESET
S TATISTICS
IP Module Default Name/Passwords are:
• Admin comtech/comtech
• Read/Write opcenter/1234
• Read Only monitor/1234
IMPORTANT
Any changes made to the IP Module will be lost if the IP Module is reset or loses power unless the changes are saved to permanent storage . This applies to all of the IP Module IP parameters. The IP Module parameters can be saved by selecting “Save Parameters to Permanent Storage” on the Maintenance/IP Dbase web page.
All base modem parameters configured via the IP Module (i.e., TX Frequency, data rate, etc.) and the Ethernet Port Address/Mask will be automatically stored in the
CDM-570L base modem non-volitile RAM and will be retained if there is a power loss.
IMPORTANT
See Chapter 16 IP Module CLI and Telnet Interface section for a more detailed explanation of IP Module functions.
250
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
17.1.1 Web Server Menu Tree
Table ?.
IP Module
Web Server Menu Tree
Level 1
Home
ADMIN
CONFIG MDM
CONFIG IP
STATS
MAINTENANCE
Level 2
Home
Contact
Support
Logoff
Access
Features
Remote
Summary
Interface
Modem
Modem Utilities
BUC
LNB
Routes
Multicast Routes
ARP
QoS
IGMP
Encrypt
Ethernet
Routes
QoS
WAN
Compression
Modem Status
Modem Logs
Unit Info
IP Dbase
Reset Unit
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
251
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
17.2.1 Home Page
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Welcome to the CDM-570L/
IP Module
Web Interface. The following sections will describe the functionality that is unique to the Web Interface.
252
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
17.2.2 Contact Information
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
This page provides basic contact information to reach Comtech EF Data Sales and
Customer Support via phone or automated e-mail links.
253
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
17.2.3 Support
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Notes on SMTP – SMTP can be used to send an email to Comtech EF Data IP Modem
Support [email protected]
from the Support Web Page. The Support
Web Page allows you to compose an email message for questions or problems with the
IP Module
. The user can also select to automatically attach the
IP Module
parameter file (which will contain the modem’s serial number and configuration information) in order to facilitate troubleshooting or to resolve configuration issues. The problem report area of the display allows up to 2,000 characters maximum.
The
IP Module
uses SMTP (Simple Mail Transport Protocol) to send email and will require the modem’s administrator to specify the SMTP server, domain name and destination name on the Administration Screen for SMTP to operate correctly (see
Section 17.2.1.5 for details on Administration SMTP Configuration).
254
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
17.2.4 Logoff
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Currently the
IP Module
only allows one connection to the CLI or the Web Interface.
Use this option to formally disconnect from the Web Interface.
IMPORTANT
Upon disconnection, you will be required to close the Web Browser so as to delete the security cookie to the IP Module.
255
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
17.2.5 Administrative Data base
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Table ?. Administrative Data Base Fields
IMPORTANT
Any changes made to the IP Module will be lost if the IP Module is reset or loses power unless the changes are saved to permanent storage . This applies to all of the IP Module IP parameters. The IP Module parameters can be saved by selecting “Save Parameters to Permanent Storage” on the Maintenance/IP Dbase web page.
All base modem parameters configured via the IP Module (i.e., TX Frequency, data rate, etc.) and the Ethernet Port Address/Mask will be automatically stored in the
CDM-570L base modem non-volitile RAM and will be retained if there is a power loss.
Field
Parameter Image
Description
Select from:
Save Parameters to Flash - When changes are made to the IP
Module protocol system, the Flash Save option must be selected in order for these settings to be valid through a power cycle. Without using this option, settings will revert back to their previous state as indicated by the last time the flash was saved.
Restore Factory Defaults – uses the internal, hard-coded factory default parameters.
256
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Field
Image Load From
Image Save To
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Description
Determines which version of the IP Module Software Package
(includes Application, FPGA, and FFPGA) will be loaded upon boot-up. The possible options are:
Latest - boot the newest Software Package based upon date.
Image1 - boot the Software Package loaded into the first slot in permanent storage.
Image2 - boot the Software Package loaded into the second slot in permanent storage.
Determines which installed Software Package (includes
Application, FPGA, and FFPGA) that the IP Module will overwrite when upgrading with a new Software Package. The possible options are:
Oldest - overwrite the oldest Software Package based upon date.
Image1 - overwrite the Software Package loaded into the first slot in permanent storage.
Image2 - overwrite the Software Package loaded into the second slot in permanent storage.
257
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
17.2.6 Reset Unit
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The last item on the left-hand menu is “Reset.” This option will force the internal IP
Module to reboot.
Notes: 1. The main modem will NOT reboot.
2. There is no verification of the reboot, other than the web-interface timing out due to the reboot time of the IP Module.
258
Chapter 18. SNMP Interface
18.1 SNMP Interface
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is an application-layer protocol designed to facilitate the exchange of management information between network devices. The CDM-
570L SNMP agent supports both SNMPv1 and v2c.
IMPORTANT
For proper SNMP operation, the CDM-570L MIB files must be used with the associated version of the CDM-570L base modem M&C and the IP Controller SW. Please refer to the CDM-570L SW Release Notes for information on the required FW/SW compatibility.
18.2 CDM-570L Management Information Base (MIB) Files
MIB files are used for SNMP remote management and consist of Object Identifiers (OID’s).
Each OID is a node that provides remote management of a particular function. A MIB file is a tree of nodes that is unique to a particular device. There are four MIB files associated with the CDM-570L:
MIB
File/Name fw10874-2-
.mib
ComtechEF
Data MIB file
Description
ComtechEFData MIB file gives the root tree for ALL Comtech EF Data products and consists of only the following OID:
Name: comtechEFData
Type: MODULE-IDENTITY
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247
Full path: iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private
(4).enterprises(1).comtechEFData(6247)
259
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Module: ComtechEFData fw10874-3-
.mib
CDMIP
Controller
MIB file
CDMIP Controller MIB file consists of all of the OID’s for management of the IP
Controller functions. fw10874-4-
.mib
CDM-570L
MIB file
CDM-570L MIB file consists of all of the OID’s for management of the CDM-570L modem functions fw10874-5-
.mib
CDM-570L
Traps
MIB file
CDM-570L Trap MIB file is provided for SNMPv1 traps
These MIB files should be compiled in a MIB Browser or SNMP Network Monitoring
System server.
Note: The CDM-570L SNMP agent supports both SNMPv1 and v2c. The CDM-570L Traps file only needs to be compiled if SNMPv1 traps are to be used.
IMPORTANT
Any changes made to the IP Controller will be lost if the IP Controller is reset or loses power unless the changes are saved to permanent storage. This applies to all of the Controller IP parameters. The Controller parameters can be saved by a SET of the cdmipSaveConfiguration OID within the cdmipController MIB.
All base modem parameters configured via the IP Controller (i.e. - TX Frequency, data rate, etc.) and the Ethernet Port Address/Mask will be automatically stored in the
CDM-570L base modem non-volatile RAM and will be retained if there is a power loss.
18.3 SNMP Community Strings
The CDM-IP570L uses community strings as a password scheme that provides authentication before gaining access to the CDM-IP570L agent’s MIBs.
In SNMP v1/v2c, the community string is sent unencrypted in the SNMP packets.
Caution must be taken by the network administrator to ensure that SNMP packets travel only over a secure and private network if security is a concern. A packet sniffer can easily obtain the community string by viewing the SNMP traffic on the network.
The community string is entered into the MIB Browser or Network Node Management software and is used to authenticate users and determine access privileges to the SNMP agent.
The user defines three Community Strings for SNMP access:
Read Community default = public
260
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Write Community
Trap Community default = private default = public
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
18.4 SNMP Traps
The CDM-570L has the ability to send out SNMP traps when certain events occur in the modem. For example, when the CDM-570L IP Controller boots it sends out a coldstart trap and three linkup traps, one for each interface that is brought up. The CDM-570L also sends out traps when an alarm or a fault occurs in the modem. These include unit faults,
TX faults, and RX faults. A trap is sent both when a fault occurs and is cleared.
The CDM-570L supports both SNMPv1 traps and SNMPv2 notifications. Which style of traps the CDM-570L sends can be configured by the user using the cdmipSnmpTrapVersion OID.
The following are the MIB2 v1traps/v2 notifications that the CDM-570L supports.
CDM-570L IP Controller MIB2 SNMPv1 traps:
Cold Start
Link Up
Authentication Failure
CDM-570L MIB2 SNMPv2 notifications:
1
4
5
Cold Start
Link Up
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1
1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4
Authentication Failure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5
The following tables are the Alarms and Faults v1 traps / v2 notifications that the CDM-
570L supports.
CDM-570L Alarms and Faults SNMPv1 traps:
Cdm570LUnitAlarm
Cdm570LTxTrafficAlarm
Cdm570LRxTrafficAlarm
6247241
6247242
6247243 cdm570LODUAlarm 6247244
CDM-570L Alarms and Faults SNMPv2 notifications: cdm570LunitAlarm
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.24.2.0.1
261
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
cdm570LTxTrafficAlarm
cdm570LrxTrafficAlarm
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.24.2.0.2
1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.24.2.0.3
Cdm570LODUAlarm 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.24.2.0.4
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
18.5 MIB-II
The CDM-570L agent implements RFC 1213, Management Information Base for
Network Management of TCP/IP-based Internets. This is known as “MIB-II” or “Public
MIB support.” For detailed OID information please refer to the actual MIB file. The agent implements the following Groups:
Table ?. MIB-II Support
Group Comments
System Group
Interface
IP
ICMP
Mandatory for RFC1213
Mandatory for RFC1213
Mandatory for RFC1213
Mandatory for RFC1213
TCP
UDP
SNMP
Address Translation Group
Mandatory for RFC1213
Mandatory for RFC1213
Mandatory for RFC1213
Implemented but depreciated in MIB-II
This System Group provides information about the following items:
Table ?. System Group
SysDescr CDM-570L IP-Enabled Modem
SysObjectID 1.3.6.1.4.1.6247.24
SysUpTime The time (in hundredths of a second) since the network management portion of the system was last re-initialized.
262
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
SysServices 79
The system services provided by the CDM-570L in the OSI network model are:
∑ 2 L-1 where L is the network layer support by the CDM-570L.
In the CDM-570L, this is calculated by 2 1-1 (layer 1) + 2 2-1 (layer 2) + 2
(layer 4) + 2 7-1 (layer 7) = 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 + 64 = 79.
3-1 (layer 3) + 2 4-1
This group provides the number of interfaces on a managed device and a table describing all interfaces.
The ifNumber OID is the number of network interfaces present on this system. On a
CDM-570L the ifNumber should be 3 corresponding to the Ethernet, Satellite, and loopback interfaces.
18.5.2.1 The Interfaces Table
IfIndex
IfDescr
IfType
Table ???. Interfaces Table OIDs
IfMtu
IfSpeed
OID Description
Unique value for each interface. The CDM-570L gives the satellite
(hdl1), loopback (lo0), and Ethernet (motfcc0) interfaces values of
1, 2, or 3 respectively.
Textual string containing information about the interface. The
Ethernet interface is “motfcc0”. The loopback interface is “lo0”. The satellite interface is “hdl1”.
Link protocol for the interface. The Ethernet interface is set to ethernetCsmacd(6). The loopback interface is set to softwareLoopback(24). The satellite Interface is propPointToPointSerial(22).
For the Ethernet and satellite Interfaces, the MTU is 1500 octets.
Estimate of the interface's current bandwidth in bits per second.
The Ethernet Interface can be set to either 100000000 (100 Mbps) or 10000000 (10 Mbps). If the Ethernet driver is set to “Auto” then
100000000 will be returned. The satellite Interface’s ifSpeed corresponds to the data rate of the transmitter only. The transmitter’s ifSpeed can range from 2400 (2.4 Kbps) to 5000000
( 5.0 Mbps). If the CDM-570L is a demod-only then ifSpeed will be zero.
263
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
OID Description ifPhyAddress Interface's address at the datalink layer. For the Ethernet Interface this corresponds to the MAC address (6 bytes). For the satellite and loopback Interface this value is undefined. ifAdminState Desired state of the interface. For the CDM-570L, the interfaces cannot be changed from an up (1) status. ifOperState ifLastChange
Current operational state of the interface. For the CDM-570L, the interfaces will remain in an up (1) status.
Per RFC1213
IfInOctets ifInUcastPkts ifInNUcastPkts ifInDiscards
IfInErrors ifInUnknownProtos ifOutOctets ifOutUcastPkts
Per RFC1213
Per RFC1213
Per RFC1213
Per RFC1213
Per RFC1213
Per RFC1213
Per RFC1213
Per RFC1213
Per RFC1213 ifOutNUcastPkts
IfOutDiscards
IfOutErrors
IfOutQLen
IfSpecific
Per RFC1213
Per RFC1213
Per RFC1213
This OID is not used.
18.5.2.2 AT Group
This group contains a table that permits mappings from network addresses (i.e., IP addresses) to physical addresses (i.e., MAC addresses). This group is depreciated.
18.5.2.3 The Address Translation table
This table is implemented per RFC1213.
18.5.2.4 IP Group
This group is implemented per RFC1213.
264
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
18.5.2.5 The IP Address Table
This table is implemented per RFC1213.
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
18.5.2.6 The Route Table
Because the CDM-570L does not use a standard route table, the functionality usually provided by the ipRouteTable is implemented in the IP-Controller’s private MIB. Please use the IP Controller private MIB’s route table to add, change, or delete routes.
18.5.2.7 The Net to Media Translation table
This table is implemented per RFC1213.
18.5.2.8 Additional IP Objects
The ipRoutingDiscards OID is the number of routing entries which were chosen to be discarded even though they are valid.
This group contains the Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) input and output statistics. ICMP messages are used for out-of-band messages related to network operation. This group is implemented per RFC1213.
This group contains statistics and control parameters for the TCP protocol. This group contains a table describing the current TCP connections.
Note: The instances of object types that represent information about a particular TCP connection are transient; they persist only as long as the connection in question.
Table ?. TCP Group OIDs
265
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
OID Description
TcpRtoAlgorithm Algorithm used to determine the timeout value used for retransmitting unacknowledged octets. The CDM-570L uses Van
Jacobson's algorithm.
TcpRtoMin Minimum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. The CDM-570L uses a minimum timeout of 1000 milliseconds.
TcpRtoMax Maximum value permitted by a TCP implementation for the retransmission timeout. The CDM-570L uses a maximum timeout of 64000 milliseconds.
TcpMaxConn Limit on the total number of TCP connections the entity can support. In the CDM-570L, the maximum number of connections is dynamic so a value of –1 is returned.
TcpActiveOpens Per RFC1213
TcpPassiveOpens Per RFC1213
TcpAttemptFails Per RFC1213
TcpEstabResets Per RFC1213
TcpCurrEstab Per RFC1213
TcpInSegs Per RFC1213
TcpOutSegs Per RFC1213
TcpRetransSegs Per RFC1213
18.5.4.1 The TCP Connection Table
The tcpConnTable is a table containing TCP connection-specific information. Each row contains information about a particular current TCP connection. A row is transient, in that it ceases to exist when the connection makes the transition to the CLOSED state.
This table is implemented per RFC1213.
This group contains control parameters and statistics for the UDP protocol. This group contains a UDP table describing the UDP ports in use. This group is implemented per
RFC1213.
18.5.5.1 The UDP Listener Table
The UDP listener table contains information about this entity's UDP end-points on which a local application is currently accepting datagrams. A row contains information about a particular current UDP listener. This group is implemented per RFC1213.
266
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
18.5.6 Group
This group is not implemented in the agent.
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
18.5.7 Transmission Group
This group is not implemented in the agent.
18.5.8 SNMP Group
This group provides statistical information regarding the SNMP Protocol. This group is implemented per RFC1213.
18.6 CDM-IP IP Controller Private MIB
The CDM-570L SNMP agent also implements two private MIBs. The IP Controller MIB
(CDM-IP Controller) holds all the security, feature selection, and IP related parameters and the CDM-570L modem MIB (CDM-570L) which contains all the modem specific parameters. For detailed OID information please refer to the actual MIB file.
This group contains system security, administration, and feature configuration parameters.
18.6.1.1 CDM-IP Access Lists Subgroup
The Access Client List allows a user to define which remote clients can connect to a
CDM-IP570L when the Access List Enforcement is enabled. Each entry allows a user to specify an IP address and a subnet mask to define a unique class of clients that are allowed access to the CDM-IP570L.
18.6.1.2 Features Availability Subgroup
This subgroup tells if a feature is available or unavailable in the CDM-570L. The currently supported FAST features are QoS, IGMP, 3xDES Encryption, Header
Compression and Payload Compression. These features must be purchased as additional options.
267
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
18.6.1.3 Features Subgroup
This subgroup allows a user to enable/disable a Standard or FAST feature.
Standard features (telnet, ping response, multicast routing, and IGMP) can be enabled or disabled by sending a 1 (enable) or 0 (disable).
FAST Features that have been purchased can be enabled or disabled by a user. Not yet purchased FAST Features will remain disabled.
18.6.1.4 Encryption Subgroup
This subgroup controls the parameters for the Triple DES (3xDES) feature. Each
Transmit/Receive key is of 192-bit length.
Note: This subgroup will only be accessible in the MIB tree if the Encryption FAST feature has been purchased and the license key has been entered through the modem’s front panel.
Otherwise, both GETS and SETS on these OIDs will return errors.
18.6.1.5 CDM-IP SMTP
The cdmipSmtp subsection sets up the CDM570L to use a SMTP mail server to send a problem report back to Comtech EF Data Modem Support. Along with the problem report, the CDM570L sends the equipment serial number and configuration, which is attached to the email message. By default, the problem report is sent to [email protected]
. In order for this to work, the user is required to enter the IP address of their outgoing SMTP mail server and the domain name for that server.
18.6.1.6 SNMP Traps
This cdmipSnmp subsection controls where SNMP traps are sent and the community string used in sending traps. Either V1 or V2 traps can be sent.
This group controls the parameters of the modem’s Ethernet and satellite interfaces.
18.6.2.1 Ethernet Interface Subgroup
This subgroup defines the modem’s Ethernet interface. These include parameters for setting the Ethernet speed, IP address, and IP address subnet prefix length.
18.6.2.2 Satellite Interface Subgroup
268
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
CAUTION
This subgroup defines the modem’s satellite interface.
Changing the HDLC Address mode between Point-to-Point Mode, Small Network
Mode, and Large Network Mode forces the system to reboot. System configuration will be saved before re-booting. Please make sure you are setting the correct value.
The cdmipIpRouteTable allows a user to define how the packets that the CDM-570L receives are routed. By this table, a user can define which DES key to use for a route.
Note: In order for the CDM-570L to properly pass packets over the satellite interface, the user MUST provide the appropriate IP to HDLC address mapping in the Route table. This Route table is Comtech EF Data’s proprietary implementation, where the user specifies a HDLC address as a next-hop for a route destined to the satellite interface.
Table 17. Route Table OIDs
OID Description cdmipIpRouteIndex Sequential number that corresponds to the row index in the Route table. The route index starts at 1. cdmipIpRouteName Name assigned by the user to reference the route. The assigned name cannot contain any white space and must be unique. cdmipIpRouteDestAddress cdmipIpRouteDestMaskLen
Destination IP address for the route.
Length of the network portion of the subnet mask. cdmipIpRouteNextHopAddress IP address where the packet will be routed for further processing. The Next Hop IP Address must be on the same subnet as the Ethernet. cdmipIpRouteMulticastOptions This OID can be set to: cdmipRouteState
2
3
Eth To Sat Routing
Sat To Eth Routing
4 Sat To Eth And Eth To Sat Routing
Defines destination interface of the route toSatellite(1) toEthernet(2)
Set this member to ‘toSatellite’ before setting cdmipRouteHdlcAddress.
269
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
OID Description cdmipRouteHdlcAddress To send packets over satellite interface, the user needs to configure the route entry with a valid HDLC address. This parameter is similar to next-hop IP address. The user has to set the member ‘cdmipRouteState’ to ‘toSatellite’ before setting this member. cdmipRouteHdrComp cdmipRoutePayloadComp
Allows the user to specify Header
Compression for a Route.
Allows the user to specify Payload
Compression for a Route. cdmipIpRouteDesKey Allows the user to specify which Encryption
Key should be used to encrypt traffic for a route. This parameter can be one of three values: clear, key1-8, or random. Clear will force the CDM-IP570L to not encrypt any traffic processed for the route. Keyx will use the key specified in the keyx to encrypt traffic for the route.
Can be set to:
10 Clear
9 Random
270
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
OID Description
CdmipIpRouteRowStatus Used in GET operations to tell if the route table entry is active. Used in SET operations to tell if a new route table entry is to be created or an existing route table entry is to be deleted.
It returns 1 (active) to indicate that the route entry is available for use by the managed device. The values of 2 (notInService) and 3
(notReady) are not supported.
When a new route entry is created, this OID must be set to 4 (createAndGo). The value of
5 (createAndWait) is not supported.
If an existing row is to be deleted this OID must be set to 6 (destroy), which indicates that the user’s desire to delete the route from the route table.
The “cdmipIpRouteRowStatus” can return:
1 Active
The “cdmipIpRouteRowStatus” can be set to the following for row create/delete:
4 Create And Go
6 Destroy
Note : The “cdmipIpRouteHdrComp,” “cdmipIpRoutePayloadComp” or “cdmipIpRouteDesKey”
OID will only be accessible if the FAST feature has been purchased and activated.
Otherwise, a get GET will return 1 (clear) and a set SET will return an error.
The protocols groups allows user to control networking protocols such as IGMP.
18.6.4.1 IGMP Subgroup
This subgroups controls the IGMP, Internet Group Management Protocol, which is the standard for IP multicasting in the Internet.
This group controls a redundant pair of modems.
271
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
18.6.6 Operation and Maintenance Group
This groups contains several miscellaneous operations for the IP Controller card, including saving the IP Controller’s configuration, restoring factory defaults, and resetting the IP Controller. This groups also allows the user to define which image to boot from and into which image to save a new bulk file.
This group collects various statistics on the IP Controller’s Ethernet interface, satellite interface, IP routing, QoS, and Compression.
18.6.7.1 Ethernet Statistics
The cdmipEthernetStatistics section collects statistics reported on the Ethernet network card.
18.6.7.2 IP Routing Statistics
The cdmipIpRoutingStatistics reports statistics collected by the IP router mechanism.
18.6.7.3 QoS Statistics
This subgroup contains the Quality of Service (QoS) statistics elements. This is implemented as a table with maximum number of configured QoS rules, as the rows.
Note: This subgroup will only be accessible in the MIB tree if the QoS FAST feature has been purchased and activated. Otherwise, both gets GETs and sets SETs on these OIDs will return errors.
18.6.7.4 WAN Statistics
The cdmipWanFpgaStatistics section collects statistics reported on the WAN (satellite interface) FPGA.
18.6.7.5 Compression Statistics
This subgroup contains the Compression statistics elements. This is implemented as a table with maximum number of configured QoS rules, as the rows.
Note: This subgroup will only be accessible in the MIB tree if the Header and/or
Compression FAST feature has been purchased and activated. Otherwise, both gets GETs and sets SETs on these OIDs will return errors.
272
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
18.6.8 QoS Rules Group
The cdmipQosRules group allows the user to configure the QoS feature. The group contains the QoS table which allows the user to add rules to define how different types of traffic will be treated by the router.
18.7 CDM-570L Private MIB
IMPORTANT
Whenever modifying the Modulator or Demodulator parameters by SNMP, the user must be aware that the following variables must be executed in this order:
1. FEC (Forward Error Correction)
2. Modulation or Demodulation
3. Code Rate
4. Data Rate
For detailed OID information please refer to the actual MIB file.
This group contains basic system information concerning the modem, including serial number, temperature, and configured modem options.
This group allows the user to configure the modem’s transmitter, receiver, framing options (AUPC and EDMAC), data interfaces, reference, and alarm masks. In addition,
LNB and BUC units attached to the modem can also be configured.
18.7.2.1 Remote Control Parameters
The cdm570LRemoteControl section allows the user to configure the management IP address and subnet mask for the modem. The user can also verify that the modem is in
“Remote” state for management through SNMP.
18.7.2.2 Tx Parameters
The cdm570LTx section allows the user to configure the modem’s modulator.
273
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
18.7.2.3 Rx Parameters
The cdm570LRx section allows the user to configure the modem’s demodulator.
18.7.2.4 Frame Parameters
The cdm570LFrame section allows the user to turn framing on and off. When framing is enabled, the user can also configure Embedded Distant-End Monitor and Control
(EDMAC) parameters and Automatic Uplink Power Control (AUPC) parameters.
18.7.2.5 Interface Parameters
This section allows the user to configure the modem’s data interface.
18.7.2.6 Reference Parameters
The sections allows the user to configure the modem’s reference clock.
18.7.2.7 Alarm Mask Parameters
This section allows the user to mask alarms that the user does not want to see.
18.7.2.8 BUC Parameters
This section allows the user to configure BUC parameter if a BUC unit is attached to the modem via the FSK link.
18.7.2.9 LNB Parameters
The section allows a user to configure LNB parameters when a LNB is attached to the modem via the FSK link.
This groups reports the modem’s status, including alarms, demodulator parameters, event log entries, statistics entries, AUPC parameters, and BUC/LNB parameters.
18.7.3.1 Alarms Parameters
The cdm570LAlarms section reports any alarms that have been raised in the modem, including the modulator, demodulator, and BUC/LNB unit.
274
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
18.7.3.2 Rx Parameters
The cdm570LRxParams section reports the demodulator’s bit error rate, buffer fill state, frequency offset, receive signal level, and Eb/No value.
18.7.3.3 Event Log Parameters
The event log is a table that informs the user of any faults that have occurred in the modem. Event entries may also include informational items, such as power on/off.
18.7.3.4 Statistics Parameters
The statistics log is a table that gathers data concerning receive Eb/No and transmit power level increases over time. The user can decide to collect these statistics on intervals ranging from 10 minutes to 90 minutes.
18.7.3.5 AUPC Parameters
The cdm570LAUPCParams section reports the Eb/No value of the far-end demodulator and any transmit power level increases that have occurred because of AUPC.
18.7.3.6 BUC Parameters
This section reports BUC unit status.
18.7.3.7 LNB Parameters
This section reports LNB unit status.
275
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
This group allows the user to place the modem in various test modes.
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
This group allows the user to save and load modem configurations from non-volatile memory.
The cdm570LUtil group allows the user re-center the Plesiochronous/Doppler buffer, set the modem’s time and date, set internal reference warm-up values, set the circuit ID string, and force a redundant switch.
276
Appendix A. CABLE DRAWINGS
The EIA-530 standard pinout (provided on the CDM-570L) is becoming more popular in many applications. However, there are still many occasions when, especially for existing
EIA-422/449 and V.35 users, a conversion must be made.
For these situations, the following two cable drawings show EIA-530 to EIA-422/449
DCE conversion, and EIA-530 to V.35 DCE conversion.
The third drawing shows a standard EIA-232 cable for use with the Remote Control Port of the Modem. This should also be used for performing Flash Upgrading via an external
PC.
277
TX CLOCK A 24
TX CLOCK B 11
TX DATA A 2
TX DATA B 14
RX CLOCK A 17
RX CLOCK B 9
RX DATA A 3
RX DATA B 16
INT TX CLK A 15
INT TX CLK B 12
RCVR READY A 8
RCVR READY B 10
RS A 4
RS B 19
CS A 5
CS B 13
SIG GROUND 7
PROT GND 1
OVERALL SHIELD
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
LINK
TOGETHER
IN SHELL
17 TX CLOCK A
35 TX CLOCK B
4 TX DATA A
22 TX DATA B
8 RX CLOCK A
26 RX CLOCK B
6 RX DATA A
24 RX DATA B
5 INT TX CLK A
23 INT TX CLK B
13 RCVR READY A
31 RCVR READY B
7 RS A
25 RS B
9 CS A
27 CS B
20 SIG GROUND
19 SIG GROUND
37 SIG GROUND
1 PROT GND
LENGTH = TBD
NOTES:
USE METAL BACKSHELLS
FOR D TYPE CONNECTORS
ENSURE SHIELDING FOIL
AND/OR BRAID IS BONDED
TO METAL BACKSHELL FOR
EMC SHIELDING
(9 TWISTED PAIRS PLUS OVERALL FOIL/BRAID SCREEN)
CDM-570L EIA530 TO RS422/449 DCE CONVERSION CABLE
SHOULD BE
FEMALE
SCREWLOCKS
THIS END
TX CLOCK A 24
TX CLOCK B 11
TX DATA A 2
TX DATA B 14
RX CLOCK A 17
RX CLOCK B 9
RX DATA A 3
RX DATA B 16
INT TX CLK A 15
INT TX CLK B 12
RS A 4
CS A 5
RCVR READY A 8
SIG GROUND 7
PROT GND 1
OVERALL SHIELD
NOTES:
USE METAL BACKSHELLS
FOR D TYPE CONNECTORS
ENSURE SHIELDING FOIL
AND/OR BRAID IS BONDED
TO METAL BACKSHELL FOR
EMC SHIELDING
LENGTH = TBD
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
TWISTED PAIR
LINK
TOGETHER
IN SHELL
U TX CLOCK A
W TX CLOCK B
P TX DATA A
S TX DATA B
V RX CLOCK A
X RX CLOCK B
R RX DATA A
T RX DATA B
Y INT TX CLK A
AA INT TX CLK B
C RTS
D CTS
F RCVR READY A
B SIG GROUND
A PROT GND
(7 TWISTED PAIRS PLUS OVERALL FOIL/BRAID
SCREEN BELDEN 8107 OR 8307, OR NEAR
EQUIVALENT)
CDM-570L EIA530 TO V.35 DCE CONVERSION CABLE
9 PIN D FEMALE
9 PIN D FEMALE 9 PIN D FEMALE
PC 9 PIN SERIAL PORT TO CDM-570L RS232 REMOTE CONTROL PORT
2
3
5
9 PIN D FEMALE
Appendix B. Eb/No
MEASUREMENT
Although the CDM-570L calculates and displays the value of receive Eb/No on the front panel of the unit, it is sometimes useful to measure the value using a spectrum analyzer, if one is available.
281
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
The idea is to accurately measure the value of (Co+No)/No, (Carrier density + Noise density/Noise density). This is accomplished by tuning the center frequency of the
Spectrum analyzer to the signal of interest, and measuring the difference between the peak spectral density of the signal (the flat part of the spectrum shown) and the noise density. To make this measurement:
• Use a vertical scale of 1 or 2 dB/division.
• Set the Resolution Bandwidth of the Spectrum Analyzer to < 20 % of the symbol rate.
• Use video filtering and/or video averaging to reduce the variance in the displayed trace to a low enough level that the difference can be measured to within 0.2dB.
• Place a marker on the flat part of the signal of interest, then use the MARKER
DELTA function to put a second marker on the noise to the side of the carrier. This value is (Co+No)/No, in dB.
• Use this value of (Co+No)/No in the table on the following page to determine the
Eb/No. You will need to know the operating mode to read from the appropriate column.
• If the (Co+No)/No value measured does not correspond to an exact table entry, interpolate using the two nearest values.
Note that the accuracy of this method degrades significantly at low values of
(Co+No)/No (approximately less than 6 dB).
Example:
In the diagram above, the (Co+No)/No measured is 4.6 dB. If Rate 1/2 QPSK is being used, this would correspond to an Eb/No of approximately 2.6 dB.
The exact relationship used to derive the table values is as follows:
Eb/No = 10 log where:
10
(10
(Co+No/No )/10)
-1) - 10 log
10
(FEC Code Rate) - 10 log
10
(bits/symbol)
• Eb/No and (Co+No)/No are expressed in dB
• Bits/symbol = 1 for BPSK
• Bits/symbol = 2 for QPSK
• Bits/symbol = 3 for 8-PSK/8-QAM
• Bits/symbol = 4 for 16-QAM
• Code Rate for ‘uncoded’ = 1
• Pay close attention to the sign of the middle term
282
(Co+No)
/No
Eb/No
Uncoded
BPSK
Eb/No
Rate 1/2
BPSK
Eb/No
Rate 21/44
BPSK
Eb/No
Rate 5/16
BPSK
Eb/No
Uncoded
QPSK
Eb/No
Rate 1/2
QPSK
Eb/No
Rate 3/4
QPSK
Eb/No
Rate 7/8
QPSK
Eb/No
Rate 0.95
QPSK
Eb/No
8-PSK
Eb/No
8-PSK
Eb/No
8-PSK
Eb/No
8-PSK
Eb/No
16-QAM
Eb/No
16-QAM
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
-
-
0.0
0.9
-
-
-
-
-
-
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
19.4
19.9
20.4
20.9
21.4
21.9
22.5
23.0
12.5
13.1
13.6
14.2
14.7
15.2
15.8
16.3
16.8
17.3
17.9
18.4
18.9
4.8
5.6
6.3
7.1
7.7
2.1
2.6
3.0
3.9
-
-
-
0.7
1.2
1.7
8.4
9.0
9.6
10.3
10.8
11.4
12.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
18.0
18.5
19.0
19.5
20.0
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
2.8
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2
2.4
2.6
5.0
5.5
6.0
6.5
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.5
9.0
9.5
-
-
-
0.9
1.4
1.9
2.3
2.8
3.2
4.1
5.0
5.8
6.5
7.3
7.9
8.6
9.2
9.8
10.5
11.0
11.6
12.2
12.7
13.3
13.8
14.4
14.9
15.4
16.0
16.5
17.0
17.5
18.1
18.6
19.1
19.6
20.1
20.6
21.1
21.6
22.1
22.7
23.2
0.8
1.5
2.1
2.7
3.2
3.7
4.2
4.6
5.0
5.9
6.8
7.6
8.4
9.1
9.8
10.4
11.1
11.7
12.3
12.9
13.4
14.0
14.6
15.1
15.7
16.2
16.7
17.3
17.8
18.3
18.8
19.4
19.9
20.4
20.9
21.4
21.9
22.4
23.0
23.5
24.0
24.5
25.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1.1
1.7
2.4
3.0
3.6
4.3
4.8
5.4
6.0
6.5
7.1
7.6
8.2
8.7
9.2
9.8
10.3
10.8
11.3
11.9
12.4
12.9
13.4
13.9
14.4
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.5
17.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0.9
1.8
2.6
3.3
4.1
4.7
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.3
7.8
8.4
9.0
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.8
13.3
13.8
14.3
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.4
16.9
17.4
17.9
18.4
18.9
19.5
20.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0.8
1.5
2.3
2.9
3.6
4.2
4.8
5.5
6.0
6.6
7.2
7.7
8.3
8.8
9.4
9.9
10.4
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.1
13.6
14.1
14.6
15.1
15.6
16.1
16.6
17.1
17.7
18.2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0.9
1.7
2.3
3.0
3.6
4.2
4.9
5.4
6.0
6.6
7.1
7.7
8.2
8.8
9.3
9.8
10.4
10.9
11.4
11.9
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
16.5
17.1
17.6
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1.3
1.9
2.6
3.2
3.8
4.5
5.0
5.6
6.2
6.7
7.3
7.8
8.4
8.9
9.4
10.0
10.5
11.0
11.5
12.1
12.6
13.1
13.6
14.1
14.6
15.1
15.6
16.1
16.7
17.2
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4.8
5.4
6.0
6.5
7.1
7.6
8.2
8.7
9.2
9.8
10.3
10.8
11.3
11.9
12.4
12.9
13.4
13.9
14.4
14.9
15.4
15.9
16.5
17.0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4.9
5.5
6.0
6.6
7.1
7.7
8.2
8.7
9.3
9.8
10.3
10.8
11.4
11.9
12.4
12.9
13.4
13.9
14.4
14.9
15.4
16.0
16.5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4.8
5.3
5.9
6.4
7.0
7.5
8.0
8.6
9.1
9.6
10.1
10.7
11.2
11.7
12.2
12.7
13.2
13.7
14.2
14.7
15.3
15.8
Notes: IBS Framing: add 0.2 dB EDMAC Framing: rates below 2048 kbps add 0.2 dB, otherwise 0 Reed-Solomon: add an additional 0.4 dB to the values shown
11.9
12.4
12.9
13.4
13.9
14.4
15.0
15.5
7.2
7.7
8.3
8.8
9.3
5.0
5.6
6.1
6.7
9.8
10.4
10.9
11.4
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4.5
11.6
12.1
12.6
13.1
13.6
14.1
14.7
15.2
6.9
7.4
8.0
8.5
9.0
-
5.3
5.8
6.4
9.5
10.1
10.6
11.1
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
11.0
11.5
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.1
14.6
6.3
6.8
7.4
7.9
8.4
-
-
5.2
5.8
8.9
9.5
10.0
10.5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
This page is intentionally blank
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
284
Appendix C. FAST Activation
Procedure
Introduction
FAST is an enhancement feature available in Comtech EF Data products, enabling onlocation upgrade of the operating feature set—in the rack—without removing a modem from the setup. This accelerated upgrade can be accomplished only because of FAST’s extensive use of programmable devices incorporating Comtech EF Data-proprietary signal processing techniques. These techniques allow the use of a unique access code to enable configuration of the available hardware. The access code can be purchased at any time from Comtech EF Data. Once obtained, the access code is loaded into the unit through the front panel keyboard.
Activation Procedure
Serial Number
Obtain the Modem serial number as follows: a. From the main menu, select Util , then FAST , then ENTER . b. The Modem motherboard Serial Number is displayed on the bottom line
FAST:Cnfg View (H/W 0.03)
MainBoard S/N: 123456789
285
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
View currently installed features
To view the currently installed features, proceed as follows: a. From the main menu, select Util , then FAST , then View , then ENTER . the ▼ arrow keys to scroll through the Modem Options and note which are ‘Installed’ or ‘Not Installed’. Any that are ‘Not Installed’ may be purchased as a FAST upgrade.
View Options: 09 ( ▲ ▼ )
5000 kbps Not Installed
Contact a Comtech EF Data sales representative to order features. You will be asked to provide the Modem Serial Number. Comtech EF Data Customer Support personnel will verify the order and provide an invoice and instructions, including a
20-character configuration code.
Enter Access Codes
Enter the access codes as follows: a. Press to return to the menu. c. Select , then press ENTER. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to Edit Code .
FAST Configuration:
Edit Code Demo Mode
d. Press .
Edit 20 digit FAST Code:
00000000000000000000 ENT
e. Enter the code carefully. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to each character. Use the ▲ ▼ arrow keys to edit the character, then press ENTER .
The modem will respond with “Configured Successfully” if the new FAST option has been accepted as shown below.
Configured Successfully
(ENTER or CLEAR)
If, on the other hand, the FAST code is rejected, the following menu will be displayed:
286
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
FAST Code Rejected!
(ENTER or CLEAR)
Enable / Disable Demo Mode
Control FAST Demo Mode as follows: a. Press to return to the menu. b. Select , then press ENTER. Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to Demo Mode .
FAST Configuration:
Edit Code Demo Mode
c. Press .
FAST Demo Mode: Off On
604800 seconds remain
Use the ◄ ► arrow keys to move the cursor to select Off or On. When On, the second line will display the under of seconds remaining available for the free Demo Mode. When enabled, Demo Mode allows access to ALL CDM-
570L FAST options for 604800 seconds (7 full days). Demo Mode may be turned on and off an unlimited number of time until the 604800 seconds have expired. The seconds count is only decrement when the mode is On. When the Demo period expires the following menu is display displayed:
FAST Demo Mode: Off On
Demo Period Expired
IMPORTANT
CHANGING THE STATE OF DEMO MODE WILL CAUSE THE MODEM FIRMWARE TO
REBOOT. ALSO, IF DEMO MODE IS ENABLED AND THE TIMER EXPIRES THE
MODEM FIRMWARE WILL REBOOT.
287
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
This page is intentionally blank
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
288
Appendix D. Quick-Start Guide
Introduction
This quick start guide will allow a user to configure a pair of CDM-570L modems with
IP Modules installed (referred to as CDM-IP in rest of the document) from beginning
(i.e., starting from factory default settings) and be able to pass traffic within minutes. It is assumed that the user is familiar with the configuration of the base satellite modem.
Equipment List
Following equipment is required:
Item Equipment
1 CDM-IP Modem
2 10/100 BaseT Ethernet Hub
Quantity
2
2
2
Comments
CDM-570L w/ IP Module, CDM-IP 550, and CDM-IP 300L
Note: customer may need to provide equipment to convert 70 MHz IF to L-band for a duplex connection depending upon modems.
Provided by customer
Note : Only 10BaseT operation is supported in easyConnect mode.
RJ-45 crossover Ethernet cables can be substituted to directly connect PC to
CDM-IP modem without the use of a hub.
Provided by customer 3 PC with NIC and a terminal emulation program
4 Console cable (DB-9 to RJ-11)
5 Ethernet cables (CAT 5)
6 IF cables
1
4
2
Supplied by Comtech EF Data
Provided by customer
Provided by customer
(To interconnect TX-RX between both
CDM-IP modems.)
289
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Equipment Setup
Step Description
1 Connect each CDM-IP to the PC via the Ethernet Hub.
2 Connect the TX IF on CDM-IP 1 to RX IF of CDM-IP 2 and vice-versa.
3 Connect the DB-9 end of the console cable to the COM1 or COM2 port of the PC and the RJ-11 end to the console port at the back of CDM-IP 1.
4 Connect CDM-IP 1 and CDM-IP 2 to suitable power supply and turn them ON.
Transmit and Receive IF Configuration
Step Description
1 Configure the transmit and receive IF parameters on CDM-IP 1 and CDM-IP 2 via the front panel.
Note: The IF parameters can also be set via console menu, Telnet, web interface and
SNMP, but for this exercise, it is recommended that the front panel be used.
2 Set the TxPower to minimum level.
3 Before proceeding to next step, make sure that each CDM-IP is appropriately carrierlocked to the other CDM-IP.
Serial console port Command Line Interface (CLI) Configuration
Step Description
1 Launch the terminal emulation program - such as HyperTerminal on Microsoft Windows.
2 Select the appropriate COM port (to which the DB-9 end of the console cable is connected) and configure it for:
38,400 bps
8 data bits no parity
1 stop bit no hardware flow control
3 Press return and to bring up the Main menu.
290
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
Main Menu
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Figure 22. Main Menu
To use the Command Line Interface (CLI), select the appropriate sub-menu or the entry by pressing the character indicated at the right. Enter x to return to the previous menu.
291
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Note : Any CDM-IP configuration changes need to be saved to permanent storage by selecting [ S ] from any menu screen and then typing [ y ] to save.
Restoring Factory Default Configuration
The following sections in this guide assume that the CDM-IP is still in factory default configuration for IP. If that’ is not the case, the factory default configuration can be restored from the menu:
Step Description
1 From the Main Menu, select Operations and Maintenance sub-menu [ O ].
2 From the Operations and Maintenance menu, select Database Operations sub-menu
[ D ].
3 From the Database Operations menu, select Restore Factory Default option [ R ].
4 Confirm when prompted by typing ‘ yes ’ when the following prompt is displayed:
Are you sure you want to restore factory default settings?
WARNING: Choosing Yes will restore factory defaults and then reboot..
This will erase any user configuration and restore the CDM-IP to factory default
configuration. Proceed to Section 0 to perform the easyConnect
Mode configuration or
to Section 0 to perform the Router Mode configuration.
easyConnect
Point-to-Point System Configuration
The steps in this guide will lead to the following configuration:
Ethernet Interface (fei0)
IP Address:
Mask:
172.16.10.1
255.255.255.0
Ethernet Interface (fei0)
IP Address:
Mask:
172.16.10.2
255.255.255.0
Satellite IP Modem (CDM-IP 1)
IP Address:
Mask:
172.16.10.11
255.255.255.0
RF or IF
Satellite IP Modem (CDM-IP 2)
IP Address:
Mask:
172.16.10.12
255.255.255.0
10 BaseT
Ethernet Hub
PC 1
Figure 23. easyConnect Point-to-Point System Configuration
PC 2
292
10 BaseT
Ethernet Hub
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
PC Configuration
Step Description
1 Set the IP address on PC 1 to 172.16.10.11
, mask to 255.255.255.0
.
2 Set the IP address on PC 2 to 172.16.10.12
, mask to 255.255.255.0.
3 Reboot the PCs (if required).
CDM-IP Configuration
The CDM-IP will also be in Point-to Point HDLC Addressing Mode. HDLC addresses are used to identify remote satellite interfaces when there are more than two CDM-IP modems sending and receiving traffic. In Point-to-Point Mode, there is no need to define any HDLC addresses since all of the traffic will be to and from a single remote CDM-IP.
The HDLC MAC address is user configurable.
Setting IP Address(es)
Step Description
1 From the Main Menu select Network Interface Configuration sub-menu [ I ].
2 From the Interface Configuration Menu select Ethernet Interface (fei0) sub-menu [ E ].
3 Set Ethernet IP Address [ I ].
CDM-IP 1 to 172.16.10.1
CDM-IP 2 to 172.16.10.2
4 Set Subnet Prefix Length [ M ] to 24
• Set Remote HDLC IP Address to 192.168.1.2
The other parameters can be left to their factory default settings.
At this point the basic configuration is over and you should be able to:
5 From PC1
Ping 172.16.10.1 ( CDM-IP 1 )
Ping 172.16.10.2 ( CDM-IP 2 )
Ping 172.16.10.12 ( PC 2 )
6 From PC2
Ping 172.16.10.2 ( CDM-IP 2 )
Ping 172.16.10.1 ( CDM-IP 1 )
Ping 172.16.10.11 ( PC 1 )
293
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
IMPORTANT
Do not enable IF Loopback (or link the TX to RX by a BNC cable or satellite link) on a
CDM-IP modem operating in easyConnect when connected to a LAN. In this configuration, easyConnect will resend all layer 2 broadcast packets and cause a
“broadcast storm” on the LAN.
Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration
The steps in this guide will lead to the following configuration:
Ethernet Interface (fei0)
IP Address:
Mask:
172.16.10.1
255.255.255.0
Route Table
IP Destination Next Hop Type
172.17.10.0/24 0x02 To Sat
RX HDLC Address – 0x01
Ethernet Interface (fei0)
IP Address:
Mask:
172.17.10.1
255.255.255.0
Route Table
IP Destination Next Hop Type
172.16.10.0/24 0x01 To Sat
RX HDLC Address – 0x02
Satellite IP Modem (CDM-IP 1)
IP Address:
Mask:
172.16.10.11
255.255.255.0
GW: 172.16.10.1
RF or IF
Satellite IP Modem (CDM-IP 2)
IP Address:
Mask:
172.17.10.11
255.255.255.0
GW: 172.17.10.1
10/100 BaseT
Ethernet Hub
PC 1 PC 2
Figure 24. Router Mode Point-to-Point System Configuration
10/100 BaseT
Ethernet Hub
PC Configuration
Step Description
1 Set the IP address on PC 1 to 172.16.10.11
, mask to 255.255.255.0
. Set PC Gateway to
172.16.10.1
2 Set the IP address on PC 2 to 172.17.10.11
, mask to 255.255.255.0. Set PC Gateway to
172.17.10.1
Reboot the PCs (if required).
294
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Setting CDM-IP Modems to Router Mode Operation
Perform the following steps on CDM-IP 1
Step Description
1 From the Main Menu, select Administration [ A ] sub-menu.
2 From the Administration menu, select CDM-IP Working Mode [ C ].
3 Confirm when prompted by typing ‘y’ when the following prompt is displayed:
Changing Modem working mode requires system Reboot.
Do you want to continue(Y/N)[Enter :No]
Select [ 1 ] for Router Mode .
4 Allow CDM-IP to reboot, then select Interface Configuration [ I ] from Main Menu .
5 From the Interface Configuration menu, select Satellite/HDLC Interface (hdl0) [ H ].
6 From the Satellite/HDLC Interface (hdl0) menu, select HDLC Addr Mode [ M ].
7 Confirm when prompted by typing ‘y’ when the following prompt is displayed:;
Changing HDLC address mode causes system Reboot.
Do you want to continue(Y/N)[Enter :No]
Select [ 1 ] for Small Network Mode .
8 Allow CDM-IP to reboot. After reboot, select Interface Configuration [ I ] from the Main
Menu .
9 From the Interface Configuration menu, select Receive HDLC Channel Addresses
[ H ].
10 From the Receive HDLC Channel Addresses menu, select [ 1 ] for HDLC Addr 1 . The following prompt will be displayed:
Please enter a value for the HDLC Addr 1
Press ESC to abort
HDLC address [SMALL NETWORK] in hex <0x1 - 0xFE, enter = 0001>:
Enter [2] to set HDLC Addr 1 to 0x01 .
Addr will display as 0x0001 , although only the last 2 digits are used in
Small Network Mode, allowing up to 254 separate HDLC addresses.
11 Repeat Steps 1 - 9 on CDM-IP 2 . Also, repeat Step 10 , but set HDLC Addr 1 to 0x02 .
Both CDM-IP modems are now in Router/Small Network Mode, which means that the
CDM-IP modems will be on independent IP subnets and will require adding static routes to pass traffic between them.
295
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module
The HDLC MAC address is user configurable.
Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Setting IP Address(es)
Step Description
1 From the Main Menu select Network Interface Configuration sub-menu [ I ].
2 From the Interface Configuration Menu select Ethernet Interface (fei0) sub-menu [ E ].
3 Set Ethernet IP Address [ I ].
CDM-IP 1 to 172.16.10.1
CDM-IP 2 to 172.17.10.1
4 Set Ethernet Subnet MaskSubnet Prefix Length [ M ] to 24.
Set IP Stack DES Select Key to ClearRoute Table
Perform the following steps on CDM-IP 1
Step Description
1 From Transmitter Configuration Main Menu sub-menu select Route Table [R] submenu.
2 Enter 1 to configure the first route.
3 Enter a suitable name.
4 Set IP Address to 172.17.10.0
5 Set Number of Subnet Bits to 24.
6 For Interface to which route is destined to <E-Ethernet S-Satellite Enter : S> select S.
6 For HDLC address [SMALL NETWORK] in hex <0x1 - 0xFE, enter = 0000>: select 2.
7 CDM-IP 1 Route Table should display the following:
Route Name Dest IP/SNet Bits Next Hop MultiCast State
Route001..[test 172.17.10.0/24 0x2 N/A toSat]
Perform the following steps on CDM-IP 2
Step Description
8 From Transmitter Configuration Main Menu sub-menu select Route Table [R] submenu.
9 Enter 1 to configure the first route.
10 Enter a suitable name
11 Set IP Address to 172.16.10.0
12 Set Number of Subnet Bits to 24
296
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
13 For Interface to which route is destined to <E-Ethernet S-Satellite Enter : S> select S
14 For HDLC address [SMALL NETWORK] in hex <0x1 - 0xFE, enter = 0000>: select 1
15 CDM-IP 2 Route Table should display the following:
Route Name Dest IP/SNet Bits Next Hop MultiCast State
Route001..[test 172.16.10.0/24 0x1 N/A toSat]
Set Remote HDLC IP Address to 192.168.1.2
At this point the basic configuration is over and you should be able to:
• Ping PC 1 from PC 2 and vice versa
• Ping CDM-IP 2 from PC 1 and vice versa
• Pass any other data between the 2 PCs
1 From PC1
Ping 172.16.10.1 ( CDM-IP 1 )
Ping 172.17.10.2 ( CDM-IP 2 )
Ping 172.17.10.11 ( PC 2 )
2 From PC2
Ping 172.17.10.1 ( CDM-IP 2 )
Ping 172.16.10.1 ( CDM-IP 1 )
Ping 172.16.10.11 ( PC 1 )
297
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Troubleshooting IP Module
The CDM-IP comes with a variety of diagnostic tools to aid in identifying the traffic path going into and out of the CDM-IP modem. This troubleshooting section shows how to use some of these tools and also identifies several common problems encountered when first setting up two CDM-IP modems. If following these troubleshooting steps fails to resolve the problem, contact a Customer Support representative at:
Comtech EF Data
Attention: Customer Support Department
2114 West 7th Street
Tempe, Arizona 85281 USA
(480) 333-2200 (Main Comtech EF Data Number)
(480) 333-4357 (Customer Support Desk)
(480) 333-2161 FAX or, E-Mail can be sent to the Customer Support Department at: [email protected]
easyConnect
Mode Troubleshooting
Use the following troubleshooting steps if unable to successfully send traffic in easyConnect . easyConnect Mode Troubleshooting
Step Problem Action
1 No Ping response from the locally connected PC to the
CDM-IP Ethernet port. ICMP response is ‘Request timed out’. a) Verify correct IP address/subnet on PC and
CDM-IP. b) Verify Ethernet connection – cables, hub, etc. PC, hub, and CDM-IP should have Ethernet activity
LED lit.
Note: A PC must be connected to the CDM-IP using a hub, switch or a RJ45 crossover cable. When the CDM-IP Ethernet port senses an Ethernet connection, the CLI will display: phymon_callback(): enet link change! link=1
If the connection is broken, the CLI will display: phymon_callback(): enet link change! link=0
298
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
2 No Ping response from the locally connected PC to the remote CDM-IP or remote PC.
ICMP response is ‘Request timed out’. a) Verify both CDM-IP’s are in easyConnect /Pointto-Point Modes. b) Verify IF link between modems for proper settings and carrier quality (RX signal level, E b
/N
0
, etc.). It is possible that there is a spectrum inversion, particularly if you are using the CDM-IP with RF converter equipment. If this is the case, the signal level & E b
/N
0
may be OK, but no data will be received. To correct this, invert the TX and RX
Spectrum on one of the CDM-IPs. c) Send a constant ping from the PC 1 ‘ping
172.16.10.2 –t’ to PC 2. In the CDM-IP1, go to
Operations and Maintenance/Diagnostics. Enable
‘Dump Packets transmitted to Satellite Interface’.
Verify that the Pings are being transmitted by observing 1 packet on CLI every second. If not displayed, reverify PC 1 and CDM-IP 1 settings.
Disable ‘Dump Packets transmitted to Satellite
Interface’ by entering ‘T’. d) Continue sending constant ping from the PC 1 to
PC 2. In the CDM-IP 2, go to Operations
Maintenance/Diagnostics. Enable ‘Dump Packets received from Satellite Interface’. Verify that the
Pings are being received by observing 1 packet on
CLI every second. If not displayed, reverify PC 2 and CDM-IP 2 settings. Disable ‘Dump Packets received from Satellite Interface’ by entering ‘R’.
Note: All pings transmitted will require a reply to be transmitted from the target host. Use the Diagnostics ‘Dump Packets’ tools to isolate where packets are lost in the CDM-
IP duplex paths. Also, always disable
‘Dump Packets’ before sending live traffic.
299
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Router Mode Troubleshooting
Use the following troubleshooting steps if unable to successfully send traffic in Router
Mode.
Router Mode Troubleshooting
Step Problem Action
1 No Ping response from the locally connected PC to the
CDM-IP Ethernet port. ICMP response is ‘Request timed out’. a) Verify correct IP address/subnet on PC and
CDM-IP. b) Verify Ethernet connection – cables, hub, etc. PC, hub, and CDM-IP should have Ethernet activity
LED lit.
Note: A PC must be connected to the CDM-IP using a hub, switch or a RJ45 crossover cable. When the CDM-IP Ethernet port senses an Ethernet connection, the CLI will display: phymon_callback(): enet link change!
link=1
If the connection is broken, the CLI will display:
2 No Ping response from the locally connected PC to the remote CDM-IP or remote PC.
ICMP response is ‘Request timed out’. phymon_callback(): enet link change!
link=0 a) Verify both CDM-IP’s are in Router/Small Network
Modes. b) Verify PC’s Gateways are set to local CDM-IP address. c) Verify IF link between modems for proper settings and carrier quality (RX signal level, E b
/N
0
, etc.). It is possible that there is a spectrum inversion, particularly if you are using the CDM-IP with RF converter equipment. If this is the case, the signal level & E b
/N
0
may be OK, but no data will be received. To correct this, invert the TX and RX
Spectrum on one of the CDM-IPs. a) Verify CDM-IP Route Tables are correct. 3 No Ping response from PC 1 to
PC 2 or vice versa. ICMP response is
‘ Reply from 172.XXX.10.1 -
Destination net unreachable’
300
Appendix E. FLASH UPGRADING
The CDM-570L eliminates the need for updating firmware by physically replacing
EPROMs. Instead, the CDM-570L modem uses ‘flash memory’ technology internally, and new firmware can be uploaded to the unit from an external PC, as follows:
Go to: www.comtechefdata.com
Click on: downloads
Click on: flash upgrades
This makes software upgrading very simple, and updates can now be sent via the Internet,
E-mail, or on disk. The upgrade can be performed without opening the unit, by simply connecting the modem to the USB or Ethernet port of a computer.
Ethernet FTP upload procedure:
1. Identify the reflashable product, firmware number, and version for download.
The current base modem M&C version can be viewed at the top level menu of the front panel display (press “CLR” button several times to view). Also, you can find the firmware information within the <Util > <Firmware > <Info>
<Image#1, Image#2 > menu tree.
Using serial remote control, you can query the firmware revision levels with the
<0/SWR? Command. (Abbreviated)
Or
<)/FRW? Command (Detailed)
2. Create a temporary directory (folder) on your PC.
Windows: Select File > New > Folder > and rename the New Folder to "temp" or another convenient and unused name. Assuming "temp" works, you should now have a "c:\temp" folder created.
Note: The c: is the drive letter used in this example. Any valid writable drive letter can be used.
301
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
CMD Prompt: At the command prompt (c:\>) type "MD temp" without quotes
(MD stands for make directory). This is the same as creating a new folder from
Windows. You should now have a "c:\temp" subdirectory created where c: is the drive letter used in the example.
3. Download the correct firmware file to this temporary folder.
Access the download server with the flash firmware data files link, http://206.223.8.10/linksite/flashupgrades/CDM570L/
About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and Formats:
The flashable files on the download server are organized by product first, then by firmware number, (make sure you know the correct firmware number; see step 1) version, if applicable, and release date. The base modem bulk firmware for the
CDM-570L will be F10805*_*_* (where the asterisks show revision, version and date).
The current version firmware release is provided. If applicable, one version prior to the current release is also available. Be sure to identify and download the desired version.
The downloadable files are stored in two formats: *.exe (self extracting) and
*.zip (compressed).
Some firewalls will not allow the downloading of *.exe files. In this case, download the *.zip file instead.
For additional help with "zipped" file types, refer to "pkzip for windows",
"winzip", or "zip central" help files. Pkzip for DOS is not supported due to file naming conventions.
4. Unzip the files in the temporary folder on your PC.
At least 3 files should be extracted:
a. FW10805x.bin, where "x" is the version (bulk image file).
b. FW10805x.txt, where "x" is the version (history notes).
c. README.TXT installation notes
5. Connect the client PC to the CDM-570L modem 10/100 Ethernet M&C via a hub or a switch, or directly to a PC with a crossover cable.
Base modem firmware can only be loaded via the Ethernet M&C port. Do not use the Ethernet Traffic port.
IMPORTANT
Verify the communication and connection by issuing a "ping" command to the modem.
You can find the IP address of the modem either remotely using the <0/IPA? command or from the front panel with the <Config> <Remote> <Remote> <Ethernet> menus.
302
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
To PING and FTP from DOS, press the “Start” button on the Windows toolbar, and select the “Run...” option. From Win95 or Win98, type “command”. From WinNT,
Win2K or WinXP, type “cmd”. You can also use the “DOS Prompt” or “Command
Prompt” icons in the Start Menu. Now change to the temporary directory you created earlier with “cd c:\temp”. A quick “dir” will show the downloaded files.
6. Initiate an FTP session with the modem. The example is with a DOS window.
a. From the PC, type "ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of the CDM-570L.
b. Enter your admin user name and password to complete login.
c. Verify your FTP transfer is binary by typing "bin".
d. Type "prompt" then type "hash" to facilitate the file transfers.
7. Transfer the files.
Type "put FW10805*.bin bulk:" to begin the file transfers. The destination “bulk:” must be all lower-case. It will take approximately one minute to transfer the file.
8. Verify the file transfer.
a. The PC should report that the file transfer has occurred, and the display on the modem will stop reporting “PROGRAMMING FLASH SECTOR # xx – PLEASE
WAIT”.
b. Terminate the FTP session by typing "bye" and closing the DOS window.
c. Verify that the new file loaded using the procedure in step 1.
9. Change the desired image to boot using the <Util> <Firmware> <Select> <left or right arrow to change to the other image>, then reboot the modem.
10. Verify the new software versions are booting by observing the following messages on the modem display:
Comtech CDM-570L Modem
Firmware Version: 1.1.x
303
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
Ethernet IP Module FTP Upload Procedure
1. Identify the reflashable product, firmware number, and version to be downloaded.
From the front panel display, find the IP Module information in the <Util > <Firmware >
<Info> < MPP50 > menu tree.
From the Serial Console port, view the IP Module information by selecting Operations and Maintenance/Unit Information.
From Telnet via the 10/100 Ethernet Traffic port, view the IP Module information by selecting Operations and Maintenance/ Unit Information.
From HTTP via the 10/100 Ethernet Traffic port, view the IP Module information by selecting Operations and Maintenance/Unit Information.
2. Create a temporary directory (folder) on your PC.
Windows: Select File > New > Folder > and rename the New Folder to "temp" or another convenient and unused name. Assuming "temp" works, you should now have a "c:\temp" folder created.
Note: The c: is the drive letter used in this example. Any valid writable drive letter can be used.
CMD Prompt: At the command prompt (c:\>) type "MD temp" without quotes
(MD stands for make directory). This is the same as creating a new folder from
3. Download the correct firmware file to this temporary folder. within Windows. Assuming this works, you should now have a "c:\temp" subdirectory created where c: is the drive letter used in the example.
Access the download server with the flash firmware data files link, http://206.223.8.10/linksite/flashupgrades/CDM570L/
About Firmware Numbers, File Versions, and Formats:
The flashable files on the download server are organized by product first, then by firmware number, (make sure you know the correct firmware number; see step 1) version, if applicable, and release date. The IP Module firmware for the CDM-
570L will be Fxxxxx*_*_* (where the asterisks show revision, version and date).
The current version firmware release is provided. If applicable, one version prior to the current release is also available. Be sure to identify and download the desired version.
The downloadable files are stored in two formats: *.exe (self extracting) and
*.zip (compressed).
Some firewalls will not allow the downloading of *.exe files. In this case, download the *.zip file instead.
304
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
For additional help with "zipped" file types, refer to "pkzip for windows",
"winzip", or "zip central" help files. Pkzip for DOS is not supported due to our file naming conventions.
4. Unzip the files in the temporary folder on your PC.
At least 3 files should be extracted:
a. FWxxxxxx.bin, where "x" is the version (bulk image file).
b. FWxxxxxx.txt, where "x" is the version (history notes).
c. README.TXT installation notes.
5. Connect the client PC to the CDM-570L modem 10/100 Ethernet Traffic via a hub or a switch, or directly to a PC with a crossover cable.
IP MODULE software can only be loaded via the Ethernet Traffic port; do not use the Ethernet M&C port.
IMPORTANT
Verify the communication and connection by issuing a "ping" command to the modem.
Find the IP address of the modem either remotely using the <0/IPA? command or from the front panel with the <Config> <Remote> <Remote> <Ethernet> menus.
To PING and FTP from DOS, press the “Start” button on the Windows toolbar, and select the “Run...” option. From Win95 or Win98, type “command”. From WinNT,
Win2K or WinXP, type “cmd”. You can also use the “DOS Prompt” or “Command
Prompt” icons in the Start Menu. Now change to the temporary directory you created earlier with “cd C:\temp”. A quick “dir” will show the downloaded files.
6. Initiate an FTP session with the modem. The example is with a DOS window.
a. From the PC, type "ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" where "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" is the IP address of the CDM-570L.
b. Enter admin user name and password to complete login.
c. Verify FTP transfer is binary by typing "bin".
d. Type "prompt" then type "hash" to facilitate the file transfers.
7. Transfer the files.
Type "put FWxxxxx*.bin" to begin the file transfers. It will take several minutes to transfer and write the files to flash memory.
8. Verify the file transfer.
305
CDM-570L Satellite Modem with IP Module Revision 1
MN/CDM570L.IOM
a. The PC should report that the file transfer has occurred, and the display on the modem will stop reporting “PROGRAMMING FLASH SECTOR # xx – PLEASE
WAIT”.
b. Terminate the FTP session by typing "bye" and closing the DOS window.
c. Verify that the new file loaded using the procedure in step 1.
USB procedure:
TBA
306
Unit
1 centimeter
1 inch
1 foot
Centimeter
—
2.540
30.480
Inch
0.3937
—
12.0
METRIC CONVERSIONS
Foot
0.03281
0.08333
—
Units of Length
Yard Mile
0.01094
0.2778
0.3333
6.214 x 10 -6
1.578 x 10 -5
1.893 x 10 -4
Meter Kilometer Millimeter
0.01 — —
0.254 — 25.4
0.3048 — —
1 yard 91.44 36.0 3.0 — 5.679 x 10 -4
1 6.214 x 10 -4
1 mile
1 mm
1.609 x 10
—
5 6.336
0.03937
4 5.280
—
3
—
10 3 —
—
0.9144 — —
— — —
1.609 x 10 3
—
1.609 —
— —
Unit
1 gram
1 oz. avoir.
1 oz. troy
1 lb. avoir.
1 lb. Troy
1 kilogram
Unit
32 ° Fahrenheit
212 ° Fahrenheit
-459.6
° Fahrenheit
Gram
—
28.35
31.10
453.6
373.2
1.0 x 10 3
° Fahrenheit
—
—
—
Temperature Conversions
° Centigrade
0
(water freezes)
100
(water boils)
273.1
(absolute 0)
Formulas
C = (F - 32) * 0.555
F = (C * 1.8) + 32
Ounce
Avoirdupois
0.03527
—
1.097
16.0
13.17
Units of Weight
Ounce
Troy
0.03215
0.9115
—
14.58
12.0
Pound
Avoir.
0.002205
0.0625
0.06857
—
0.8229
Pound
Troy
0.002679
0.07595
0.08333
1.215
—
Kilogram
0.001
0.02835
0.03110
0.4536
0.3732
35.27 32.15 2.205 2.679 —
2114
WEST
7
TH STREET TEMPE ARIZONA
85281
USA
480 • 333 • 2200
PHONE
480 • 333 • 2161
FAX
advertisement
Related manuals
advertisement